Generic Commissioning Instructions

4188-856_i2_12/06_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms. 1

by Honeywell

Generic Commissioning Instructions

Vigilon range of panels

Vigilon Alarm System

GENT 2003

Designed to EN54 Pt 2 & 4

Panel healthy15:45

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Fault

Disablement

Power Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Verify

Sounder

CB253

CB254

Previous Next

Vigilon Compact System

GENT 2005


Panel healthy15:45

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Fault

Disablement

Power Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Verify

Sounder

CB253

CB254

Previous Next

All Zones Clear Zones

Voice Alarm Zones

Speak Now

Auxiliary messages Emergency messages

1 42 3 5

6 97 8 10

1

2

3

1

2

3

Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm SystemGENT 2003


Panel healthy 15:45

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Fault

Disablement

Power Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Verify

Sounder

CB253

CB254

Previous Next

ALERT

BOMB

EVACUATE

MIC

TEST START

STAND DOWN

TEST END

ISSU

E2

Table of Contents

Preface- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4

Associated documents - - - - - - - - - - - - 4

Conventions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4

Preliminary information - - - - - - - - - 5Safety information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5

Abbreviations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5

Pre-visit checks- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6

Points to remember - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6

Informing responsible persons - - - - - - - - - 7

Pre-commissioning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7

A typical commissioning process - - - - - 8

Product Approval and Standards - - - - - 9Fire detection and alarm control panel - - - - - 9

S-Quad Sensors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9

34xxx Sensors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10

Sounder Strobe - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10

Interface Units - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10

Panel Controls and indications - - - - - - 11Vigilon Compact Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - 11

Vigilon Compact VA panel - - - - - - - - - - 11

Vigilon 4-loop panels (BS panel shown) - - - - 11

Controls and indications - - - - - - - - - 12

new Vigilon 4/6 loop Panels - - - - - - - 16Second fix parts supplied - - - - - - - - - - - 16

Remove the protective covers - - - - - - - - - 17

Fitting the inner door - - - - - - - - - - - - - 17

Printer paper roll - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 18

Setting the DKC card - - - - - - - - - - - - - 18

Card installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 18

Terminals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 19

Before power-up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 20

Mains supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 20

Battery installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 21

PSU LED indications - - - - - - - - - - - - - 22

Write protect link on backplane - - - - - - - - 22

EN panel factory settings - - - - - - - - - - - 22

How to configure the 'U' buttons andCB254 LED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 23

How to fit the outer door - - - - - - - - - - - 23

Vigilon Compact Panel - - - - - - - - - 24Installing the cards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 25

Wiring of external circuits- - - - - - - - - - - 27

Battery connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 28

Switching the essential controls - - - - - - - - 28

Factory settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 28

Power up- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 28

How to configure the monitored input - - - - - 30

How to configure the buttons U1 and U2 - - - - 30

How to configure LEDs CB253 and CB254 - - 30

External printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 31

Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm Panel - - - 32Cards and Terminals - - - - - - - - - - - - - 33

Master Control Board Terminals- - - - - - - - 34

Terminals on Audio Control Card (ACC) - - - 34

Factory settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 35

Loop Processor Card (LPC) - - - - - - - - - - 35

Power up- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 36

External printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 37

How to configure the monitored input - - - - - 37

How to configure the buttons U1 and U2 - - - - 37

How to configure LEDs CB253 and CB254 - - 37

How to check and set the audio signal - - - - - 37

Indications on power up - - - - - - - - - 38

Initial tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 38

Useful menu options - - - - - - - - - - - 39Panel Buzzer- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 39

Software version - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 39

Password orPersonal Identification Number- - - - - - 39

How to set up the Engineer password - - - - - 40

How to set up a Customer password - - - - - - 40

Address allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - 41Connecting Loop 1 circuit- - - - - - - - - - - 41

With Loop 1 End 1 connected - - - - - - - - - 41

How to re-allocate a loop circuit - - - - - - - - 42

Checking a loop map- - - - - - - - - - - 43To find devices on loop circuit - - - - - - - - 43

Non Volatile Memory (NVM) - - - - - - 44Hardware write protect - - - - - - - - - - - - 44

The configuration data held at the panel - - - - 44

Data Back-up & Recovery - - - - - - - - 45To back up loop data to NVM - - - - - - - - - 45

To recover loop data from NVM - - - - - - - 45

To 'software' write protect NVM - - - - - - - 45

To 'software' write unprotect NVM - - - - - - 45

How to electrically erase the NVM - - - - - - 45

Safe Addressing - - - - - - - - - - - - - 46To safe address a device - - - - - - - - - - - 46

To convert from safe to soft address - - - - - - 46

Loop circuit tests - - - - - - - - - - - - 47Loop resistance and capacitance - - - - - - - - 47

How to [Repair] a loop circuit - - - - - - - - - 47

Loop short circuit test - - - - - - - - - - - - - 47

Ground break test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 48

Positive line break test - - - - - - - - - - - - 48

Earth fault test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 49

Checking device status - - - - - - - - - - 50

Device checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51Checking the time averages - - - - - - - - - - 51

Checking the sensor Exceptions/Subfault codes 52

Exception codes for Optical (heat) (sounder)sensor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53

Exception codes for Heat sensor - - - - - - - - 54

Exception codes for Beam sensor - - - - - - - 55

Exception (or Condition) Codes for S-Quads - - 56

Pre Fire, Fire and Super fire - - - - - - - 57

Device States - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58

Generic Commissioning instructions

2 4188-856_i2_12/06_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

Optical heat (sounder) sensor states(34000 range) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58

Heat sensor states (34000 range) - - - - - - - 59

Beam sensor states (34000 range) - - - - - - - 59

S-Quad Heat sensor states - - - - - - - - - - - 60

S-Quad Optical sensor states - - - - - - - - - 60

S-Quad Dual Optical Heat / OpticalHeat sensor states- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 61

S-Quad Dual Optical Heat CO sensor states - - 61

Interface input states - - - - - - - - - - - - - 62

Installed equipment tests - - - - - - - - - 63Preparation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63

Communication to site occupants - - - - - - - 63

Commissioning computer - - - - - - - - - - - 63

Zone 'Test' mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63

'Commission' mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63

Fire Sensors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63

Manual Call Points - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 64

Interface Units - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 64

S Cubed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 64

S-Quad- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65

Sounders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65

Auxiliary equipment - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65

Repeat panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65

Mimic Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65

Deviations from standards- - - - - - - - - - - 65

Vigilon Compact Network - - - - - - - - 66Single Network connections - - - - - - - - - - 66

Wiring a Copper network - - - - - - - - - - - 67

Single network without domain bridge - - - - - 67

Network Card baud and node address Switches - 68

Powering-up the Network - - - - - - - - - - - 68

How to check a Network map - - - - - - - - - 68

How to check Network Card status - - - - - - 69

Fault Finding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 69

High errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 69

Single Vigilon Network - - - - - - - - - 70Single Network connections - - - - - - - - - - 70

Wiring a Copper network - - - - - - - - - - - 71

Wiring a Fibre network - - - - - - - - - - - - 71

Single network without domain bridge - - - - - 71

Powering-up the Network - - - - - - - - - - - 72

How to check a Network map - - - - - - - - - 72

How to check Network Card status - - - - - - 72

Fault Finding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 73

High errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 73

Multiple Vigilon Networks - - - - - - - - 74Domain Bridge using Input Output card - - - - 74

Two networks using Domain bridge IO card - - 74

Star network using Domain bridge IO cards - - 74

IO domain bridge network switch settings - - - 75

Message routing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 76

Domain bridge message passing tests - - - - - 77

Domain bridge using Fibre Optic network card - 78

FO Domain Network switch settings - - - - - - 79

Appendix A - Menu maps for EN54 Vigilon4-Loop panel, Vigilon Compact(and VA) panels - - - - - - - - - - - - - 80

Appendix A - Menu maps for BS version 3+Vigilon 4-Loop panels - - - - - - - - - - 89

Appendix B - Message Action List - - - - 97Clearable fault events - - - - - - - - - - - - - 97

Latching fault events - - - - - - - - - - - - - 97

Repairable fault events - - - - - - - - - - - - 97

Message Action list - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 97

Appendix C - Guidelines for standalonesystem commands - - - - - - - - - - - - 114

Labels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 114

Long labels- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 115

Sectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 117

Delay Blocks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 119

Time slots and time blocks - - - - - - - - - - 120

Zones - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 121

Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 121

Zone Tasks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 122

Command Builds - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 123

Sounders Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - 124

S3 Mark I- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 125

S-Cubed Mark II and S-Quad - - - - - - - - - 126

Auxiliary Relays - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 127

Appendix D - Guidelines for Networked systemcommands- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 128

Master Sectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 128

Master Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 130

Appendix E - Cards - - - - - - - - - - - 131

Appendix F - Device commissioning - - - 133


Vigilon (EN & BS) Compact (VA) panels



Preface

This is the second issue of the Commissioning instructions forthe fire alarm system based on the EN54/BS Vigilon 4/6 looppanels, Vigilon Compact (includes networking) panel andVigilon Compact Voice Alarm panel. This manual covers ENpanels having Master Control Card / Master Control Boardsoftware at version 4.3X and BS panels having Master ControlCard software at version 3.9X.

Associated documents

Programming tool manual

EN54 Vigilon 4/6-loop panel Installation instructions

EN54 Vigilon 4/6 loop panel Operating instructions

BS Vigilon 4-loop panel Installation instructions

BS Vigilon 4-loop panel Operating instructions

Vigilon Compact panel Installation instructions

Vigilon Compact panel Operating instructions

Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm panel Installation instructions

Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm panel Operating instructions

Conventions

� This is a note to highlight important text that isnormally hidden in the main text.

� This is either a caution to prevent damageto the equipment or a warning to inform ofdangerous conditions that may result in injury ordeath.

Symbol Keys

What you will see

What you will hear

Preliminary information

34K Control PanelsThis manual does not cover the34K 4-Loop Control Panels.

For information on 34K 4-LoopControl panel refer to Vigilon BS4-Loop Control panels in thismanual.

Both range of panels haveversion 3+ software and the onlydifference is in the branding.

Safety information

�1. Do not remove or replace printed circuit boards,fuses or attempt to wire the control panel with thepanel powered up. Always power down the mainssupply at the fused spur unit (disconnect device).

2. When powering up always power-up the mainssupply first before the battery supply. Thepower-down should be done in reverse order.

3. When installing the cards into the master controlboard always use anti-static work procedures.

4. Do not use anti-static procedures on liveequipment.

Abbreviations

ADC - Analogue to digital converter

C - Common

CH -channel

DEV - Device

DIL - Dual in line

DKC - Display keyboard card

DPCO - Double pole change over (relay contacts)

EOL - End of line

FAB - First action byte

HF - High frequency

IO or I/O - Input Output (Interface unit)

IP - Ingress protection

LED - Light emitting diode

LPC - Loop processor card

LPCB - Loss prevention council certification board

MCB - Master control board

MCC - Main control card or Main controller card(CARD 0)

MCP - Manual call point

Mpeg - Moving picture expert group

N/C or NC - Normally closed

N/O or NO - Normally open

NVM - Non Volatile Memory (CARD14)

O/C or OC - Open circuit

OS - Outstation (Loop device or DEV)

PC - Personal computer

PCB - Printed circuit board

PIN - Personal identification number(usercode, password, access code)

PSU - Power supply unit

PVC - Polyvinyl chloride

QB - Quick blow (fuse)

RAM -Random access memory

ROM - Read only memory

S/C or SC - Short circuit

SAB - Second action byte

SAFE - Software addressed firmware encoded

SPCO - Single pole change over (relay contacts)

SPL - Sound pressure level

T - Anti-surge (fuse)

TBA - To be advised

USB - Universal serial bus



Pre

lim

inary

info

rmati

on

Pre-visit checks

� Ensure there are accurate as fitted wiring drawingsavailable, 2 copies are required.

� Any damaged equipment has been noted forreplacement.

� Ensure access will be provided to system equipmentinstalled in the protected premises.

� The installer (electrical contractor) will be inattendance until the installation is proved.

� Site contact or representative will be available duringthe visit.

� Ensure the commissioning tool along with theassociated cables and printer, plus instructions, areavailable.

� Ensure spare parts are available, such as:

• MCP glasses

• MCP test key

• Printer paper roll

• Equipment door keys.

Points to remember

Earth leads

� All earth leads supplied with the system equipmentmust be securely fitted to maintain earth continuity.

Parts for later installation

� All unused parts should be retained in their respectivecontainer for safe keeping until required.

Loop wiring

� The loop cable should have been connected to theappropriate terminals at each device, as shown in theinstallation manual in accordance with the as fittedwiring drawings.

Enclosure

� Access into equipment enclosure is usually by meansof opening an outer door/cover. A panel may also havean inner door which may also need opening.

Unattended equipment

� Where equipment is to be left unattended, then it isimportant to close the door /cover for safety.

Copper fingers

� Copper fingers are conductive spring like strips fittedto metal assemblies. They are fitted to shield againstelectromagnetic and radio frequency interferences.Ensure the copper finger strips are intact and nodamage has occurred. Damaged fingers willreintroduce the gap to let in/out interferences.

Static precaution

� The discharge of static electricity can damage ordegrade sensitive electronic components on printedcircuit boards. Anti-static procedures should befollowed when handling static sensitive boards.

� It is important that anti-static proceduresare NOT carried out on live equipment.

Removal and disconnection

� Any disconnection of cables or removal of parts of anassembly must be restored and replaced.

Battery

� To prevent damage to batteries and equipment, theterminals of the battery must not simultaneously touchany conductive part of the equipment enclosure.

� Sealed lead acid battery can have a useful life of up to5 years from the date of manufacture, it is stronglyrecommended that batteries are replaced after 4 years.The batteries must be disposed of correctly byfollowing battery manufacturers recommendations.

Powering up

� When equipment is being powered up always connectthe mains supply before the battery supply.Power-down should be done in reverse order.

� Arcing may occur when the battery circuitis connected to mains powered equipment.



Pre

lim

inary

info

rmati

on

Panel Buzzer

� It may be necessary during commissioning to switchOff the panel buzzer. It is possible to selectively switchthe disablement, fault, fire, supervisory and commandbuild buzzer sound to Off or On. It is important toensure that the buzzer is switched On for normaloperation after commissioning.

Fire plan

� The system should be tested in accordance with theproject specification.

Sensor cover

� Each fire sensor installed in the system should havebeen fitted with a dust cover during installation. Thedust covers must be removed from all the fire sensorsafter the panel loops have been satisfactorilypowered-up and with addresses allocated to eachdevice ready for further checks and tests.

Site specific installation

� Plant equipment interfaced to the system should betested to recommendations made in the projectspecification.

Test mode (V4) & Commission Mode (V3+)

� During commissioning of the system you will need toswitch On the Test/Commission mode. It is importantto switch Off the test/commission mode after the workis over, to ensure the system operates normally.

Informing responsible persons

It is important to inform the person(s) responsible for the firealarm system that the system is being commissioned.

Pre-commissioning

� Check the installation of fire alarm equipment withreference to the most recent as fitted wiring drawings.

� Get the feel of the operating condition of areas on thesite:

• action the installer to carry out any rectificationwork plus

• report discrepancies for administration purposes.

� Where the operating condition of an area is not rightfor the equipment installed, then the appropriatereplacement action must be taken.

� Ensure the fire system equipment is installed inaccordance with the appropriate standards and projectspecification.



Pre

lim

inary

info

rmati

on

A typical commissioning process



Aty

pic

alco

mm

issio

nin

gp

rocess

Panel preparationOpen the panel doors and:– Fit the internal cables and install the loop card(s)– Ensure no external circuits are connected at this stage– Fit the end of line resistors to the master alarms and

monitored input where applicable– Connect the external printer to the panel where used– Ensure no other external circuits are connected to

devices on loop circuits.

Inform responsible person(s)Inform responsible person(s) that the fire alarmsystem is being commissioned and occupants in theprotected premises will hear test alarms.Ensure occupants are made aware of alternative siteprocedures should there be a fire event while the systemis commissioned.Survey the installation with reference to most recent

Ensure the equipment has been installed in accordancewith the appropriate standards and project specification.

as-fitted-drawings.

Pre visit checksEnsure you have:

Access to all protected areasInstaller is present to rectify wiring faultsTools and spare parts.

––––

As-fitted-drawings

Initial tests and set ups– Do a display test– Set the system clock at the panel– Configure the printer port if printer is installed– Set up engineer level password to prevent

unauthorised access to controls.

Power up– Fit the batteries and Power up the mains supply

before connecting the batteries.

Audio loop wiring testsConnect each audio loop and carry out tests.

Address allocation and loop map- Set interface switches and also also ensure

mains devices on the loop are powered up.– Connect a loop circuit– Allocate addresses to loop devices, one loop at a time.– Set switches on the interface units.

Ensure interface I/O circuits remaindisconnected at this stage.

– Power up mains powered devices– Upon successful allocation of addresses to loop

devices check the loop map. Check the devicesare installed in their correct location. Repeat theallocation process on the other loop circuits.

Retrieve the system data to Commissioning computerConnect the commissioning computer andretrieve the system data, see Commissioning tools manual.

BackupUpon successful allocation of loop circuits back upthe system data to the NVM.

Regularly back up the configuration duringcommissioning of the system.

Configure the systemConfigure the system to site specific requirement using theCommissioning tool and transmit the configuration backto the control panel, see Commissioning tool manual.

Adjust Beam sensorsAlign beam transmitter and receiver heads if installed.

Installed system testPut the panel in test mode and then carry out tests inaccordance with the recommendations of BS5839:Part 1and also in accordance with project requirements:– Fire sensors– Interface units

· Prior to functional test ensure the I/O circuits remainisolated. After functional test reconnected the I/Ocircuits and where appropriate test the I/O circuitsto project recommendations.

S- cubed - The output volume of an S-cubed can beadjusted using the [Set up] [Setup] [Device] [S-Cubed][Volume] command at the panel.Repeat and Mimic panels· Check events are displayed and indicatedAuxiliary equipment - Prior to the functional test ensurethe auxiliary equipment is isolated from the system

–

–

–

– Connect Master alarm and Monitored input circuitsand move the end-of-line resistor to the end of the circuit.

– Sounders - Conduct sound level tests to ensure thelevels do not fall below the requirements.

– Strobe - Check the appropriate S-Quad and S-Cubeddevices provide the visual alarm.

– Messages - Check the correct messages are announcedfrom the Speakers, S-Cubed and S-Quad deviceswhere installed.

– Remove the Test mode and ensure any disablements arere-enabled, such as the disablements of internal buzzer.

Devices local set upEnsure all devices on the loop circuits are set up:– Calibrate speaker circuits– Adjust volume of audio at each micro DAU– Adjust volume of S-Cubed

Loop wiring testsCarry out tests on each loop wiring and [Repair]the loop after each wiring test.

Customer passwordSet up a customer PIN / password and informresponsible person of its existence and use.

Things to do when commissioning the system.

Always power down the panel or devicewhenconnecting wires and fitting components.

working on the system, for example when

Background music and PA microphoneConnect and test Background music systemConnect and test PA microphone

––– Test the emergency microphone

Backup of configuration–– Finally if changes have been made to the

local system then retrieve the system to thecommissioning tool for future reference

Back up the local system configuration

.

Procedures forVigilon Compact VA only

Product Approval and StandardsFire detection and alarm control panel

The following fire detection and alarm control panels are LPCB approved.

Product number Description Approval

VIGn EN Vigilon 4 loop panels EN 54 Parts 2 & 4.

n can be 1, 2, 3 or 4

The COMPACT_N, VIG1-24 and VIG1-72 panels described in this manual are pending approval.

S-Quad Sensors

The following S-Quad sensors when operating in the states shown in table below are LPCB approved to the respective standard.

Product number Description Standard

S4-720 Heat sensor EN54 : Part 5 :2002* (heat)

S4-780 Heat Sensor Sounder EN54 : Part 5 :2002* (heat)EN54 : Part 3 2001 - (sounder tone~)

S4-711 Dual Optical Heat Sensor EN54 : Part 7 :2000* (optical smoke)EN54 : Part 5 :2000* (heat)CEA 4021 : 2003-07 Class P heat multisensor detector

S4-711-ST Dual Optical Heat Sensor Strobe EN54 : Part 7 :2000* (optical smoke)(Strobe - no approval) EN54 : Part 5 :2000* (heat)

CEA 4021 : 2003-07 Class P heat multisensor detector

S4-911 Dual Optical, Heat & CO Sensor EN54 : Part 7 :2000* (optical smoke)(CO - no approval) EN54 : Part 5 :2000* (heat)


S4-711-ST-VO Dual Optical Heat Sensor Speech strobe EN54 : Part 7 :2000* (optical smoke)(Speech and Strobe - no approval) EN54 : Part 5 :2002* (heat)

EN54 : Part 3 2001 - (sounder tone~)


S4-771 Dual Optical Heat Sensor Sounder EN54 : Part 7 :2000* (optical smoke)

EN54 : Part 5 :2002* (heat)EN54 : Part 3 2001 - (sounder tone~)


S4-911-ST-VO Dual Optical Heat CO Sensor Speech & Strobe EN54 : Part 7 :2000* (optical smoke)(Speech, Strobe & CO - no approval) EN54 : Part 5 :2002* (heat)

EN54 : Part 3 2001 - (sounder tone~)


* - these devices are LPCB approved when operating in the LPCB approved STATE, see table below.

� If an S-Quad sensor is configured to operate a non LPCB state, then this will contravene the LPCB approval.The required state is configured during commissioning and can be configured at the control panel.

Device LPCB approvedsensor STATE *

Meets

Dual optical & Heat sensor(S4-711 & S4-711-ST)

State 0 Medium optical smoke / Class A1 heat

State 5 Medium optical smoke / Class B heat

State 8 Delayed medium optical smoke / Class A1 heat

Dual optical, Heat & CO sensor(S4-911)


State 9 Class A1 heat

Heat sensor (S4-720) State 0 Class A1 heat

State 5 Class B heat



Pro

du

ct

Ap

pro

valan

dS

tan

dard

s

Device LPCB approvedsensor STATE *

Meets

Heat Sounder (S4-780) State 0 Class A1 heat

State 5 Class B heat

Dual Optical HeatSensor Speech strobe

(S4-711-ST-VO & S4-771)


State 5 Medium optical smoke / Class B heat

State 8 Delayed medium optical smoke / Class A1 heat

Dual Optical Heat CO SensorSpeech & Strobe(S4-911-ST-VO)


State 9 Class A1 heat

All S4 range of sensor sounder devices meet CEA GEI 1 - 084 Requirements and test methods for input/output devices for use onthe transmission paths of fire detection and alarm system.

~ Meets following tone settings High tone ( Continuous 933Hz) & Alternate (High 933Hz for 0.25s / low 700Hz for 0.25s)

On initial power-up the system selects state 0 for all devices.

34xxx Sensors

The following 34xxx sensors when operating in the state shown below are LPCB approved to the respective standard.

Product number Description Approval

Compact "O" Optical sensor EN 54 : Part 7 #

34710 Optical heat sensor EN 54 : Part 5 and Part 7 #

34720 Heat sensor EN 54 : Part 5 #

34770 Optical heat sounder sensor EN 54 : Part 5, part 7 and LPCB requirements #

34800-EN Manual Call Point EN54 Part 11

34842-EN Manual Call Point EN54 Part 11

� If a 34xxx sensor is configured to operate a non LPCB approved state, then this will contravene the LPCB approval.

* - these devices are LPCB approved when operating in the LPCB approved STATE, see table below.

� All the LPCB states applicable to fire sensors are shown below. The required state is configured duringcommissioning and can be configured at the control panel.

Device LPCB approved sensor

STATE #

Meets

Optical heat sensor(34770 and 34710)

State 0 Medium smoke sensitivity with Grade 2 heat

State 8 Smoke sensing with delay + Grade 2 heat

State 12 Grade 1 heat only


Heat sensor (34720)State 0 Default sensitivity

State 1 Grade 1

Heat sounder(34780)

State 0 Grade 2 heat

State 12 Grade 1 heat

On initial power-up the system selects state 0 for all devices.

Sounder Strobe

The following S-cubed Mark 1 range of products are LPCB approved to EN 54 : Part 3

S3-SN-R, S3-SN-W, S3IP-SN-W, S2IP-SN-R, S2IP-SN-W, S2IP-SN-R3, S2IP-SN-W3, S3-SN-ST-RR, S3-SN-ST-WR,S3IP-SN-ST-RR, S3IP-SN-ST-WR, S3IP-SN-ST-RW and S3IP-SN-ST-WA.

Interface Units

The following products are approved to prEN 54 Part 18 : 2005

34410 Zone module (loop powered)

34450 4 Channel Input / Output Interface unit (loop powered)

34415 Single channel Interface unit



Pro

du

ct

Ap

pro

valan

dS

tan

dard

s

Panel Controls and indicationsVigilon Compact Panel

Vigilon Compact VA panel

Vigilon 4-loop panels (BS panel shown)



Pan

elC

on

tro

lsan

din

dic

ati

on

s

Access level 2Controls

Indications

Operating instructionsand Log Book

MessageDisplay

Access level 1Controlsto scroll events

Key lockto openthe outer door

Outer door

Inner door

Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm SystemGENT 2003


Panel healthy 15:45

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Fault

Disablement

Power Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Verify

Sounder

CB253

CB254


Voice Alarm Zones

Speak Now


1 42 3 5

6 97 8 10

1

2

3

1

2

3

Previous Next

ALERT

BOMB

EVACUATE

MIC

TEST START

STAND DOWN

TEST END


Indications

Pocket forOperating instructions

and Log Book

Message display

Access level 1Controls to scroll events

Key lock to openthe outer door

Inner door

EmergencyMicrophone

Outer door

Indicators

Pocket forOperating instructions

and Log Book

Message display

Access level 1Controls to scroll events

Key lock to openthe outer door

Inner door

Printer

Outer door


Vigilon Fire SystemGENT 2005


15:45Fault

System Fault

Commission

Fire

Power

Power Fault

CB254

WarningPrevious Next

Delay

Verify

CB253

Controls and indications



Panelbuzzer

Previous Next

ABC DEF

GHI JKL MNO

Cancel BuzzerMenu On/Off

Verify

1 2 3

4 5 6PQRS TUV WXYZ

7 8 9

0

Sound Alarms

Silence Alarms

Reset

Enter

THRU BKSP

0INS DEL

F1 F2 F3 F4

U1

U2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

CB253

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

Fault

System Fault

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0" # $ % ^ & * ( +

:

,

-

;

.

)

Q W E R T Y U I O P

U1

U2

U3

U4

Fire

A S D F G H J K L

Z X C V B N M

Sound Alarms Silence Alarms Reset

Cancel BuzzerMenu On/Off

F4F3F1 F2

!Insert

Delete

SpaceShift

Enter

;

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next

Delay

Verify

Verify

Vigilon Compact panel orVigilon Compact Voice Alarm panel

EN Vigilon 4-loop panel orBS Vigilon 4-loop panel

BS Vigilon 4-loop panel:Commission

Warning

BS Vigilon 4-loop panel:NOT USED

CB253

Not fitted onBS Vigilon 4-loop

panel

Indicators and controls Description

Display The 'display' provides messages of the system status and events. Most panel display have8 lines by 40 characters per line display.

(red)Hidden-until-lit fire zone indicators. When "Zones" text and number(s) are illuminated itindicates that a FIRE has been detected in the specified zone(s).

(green)When illuminated it indicates that a supply to the panel is present.

(red)When illuminated it indicates that a FIRE has been detected in the protected premises.

(amber)When illuminated it indicates that the Verify button has been pressed and the alarmsounders in the system are delayed from sounding.

(amber)When illuminated it indicates that a FAULT has been detected in the fire detection andalarm system or in the audio system.

(amber)When illuminated it indicates that a fault has occurred with the system processor. It is

important to investigate this fault because the fire alarm system may not be able to

detect fires.

(amber)Applicable for EN Vigilon panels only

When illuminated it indicates that a part of the system has been disabled.

(amber)Applicable for BS Vigilon panels only

When illuminated it indicates that a part of the system has been disabled, delayed or notfunctioning.

CB253 or CB254

(amber)

When illuminated it indicates command builds 253 or 254 has been activated.

(amber)When illuminated it indicates the battery or mains supply to the panel has failed.

(amber)EN Vigilon panels only

When illuminated (always with either the FAULT light or the DISABLEMENT light) itindicates that there is a sounder fault (flashing indication) or sounder disablement (steadyindication).


When illuminated it indicates that one or more delay blocks are setup on the panel.


When illuminated it indicates one or more zones are in Test mode.


When illuminated it indicates panel is in commissioning mode.

Pressing Menu On/Off enables/disables the on screen menu facility which gives access tothe system menus.

The 'Fn' buttons are used to select functions and sub-functions of the system menus whichappear on the display. Each option in the menus, corresponds to one of the functionbuttons and pressing a button will select the option which appears above it on the display.

The Cancel Buzzer button when pressed will stop the internal panel buzzer fromsounding.

Note the local buzzer is automatically silenced when the emergency microphone is beingused to announce live speech, on Vigilon Compact VA panel.

Pressing the Sound Alarms button will announce evacuate message and sound evacuatealarms. This button is only pressed in an emergency or at other agreed times, for examplewhen conducting a system test or practice evacuation.

Pressing the Silence Alarms button will stop emergency message announcements andsilence the system alarms.

Pressing the Reset button will clear any fires and return the panel to its normal state. If afire condition occurs immediately after reset then the indicated device should beinvestigated.



Co

ntr

ols

an

din

dic

ati

on

s

Zones 1

Power

Fire

Verify

Fault

System Fault

Disablement

Warning

Power Fault

Sounder

Delay

Test

Menu On/Off

F1 F4to

Next

Cancel Buzzer

Sound Alarms

Silence Alarms

Reset

Commission

Indicators and controls Description

If the Verify facility has been set up, then pressing the Verify button in the event of a firecondition, increases the time delay before the sounders are activated. This gives the usertime to investigate the cause of the alarm and option of cancelling the alarm within thedelay time period.

Applicable for Vigilon Compact (& VA) panels only:

These buttons can be configured during commissioning to action user defined functions,such as disablement of devices in areas where smoke may be generated or where plantshutdown is required.

The function of these buttons should be written on the label that is fitted on the back ofthe outer door.

The Vigilon 4-loop panels have four configurable buttons.

These four buttons are used to scroll the displayed text.

These buttons allow data to be entered manually at the control panel.

When entering a label each press of a key will scroll the character string, for

example:

key 2 will scroll A B C 2 a b c.

key 1 will scroll 1 ? , . ; & * /

The bottom row of text keys explained:

The button is used to enter a SPACE between characters

The INS key allows text to be moved one position to the right

The DEL key allows a character to be deleted

The BKSP button will delete previous character.

When entering a data range, such as a range of devices

The key THRU ( - ) is used to enter a range, for example 1 - 5.

This is pressed to acknowledge an entry of data such as a label.



Co

ntr

ols

an

din

dic

ati

on

s

U1

U2

ABC DEF

GHI JKL MNO

1 2 3

4 5 6PQRS TUV WXYZ

7 8 9

0THRU BKSP

0INS DEL

Enter

Verify

Applicable for Vigilon Compact VA panel only

(green)

Pressing one or more of the 10 buttons selects the Voice Alarm Zone to which emergencyor auxiliary messages, or emergency microphone is to be announced. The two LEDsbeneath flash alternately to show the Voice Alarm Zone has been selected.

On selecting the required emergency or auxiliary message only one of these LEDschange to steady or flashing indication determined by the type of audio to be outputted tothe selected Voice Alarm Zones. The left LED indicates auxiliary message selectionwhile the right LED indicates emergency message selection.

(green)

Pressing the All Zones button allows quick selection of all Voice Alarm Zones. Theaccompanying LED gives a steady indication when the button is pressed.

Pressing Clear Zones button will clear selected Voice Alarm Zones, also when auxiliarymessages are being announced pressing this button will silence the announcements.

(red)

(red)

When illuminated the system is ready to allow live speech announcement to selectedVoice Alarm Zones via the Emergency microphone.

The indicators are lit following selection of Voice Alarm Zones and on pressing the Pressto Talk (PTT) button on the Emergency microphone.

If the Press to Talk button is released the Speak Now indicators will flash and switch offafter 20seconds duration or immediately switch off on pressing the Clear Zone button.

(red)

When illuminated the system is announcing auxiliary message n to the selected VoiceAlarm Zones.

The indicator is lit following selection of Voice Alarm Zones and on pressing therequired Auxiliary message button.

(red)

When illuminated the system is announcing emergency message n to the selected VoiceAlarm Zones.

The indicator is steady or flashing determined by type of emergency message beingannounced to Voice Alarm Zones.



Co

ntr

ols

an

din

dic

ati

on

s


Voice Alarm Zones

Speak Now


1 42 3 5

6 97 8 10

1

2

3

ALERT

BOMB

EVACUATE

TEST START

STAND DOWN

TEST END

1

2

3

n

All Zones

Clear Zones

Speak Now

Speak Now

Auxiliary messages

n

Emergency messages

n

Co

ntr

ols

an

din

dic

ati

on

sC

on

tro

lsan

din

dic

ati

on

sC

on

tro

lsan

din

dic

ati

on

sC

on

tro

lsan

din

dic

ati

on

s

new Vigilon 4/6 loop PanelsThe following procedures assume the respective 1st fix assembly for the new Vigilon 4 loop (VIG1-24) / 6 loop (VIG1-72) panel isalready installed. The first fix backbox assembly may be surface or flush mounted.

� The second fix parts must now be installed before powering up the control panel.

Second fix parts supplied

� Check the second fix parts supplied:

Parts

new EN Vigilon 4 loop Controlpanel (VIG1-24)

EN Vigilon 6 loop Control panel(VIG1-72)

Inner door assembly 1 1

Battery Pack (2 x 12V 21Ah) 1 2

Battery box 1

Outer door assembly 1 1

Master Control Card(post Aug 2006)

1 1

Loop card 1 (Option of up to 4 maximum) 1 (option of up to 6 maximum)

Spares pack

see installation manual forpack content

1pack 1pack



new

Vig

ilo

n4/6

loo

pP

an

els

Earth toinner door

Hingepoints forinner andouter doors

PSU

Hingepoints forinner andouter doors

Cardboard coverover PSU

Cables of external circuitsMains cable

Printer 0V

Transparentcover overbackplane

Card guides

Remove the protective covers

PSU Cardboard coverRemove the cardboard protection cover fitted over the PSU. The cover is held in by a retaining clip.

Backplane transparent coverRemove the transparent protection cover fitted over the backplane.

Fitting the inner door

Locate the hinge pints on the inner door assembly into the two hinge pin holes� on the backbox outer face.

Fit the earth lead from the backbox to the inner door spade connector�.

Fit together the two blue connectors of the printer 0V leads�, the leads are located at the inner door and backbox intersection.



new

Vig

ilo

n4/6

loo

pP

an

els

Earth toinner door

Cables of external circuits

Printer 0V

Transparentcover overbackplane

WARNINGREMOVAL OF COVER

EXPOSES HIGH VH VOLTAGES

Transit position ofprinter paper rolland holder pin heldtogether with an elasticband

Hinge point

Paper rollholder bracket

Connector forprinter 0V

Earth spadefor connection frombackbox

Inner door

Preformed ribboncables held togetherunder masking tapeto be fitted duringcommissioning

Card guide

Danger

Masking tape

BACKBOX (Part view)

Backbox

Innerdoor

locatingthe hinge pin

Printer paper roll

� The printer paper roll is secured with an elasticband to the card guide on the inner door.

Remove the paper roll from the card guide and install paper.Ensure the paper roll enters the printer mechanism as shown .

�On the outside of the inner door there is a paperfeed knob, DO NOT turn the knob in an upwardsdirection as this may damage the integral printer.

Upon completion of all commissioning work a new paper rollshould be fitted.

Setting the DKC card

The link, switch and pot on the DKC are factory configured asshown in below. The switch can be reconfigured for requiredbaud rate and domain address.

Baud Rate Domain address

1 2 Baud 3 4 5 6 7 8 Addr.

Off Off 1200 Off Off Off Off Off Off 64

Off On 2400 Off Off Off Off Off On 1

On Off 9600 Off Off Off Off On Off 2

On On 19200 etc

On On On On On Off 62

On On On On On On 63

Factory set domain address - 1 with 19200baud (SHADED)

Card installation

� When installing the cards into a backplanealways use anti-static work procedures. DO NOT useanti-static procedures on live equipment.

� An IO Card is not required for connection toDKC and Commissioning tool. The DKC now connectsdirectly to the new MCC card and the Commissioning toolis connected via the USB on MCB.

The two ribbon cables held together under a masking tape on theDKC assembly must be routed into the backbox and connectedto the Master Controller Card.

� Ensure the ribbon cable is secured under aclamp on the backplane and then plug the mastercontroller card before the card is fitted to the backplane.

� Always ensure the panel is completelypowered down before removal or fitting of cards intothe backplane. Power down the battery supplybefore the mains supply. The power up should bedone in a reverse order.

� Ensure all the cards are installed in the correct locationin the backplane and are firmly seated in theirrespective slots.



new

Vig

ilo

n4/6

loo

pP

an

els

Fold paper end thus

before attempting to

feed it through printer

Printer

mechanism

Door Paper

roll

Paper

feed knob

DKC ASSEMBLY


EXPOSES HIGH VH VOLTAGES

Inner door assembly

Danger

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

ON

SW1

P6

Leave this link connectedThe link is used to bypassa keyswitch not usedon this product

OFF

P2Control buttons:Sound alarms buttonSilence alarms buttonReset buttonVerify button

Factory set link position:Control buttons active

Control buttons are active

Control buttons are inactive

or

Master Controller Card (MCC)to be fitted to socketP1 CARD 0 on backplane

Secure the two ribboncables (at the fold) under the clamplocated on the backplane40 way ribbon

20 way ribbon

Card guides

Backplane

Main Controller Card or

Local Controller Card (SUPPLIED)

Network or IO Card (Optional)

Loop Processor Card (SUPPLIED)

or RS232

Loop Processor Card or RS232

(Option)


(Option)


(Option)

Network or RS232 or

Loop Card#

Network or RS232 or

Loop Card#

# for VIG1-72 only

P1 CARD 0

P2 CARD15

P3 CARD 1

P4 CARD 2

P5 CARD 3

P6 CARD 4

P7 CARD 5

P8 CARD 6

Backplane

Use the USB port onthe MCC to connect tothe Commissioning tool.

Terminals



new

Vig

ilo

n4/6

loo

pP

an

els

LOOP 4L1 0V L2 0V

LOOP 3L1 0V L2 0V

P2

LOOP 2L1 0V L2 0V

LOOP 1L1 0V L2 0V

P3

RS485-ve 5V +ve 0V

RS232Tx CTS Rx RTS

P4

Master alarmM1+ M1- M2+ M2-

P5

Clean CNC C NO

P6

Auxiliary Relay 1NC C NO NC C NO

P7

Auxiliary Relay 2NC C NO NC C NO

P8

Battery connectionsB1+ B1- B2+ B2- TH+ TH-

P9

P10

Terminals for card inslot P7 of Backplane1 2 3 4 5 6

P11

N E L

3.15A Antisurge20mm x 5mmfuse

Terminals for card inslot P8 of Backplane1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Backplane

Terminal card

Before power-up

� With the exception of the mains cable ensure thefollowing external cables are left disconnected at thisstage of commissioning:

• all loop circuits

• clean contacts

• auxiliary circuits

• master alarm circuits, only the end-of-line resistor(22K Ohm) should be fitted to the terminals toinhibit a master alarm circuit fault indication.

• RS232/RS485

� A networked system is commissioned after allthe individual standalone systems are fullycommissioned.

� Ensure all cards are securely fitted into theirappropriate slots on the backplane.

� Ensure all ribbon cables are securely fitted into theirrespective sockets.

Battery information

� The panel makes use of sealed lead acid typebatteries which can have a useful life of up to5 years from the date of manufacture. It is stronglyrecommended that batteries are replaced after 4 years ofuse. Batteries must be disposed of as perrecommendation made by battery manufacturer.

� Always use the recommendedreplacement battery. As there is a risk of anexplosion if incorrect batteries are used.

Mains supply

� Fire alarm system products are NOTdesigned to be powered from IT Power systems.

� All mains powered equipment must beearthed.

Ensure the mains supply cable enters the equipment via adedicated cable entry point, which is located adjacent to themains terminal block and is also segregated from any loop wiring.

� Mains supply to any fire alarm control and indicatingequipment must be via an unswitched 5A fused spurunit. A disconnect device must be provided todisconnect both poles and must have a minimum gapof 3mm. The Disconnect device should be available aspart of the building installation and must be easilyaccessible after installation is complete.

� The fused spur isolator cover should be marked:

FIRE ALARM - DO NOT SWITCH OFF

� Hazardous voltage remains afteroperation of a protection fuse. Take appropriateaction to guard against the risk of equipment havingexposed live mains supply.



new

Vig

ilo

n4/6

loo

pP

an

els

P2L N

PSU PCB

The mains cable must be strippedback to the length shown to allowlive and neutral wires to be woundthrough the ferrite core.

Dedicated mains supplyfrom consumer unit

5A Unswitchedfused spur unit

mains cable

Panel

must be sleeved

Use cable ties(supplied)

ferritecore

(supplied)

45

mm

35

mm

Gland

27

0m

m

50

mm

5mm

mainscable

Battery installation

VIG1-24 panel battery installation

VIG1-72 panel battery installation



new

Vig

ilo

n4/6

loo

pP

an

els

TH-TH+

BT2-BT2+BT1+

P4 P3

P2P1

P6

TH1

BT1-

TH-TH+

BT2-BT2+BT1+

P4 P3

P2P1

P6

TH1

BT1-

In-line fuse rated 10A QB ceramic 20mm x 5mm

8 - 12V 21Ah batteries

Battery Box

A

B

Lowershelf

A

B

Uppershelf

4 - 12V 21Ah batteries

Battery Box

Uppershelf

B

A

Lowershelf

The panel will only power up after the mains supplyis switched .on

Route the battery red/black lead through hole in shelfand connect to the respective connectors on PCB,located on the top right side of the enclosure.

Add two more batteries 'B' to the lower shelf and repeatprocedures to .� �

Where required, add four batteries to the upper shelf,follow procedures to . The only exceptionis that the red/black lead is directly connected to therespective upper connectors on the PCB.

� �

Red

White.

Black

It is recommended that the mains supply is switchedduring battery installation.off

Fit the bolt, spade connector, washer and springwasher to each battery terminal as shown above.

Place the two batteries in the lower shelf and lay themhorizontally with terminals facing outwards.

Fit the white link lead and then fit the red/blackfused lead to the battery terminals.

White.

Red Black

Raise the two batteries to an upright positionand push them back into the enclosure.

Ensure the batteries are held in place while theyare being wired. Ensure the battery terminalsdo not come into contact with the metal enclosure.

BlackRed

P20

BT

+B

T-

It is recommended that the mains supply is switchedduring battery installation.off

Fit the bolt, spade connector, washer, spring washer toeach battery terminal.

Insert hand battery into the back box.right

Fit the link lead (white) to outer + and - spade connectorson the two batteries.

Fit the battery lead assembly to inner + and- spade connectors of the two batteries observing polarity.

(red & black)

Insert hand battery into the back box.left

Plug the battery connector into connector P20 located onthe bottom left of power supply PCB.

The panel will only power up after the mains supplyis switched on.

Red Black

White

Black Red

PSU LED indications

Write protect link on backplane

The backplane assembly is fitted inside the left side of the backbox. The backplane has the card slots to facilitate interconnection ofplug in cards, such as the master controller card, loop processor cards, IO cards and network cards. It also has the flash memory(NVM) which is under the control of MCC and is a shared memory to which the system configuration data is saved.

The link header on the backplane LK1 provides write protection and will stop theSAVE and BACKUP commands from the panel controls modifying the memory.

Once the system is fully commissioned the link LK1 should be configured to 'writeprotected', this is important on sites where customers require compliance to theEN54 Part 2 standard.

The NVM should always hold the complete system back up.

EN panel factory settings

P0 - RS232, Baud: 1200, Mode: Repeat

(Terminal card - terminals P4)

P1 - RS485, Baud: 9600, Mode: Standard(Terminal card - terminals P4)

Domain address - 0

Panel (Node) address - 1

NVM - software write allowed (NVM protect -disabled)hardware write allowed (NVM protect -disabled)



new

Vig

ilo

n4/6

loo

pP

an

els

LD

1L

D2

LD

3L

D4

LD

5P

7P

11

Indicatescommunicatingwith MCC

Ribbon cableto Terminal Card

connector P10

Ribbon cable toBackplane

connector P12

Spade connectorfor 0V lead to printer

P5

LD1LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5

Indicates Thermistor is O/C orS/C or 43V boost test has failed.

RAM write/readtest failed

ROM checksum error

EEPROM checksum error

EEPROM stuck inbusy mode

EEPROM reinitialised

EEPROM read doesnot match RAM copy

The above LEDs flash 1s on and 1s off.When LED is ON it indicates an error.For more than one error the LEDswill flash in sequence.

PSU

ERROR

Steady indicationFlashing indication

LD1

LD2

LD3

LD4

LD5

Backplane

Protected- write protected(factory setting)

LK1

Unprotected- not write protected

System configurationAll devices are assigned to sector 1

All devices are assigned to zone 1

How to configure the 'U' buttons and

CB254 LED

U1 to U4 buttonsThe U1, U2, U3 and U4 buttons are active at access level 2, thatis the buttons are accessible by opening the panel door.

On operating a 'U' button the panel will trigger command build.

� U1 button will trigger command build number 251




During commissioning the required command build action mustbe configured.

Example 1

This example shows how to configure the U1 button such thatpressing it will start the master alarm sounders and pressingSilence alarm button will stop the sounders.

The following procedures assume a password entry is notrequired.

Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp], momentarilypress <etc> to select [SetUp] -> [Build] and type in thecommand build number 251, select [Action] -> [Start MA] ->[Enter] -> [Non Reversbl] -> [Enter]. The U1 button is nowconfigured to start the master alarm sounders.

Example 2

This example shows how to configure the U1 button such that itoperates an output of an interface unit and releasing the U1button it returns the output to normal condition.


Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp], momentarilypress <etc> to select [SetUp] -> [Build] and type in thecommand build number 251, select [Action] -> [Usercode] andmomentarily press <etc> to select -> [Digital] and type in theinterface output channel number, select [On] and type in theinterface device number, select [Loop] and type in the loopnumber -> [Enter], now select [Reversbl] and then [Enter]. TheU1 button is now configured to switch on the digital output on aninterface unit and on releasing it will switch off the output.

CB253 & CB254 LEDsThe switching of the LED CB253 or CB254 result from a triggerof command build 253 or 254. The switching action must beconfigured during commissioning.

This example shows how to configure the panel such that byactivating an interface input (can be a push button switch), it willcause the panel LED - CB254 and Master alarms to switch On. Ifthe interface input is released, then the panel LED-CB254 andMaster alarms will switch Off.


Firstly set up command build 254 to be triggered by an interface:

Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] , momentarilypress <etc> to select [SetUp] and [Build], type in the commandbuild number 254, select [Trigger] and [IO line], type in theinterface input channel number, select [Device], type in theinterface device number, select [Loop], type in the loop numberand then select [Enter]. The command build 254 is nowconfigured to be triggered by the interface input.

Now to create a command build label:

Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp], momentarilypress <etc> to select [SetUp] and [Build], type in the commandbuild number 254, select [Label] and type in a label of up to 40character in length, select [Display] to display the label on thepanel when the command build 254 is triggered.

Now to set up the action of command build 254:

Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp], momentarilypress <etc> to select [SetUp] and [Build], type in the commandbuild number 254, select [Action] and [Start MA], [Enter],[Reversbl] and [Enter].

How to fit the outer door

To close the outer door you will first need to close the inner doorand secure it to the backbox using the two fasteners located onthe right edge of the inner door.

Fit the Outer door to the enclosure by hooking it onto the sidehinge pins. The outer door may be secured to the backbox usingthe key lock.



new

Vig

ilo

n4/6

loo

pP

an

els

0+

:

,

-

;

.

)

P

U1

U2

U3

U4

Fire

Insert

Delete

Space

Enter

;

Part of the Keyboard

Fire

Power

CB253

Sounder

Indicators

Verify

CB254

Not on BSpanels

Vigilon Compact PanelThe following procedures assume the fire alarm control panel is installed, with cables terminated at the backbox with the inner andouter doors fitted.

These procedure assume the protective cover fitted over the Master control board inside in the backbox has been removed.

� Connect flying earth lead� from the back box to the inner door.

� If not already done remove the protective cover� fitted over the Master control board inside in the backbox.

� Connect the ribbon cable� from the Display KEYBOARD to socket on the Master Control Board (MCB). Securethe ribbon cable to the side of the enclosure using the cable clamp provided.



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Pan

el

ESD EarthBonding point

Inner door

Cardboard cover protectingthe Master Control Boardand Loop Card

Plastic coverprotecting PSU

REMOVAL OF COVEREXPOSES HIGH VOLTAGE

WARNING

Earth lead fromback box - inner door

Cover to protect PCBdisplay and keyboard

Warningremovalof coverexposeslive parts

Batterybracket

Back box

Ribbon cableand clamp

MAINSSUPPLYLOOP 1

END 1

LOOP 1END 2

Masteralarms 1

Masteralarms 2

NET 1END 2

NET 1END 1

Installing the cards

Setting the Rotary switch SW2Before installing the Loop and Network cards onto the MCB

ensure the rotary switch� SW2 is set to a required setting, seetable on the next page.

NVM hardware link P13The NVM can be enabled or disabled by setting a hardware link

� on the MCB. If the NVM protect is hardware disabled then itis also possible to software enable or disable the NVM using a[Protect] menu option under the [Setup] menu at the panel.

Unprotect: Normally during commissioning the NVM is disabled(unprotected) and writing to NVM is allowed.

Protect: Once the configuration is backed up to the NVM, thehardware link must be enable to disallow writing to the NVM.

Installing the Cards

The MCB can accommodate two Loop Cards. One Loop card�can be fitted into slot labelled CARD1 and the other Loop card

� into slot labelled CARD2.

� For a networkable system a Network Card�can ONLY be fitted into the slot CARD 2. Additionally theNetwork Card can accommodate the second Loop card.

Earth Link

An earth link� is supplied with the Network Card. The linkmust be fitted to the spade connector on the top edge of MCBwith the other end to the spade connector on the Network Card.

Battery

The lithium battery� is disconnected on leaving the factory bymeans of an insulation disk over the top connector. Theinsulation disk must be removed before powering up the system.

Terminals

Terminal blocks� on the top edge of the MCB are used for

wiring external circuits. The terminal block on the top edge ofthe PSU is used for wiring the mains supply to the panel. The

connector located on the bottom edge of the PSU board isused to connect the battery supply.



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Pan

el


EXPOSES HIGH VOLTAGE

KEYBOARD INDICATORS AND DISPLAY

L2-0V L2+ L1-0V

PB1A PB1B

P2

PP2

Network Card

Loop Card 2

P13

P13SW1RESET

SW2MODE

NVM Protect - [Disabled]

NVM Protect - [Enabled]

BATT3

PB15 PB6 PB9

P2 CARD 1

IC3

KE

YB

OA

RD

IC16

POWERSUPPLY

P12

MA2 - FS2 250mA

MA1 - FS1 250mA

P1 CARD 2

P16P1

3

SW1RESET

24V B A0V TX1RX1 0V

PB8

MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-0V MIPNC C NO

FIRMWARE BACKUP

PB10 PB7

L1 0V L2 0V

24V

FS3 200mA

TX2 RX2

PB14

L1 0V L2 0V NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO

PB11

new Master ControlBoard (MCB)

Power Supply Unit(PSU)

P2

P1

N E L

FS3 3.15A(T)Mains fuse

P3

DANGER

FS61A TE5

43V FS4 - 1A TE524V

P7BAT1

FS1 - 3.15A TE5Bat 1Removeinsulation disk

LN

WarningRemoval of

cover exposeslive parts

DANGER

SW2MODE

Loop Card 1

L1+

Installing a new MCB in an older VigilonCompact panelThese instructions cover how to fit a new Master Control Board(VCS-MCB-N) into a COMPACT-24 (non networkable) orCOMPACT-24-N (networkable) Vigilon Compact panel.

� When a network card is to be installedensure a spade tab is fitted under the PCB fixingscrew�. Also ensure the bottom PCB fixing screw� is tightened to give good connection.

How to replace a MCBThere are in existence four variants of Vigilon Compact panels inthe field. Here are the steps to replace an old or new type MCBfitted in a panel.

Save Configuration to Commissioning tool

� If the panel is functioning correctly, before poweringdown, ensure the system configuration is retrieved tothe laptop via commissioning tool.

Power down

� Completely power down the panel by isolating themains and battery supply and then remove the ribboncable connectors from the MCB.

Remove the cards

� Remove the Loop card(s) from the MCB and Networkcard#. Remove Network card# from MCB and thenremove the MCB from the panel. (# - where applicable)

Firmware number and rotary switch setting

� Make a note of the firmware number on the chip insocket IC3 of the MCB being replaced. Using the tabledetermine the applicable switch setting required and setthe rotary switch on the new replacement MCB.

Firmware insocket IC3 ofMCB beingreplaced

Applicable setting of switchSW2 on new replacement MCB

2211-148 0

2211-146 1

2211-136 2

2211-127 3

Configuration

� Using a chip extractor, extract the Back up'Configuration' chip fitted in IC16 (NVM) of theMCB removed from the panel and then fit the chip intothe new replacement MCB.

� Where the Configuration chip is corrupt oris incompatible then do not fit the chip into the newreplacement MCB. Instead transmit savedconfiguration from the commissioning tool to thenew MCB. The transmission must take place afterpanel power up. Back up the configuration toCard 14.

Re-fit the cards

� Fit the new MCB into the panel and reconnect theribbon cables, and then fit the previously removedNetwork card and Loop cards.

� An earth lead must be fitted between the spade tabs�on MCB and Network card.

Power up

Power up the mains and battery supplies to the panel.



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Pan

el

BATT3

PB15 PB6 PB9

P2 CARD 1

IC3

KE

YB

OA

RD

IC16

POWERSUPPLY

P12

MA2 - FS2 250mA

MA1 - FS1 250mA

P1 CARD 2

P16P1

3

SW1RESET

24V B A0V TX1RX1 0V

PB8


FIRMWARE BACKUP

PB10 PB7

L1 0V L2 0V

24V

FS3 200mA

TX2 RX2

PB14


PB11

NEW Master Control Board (new replacement MCB)- networkable

SW2MODE

OLD Master Control Board (old MCB)- non networkable

P15 P10 P11 P9 P8

P2 CARD 1

IC3

KE

YB

OA

RD

PR

INT

ER

IC16

POWERSUPPLY

P12

MA1 - FS1 250mA

MA2 - FS2 250mA

P1 CARD 2

P16

P13SW1

CODE BCKUP

P7P6

24V

FS3 200mA

P14

BATT1

Insulation Disk

Wiring of external circuits

� With the exception of the mains cable, ensure thefollowing external circuit cables are left disconnectedat this stage of commissioning:

• loop circuits

• clean contacts


• master alarms (the end-of-line resistor (10K Ohm)should be fitted to inhibit a master alarm circuitfault indication).

• Monitored input (the end-of-line resistor (10KOhm) should be fitted to inhibit a monitored inputfault indication).

� Ensure the mains cable is securelyconnected to the mains terminal block on the Powersupply unit (PSU).



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Pan

el

PB15REPEATINDICATORRS-485

24V B A0V

Master Control Board

PB8MASTER ALARMS

MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-

PB9MONITORED INPUTand CLEAN CONTACTS

0V MIPNC C NO

PB10AUXILIARY RELAY 1

PB7LOOP 1

L1 0V L2 0V

PB14LOOP 2

L1 0V L2 0V

NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO

PB11AUXILIARY RELAY 2

PB6RS-232

TX1RX1 0V TX2 RX2

BATT3

PB15 PB6 PB9

P2 CARD 1

IC3

KE

YB

OA

RD

IC16

POWERSUPPLY

P12

MA2 - FS2 250mA

MA1 - FS1 250mA

P1 CARD 2

P16P1

3

SW1RESET

24V B A0V TX1RX1 0V

PB8


FIRMWARE BACKUP

PB10 PB7

L1 0V L2 0V

24V

FS3 200mA

TX2 RX2

PB14


PB11

SW2MODE

Battery connection

� Remove the lithium battery insulation sleeve or disk toallow it to come in direct contact with retainingconnector.

Switching the essential controls

� There is no indication given at the panel whenthe links are set for inactive controls.

Factory settings

PortsP0 - RS485, Baud: 1200 Mode: Repeat

P1 - RS232, Baud: 38400, Mode: Standard


P3 - USB

System configurationDomain address - 0


All devices assigned to sector 1

All devices assigned to zone 1

Power up

Battery supply

� Fit the battery lead to the PSU.Remove the battery bracket from the backbox.Fit the batteries in the correct orientation.Refit the battery bracket.

� The panel makes use of sealed lead acid typebatteries which can have a useful life of up to 5 yearsfrom the date of manufacture. It is strongly recommendedthat batteries are replaced after 4 years of use. Batteriesmust be disposed of as per recommendation made bybattery manufacturer.


� Switch On the mains supply to the panel and thenmake the connection to the battery.



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Pan

el

Control buttons:Sound alarms buttonSilence alarms buttonReset buttonVerify button

Factory set link position:Control buttons active

Control buttons are active

Control buttons are inactive

Looking on the inside of the innerdoor

or

Black Red

2 - 12V 12Ah battery

P3

43VFS61A

24

VF

S4

-1

A

P7BAT1

Ba

t1-

FS

1-

3.1

5A

+-

Y1 Y2 G1

PANELPSU BOARD

- + - +

BATT1

Remove Sleeve

Mains supply

� Ensure that the mains supply cable entersthe panel through a dedicated cable entry point.

� These fire alarm system products are NOTdesigned to be powered from IT Power systems.

All mains powered equipment must be earthed. Mains supply toany fire alarm control and indicating equipment must be via adedicated unswitched 5A fused spur unit, which should be clearlylabelled FIRE ALARM - DO NOT SWITCH OFF.

A disconnect device must be provided to disconnect both polesand must have a minimum gap of 3mm. The Disconnect deviceshould be available as part of the building installation and mustbe easily accessible after installation is complete.

� Hazardous voltage remains after operationof a protection fuse. Take appropriate action toguard against the risk of equipment having exposedlive mains supply.

PSU Indicators

Description Y1

(yellow)Y2

(yellow)

G1

(green)

Normal condition(no faults in thesystem)

fast flash

Mains out of limit slow flash

24VDC failure only fast flash fast flash

Battery 1 failure only slow flash fast flash

Battery 1 and24VDC failure

slow flash fast flash


No power to PSU

Earth fault only On On On

Note on initial power up all three LEDs on the PSU willswitch on for approximately 1 second duration.



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Pan

el

PANEL


5A Unswitched fusedspur unit

P2N E L


DANGER

P3

43VFS61A

24

VF

S4

-1

A

P7BAT1

Ba

t1-

FS

1-

3.1

5A

+-

Y1 Y2 G1

PSU BOARD

Y1 Y2 G1

How to configure the monitored input

The monitored input at the fire panel is activated by an externalswitch installed maximum of 100m cable distance away from thefire panel. The input is monitored for both short and open circuitfaults. When the input is active it triggers command build number250 of the fire panel.

Example

The following example shows how to configure the monitoredinput at the panel to provide an output sound signal 1 alarms insector 2 of loop 1 as a reversible action. This means on operatingor "closing" the monitored input the panel will start alarms insector 1 and on releasing or "opening" the monitored input thepanel will stop the alarms.


Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] , momentarilypress <etc> to select [SetUp] -> [Build] and type in thecommand build number 250, select [Action] -> [UserCode],momentarily press <etc> to select [Sector], type in 2 for sector 2and select [Loop] and type in 1 for Loop 1 -> [Action] -> [Signal1] -> [Enter] -> [reversb] -> [Enter].

How to configure the buttons U1 and U2

� The U1 and U2 buttons are active at accesslevel 2, that is access to the buttons is possible byopening the panel door.

On operating the U1 or U2 at the panel it will cause triggering ofcommand build number 251 (for button U1) or command buildnumber 252 (for button U2). During commissioning the requiredcommand build action must be configured.

Example

This example shows how to configure the U1 button such thatpressing it will start the master alarm sounders and pressingSilence alarm button will stop the sounders.


Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp], momentarilypress <etc> to select [SetUp] -> [Build] and type in thecommand build number 251, select [Action] -> [Start MA] ->[Enter] -> [Non Reversbl] -> [Enter]. The U1 button is nowconfigured to start the master alarm sounders.

Example 2

This example shows how to configure the U1 button such that itoperates an output of an interface unit and releasing the U1button it returns the output to normal condition.


Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp], momentarilypress <etc> to select [SetUp] -> [Build] and type in thecommand build number 251, select [Action] -> [Usercode] andmomentarily press <etc> to select -> [Digital] and type in theinterface output channel number, select [On] and type in theinterface device number, select [Loop] and type in the loopnumber -> [Enter], now select [Reversb] and then [Enter]. TheU1 button is now configured to switch on the digital output on aninterface unit and on releasing it will switch off the output.

How to configure LEDs CB253 and

CB254

The switching of the LEDs CB253 and CB254 result fromactioning on command builds 253 and 254 respectively. Theswitching action must be configured during commissioning.

This example shows how to configure the panel such that byactivating an interface input (can be a push button switch), it willcause the panel LED - CB253 and Master alarms to switch On. Ifthe interface input is released then the panel LED-CB253 andMaster alarms will switch Off.


Example:

Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp] , momentarilypress <etc> to select [SetUp] -> [Build] and type in thecommand build number 253, select [Trigger] -> [IO line] andtype in the interface input channel number, select [Device] andtype in the interface device number, select [Loop] and type inthe loop number -> [Enter]. The command build 253 is nowconfigured to be triggered by the interface input.

Now to configure the command build label:

Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp], momentarilypress <etc> to select [SetUp] -> [Build] and type in thecommand build number 253, select [Label] and enter a label ofup to 40 character in length, select either [Display] to display thelabel on the panel when the command build 253 is triggered.

Now to setup the action of command build 253:

Press Menu On/Off button and select [SetUp], momentarilypress <etc> to select [SetUp] -> [Build] and type in thecommand build number 253, select [Actionl -> [Start MA] ->[Enter] -> [Reversbl] and [Enter].



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Pan

el

P8

0V MIP

PANEL

2 - 10K Ohms -resistors must befitted as shown.

MASTER CONTROLBOARD

Normally open contacts

An active input will triggerthe command build No 250

The command build actionis configuredduring commissioning

Monitored Input

These contacts can be a push buttonswitch, fire relay contacts from anotherpanel or contacts from a timer.

External printer

An external printer may be connected to the control panel duringcommissioning. There are two printers availableCOMPACT-HAND and COMPACT-DESK. It is essential theprinter is connected to the RS232 - Port 1.

The factory set baud rate for Port 1 is 9600 and need not bechanged when a printer is connected. However the factory setMode is Standard and must be changed to Printer when a printeris connected to Port 1.

How to configure Port 1 mode to printerTo configure Port 1 to Printer mode: Press Menu On/Off buttonand then select [Test/Eng]. Select [UserCode] and enter theEngineering password (PIN), this is only necessary if anEngineering password has been set up. Press <etc> and select[Config]. Momentarily press <etc> to select [Comms]. Select[Card] and enter 0 for master control card. Then enter 1 to selectPort 1. Select [Mode] and using the [Previous] and [Next]buttons scroll to Printer and select by the [Enter] option.

To switch ON the printerIf the printer is not working and is switched Off then you canswitch it On. To switch On the printer: Press Menu On/Off buttonand then select [Control]. Select [UserCode] and enter theEngineering password (PIN), this is only necessary if anEngineering password has been set up. Select [Printer] andthen select [On] and [Enter].



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Pan

el

PANEL

MASTER CONTROLBOARD

Terminal P6 - PORT 1of Master Control Board

(Card 0)

PORT 1 is configuredfor RS232 Communication.

The PORT 1 mode must be set toand the baud rate maybe adjusted if requiredduring commissioning

Printer

RS232

P6

0V TX A RX B

Printer

Download lead - 77821-01NM

GN

DG

ND

TxRx

Rx

Tx

Hand held version

shown (can be a

desktop printer)

9-way D-type

connector

Vigilon Compact VoiceAlarm PanelThe following procedures assume the Control panel is installed,with cables terminated at the backbox.

� Open the Outer door to the enclosure using the frontdoor key and then open the inner door using the Allenkey located on the inside of the Outer door.

� Remove the protective cover fitted over the printedcircuit boards located inside the backbox.

� Earth LeadEnsure the earth lead located in the top right of thebackbox is connected to the spade connector on theinner door.

� DKC ribbon cableConnect the 40-way ribbon cable from the DKC to thesocket marked KEYBOARD on the left edge of theMaster Control Board (MCB). Secure the ribbon cableto the side of the enclosure using the cable clampprovided.

� ACC DKC ribbon cableRoute the 14-way ribbon cable from the backbox on tothe inner door and connect it to the left unoccupiedsocket on the ACC DKC. Secure the ribbon cable tothe inner door using the cable clamp provided.

� Emergency microphone cableConnect the Emergency microphone cable to thesocket P11 labelled microphone on the bottom edge ofthe ACC board. Secure the microphone lead to the Pclip on the backbox.



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Vo

ice

Ala

rmP

an

el

Connect microphone cableto the socket P11 labelledmicrophone on ACC boardand secure cable to the P clip.

Connect 14-wayribbon to socketACC DKC.

Secure 14-way ribbon to Inner doorusing cable clamps supplied.

Connect the 40-way ribbon to the socket labelledKEYBOARD on MCB and secure cable to side ofthe enclosure.

Fit the earth lead to the inner door

ACC

MCB

ACC DKC

PSU

Mains terminal blockwith fuse

P Clip formains cable

REMOVAL OF COVEREXPOSES HIGH VOLTAGE

WARNING

Cards and Terminals

All the cards (Printed circuit boards) are factoryfitted in the panel, with the exception of the loopprocessor card (LPC)

� Ensure one loop processor card (LPC) isfirmly fitted in CARD 1 slot on theMaster control board.

� If an optional loop processor card (LPC)is required, then it must be fitted inCARD 2 slot on the Master controlboard.

The mains cable may be securely fitted to themains terminal block.

� At this point DO NOT switchOn the mains supply to the panel.

Ensure the following external circuit cables areleft disconnected at this stage of commissioning:

• loop circuits

• clean contacts


• master alarms (the end-of-lineresistor (10K Ohm) should be fittedto inhibit a master alarm circuit faultindication).

• Monitored input (the end-of-lineresistor (10K Ohm) should be fittedto inhibit a monitored input faultindication).

� Remove the lithium battery sleeve on the retaining clipto allow it to come in direct contact with the battery.



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Vo

ice

Ala

rmP

an

el


P15

P10

P11

P9

P8

P7

P6

24V B A0V

NC C NO

NC C NO

0V TX A

NC C NO

RX B

L1 0V L2 0V L1 0V L2 0V

MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2-

0V MIPNC C NO

REPEATINDICATOR

AUXILIARY RELAY 1

AUXILIARYRELAY 2

RS232/RS485

LOOP CIRCUITS

MASTER ALARMS

MONITOREDINPUT

andCLEAN

CONTACTS

LOOP 1LOOP 2

P14

P15 P10 P11 P9 P8

P2 CARD 1

IC3

KE

YB

OA

RD

PR

INT

ER

IC16

POWERSUPPLY

P12

MA1 - FS1 250mA

MA2 - FS2 250mA

P1 CARD 2

P16

P13SW1

24V B A0V NC C NO NC C NONC C NO MA1+ MA1- MA2+ MA2- 0V MIPNC C NO

CODE BCKUP

Loop Card

P7P6

0V TX A RX B L1 0V L2 0V L1 0V L2 0V

24V

FS3 200mA

P14

BATT1

P15 P10 P11 P9 P8

P2 CARD 1

IC3

KE

YB

OA

RD

PR

INT

ER

IC16

POWERSUPPLY

P12

MA1 - FS1 250mA

MA2 - FS2 250mA

P1 CARD 2

P16

P13SW1


CODE BCKUP

Loop Card

P7P6


24V

FS3 200mA

P14

BATT1

Master Control Board (MCB)


EXPOSES HIGH VOLTAGE

KEYBOARD INDICATORS AND DISPLAY

Power Supply Unit(PSU)

P2

P1

N E L


P3

DANGER

43VFS61A

24

V-

FS

4-

1A

P7BAT1

Ba

t1

FS

1-

3.1

5A

P5

WarningRemoval of

cover exposeslive parts

DANGER

LN

Remove Sleeve

Audio Control Card (ACC)

Audio Control CardControls and indicators

P6

P9

P2

P15

RAB PTT 0V

P10

PA2 PTT2 0V

P13

O/A O/B I/A I/B

AUDIOLOOP 2

P12

O/A O/B I/A I/B

AUDIOLOOP 1

BGMPA MIC 1L

24V

P14

P4

AUDIO LOOP 1

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

P1 -P3

SMTP2P9

-SMT

P4

LD1

0VPA MIC2

BGM MPG MIC PA

MICROPHONE

P11

AUDIO LOOP 2

FS2

FS1

TE

51A

0T

E5

1A

0

Master Control Board Terminals

Descriptions of MCB terminals

Terminals Description

24V, 0V, B and A These terminals accept theconnection of a repeatindicator panel (Port 0)

NC, C and NO

Aux 1- 2-sets

Aux 2 - 1set

These are auxiliary relaycontacts. The auxiliary relay 1is factory set as a normallyde-energised relay thatoperates with any fire event.The auxiliary relay 2 is factoryset as a normally energisedrelay that operates with anyfault event.

0V, TX, A, RX andB

These are terminals for RS232or RS485 (Ports 1 or Port 2respectively) to connect to acommissioning computer.

L1, 0V, L2, 0V(Loop 1 andLoop 2)

These terminals accept theconnection of system deviceson a two wire loop that starts atL1 and terminates at L2.Devices that can be connectedon the loop circuit includeaddressable fire sensors,alarm sounders, interface unitsrepeat/mimic panels and microdistributed amplifiers units

MA1+, MA1-, MA2+and MA2-

These terminals can accepttwo master alarm circuits thatcan operate 24V conventionalalarm devices.

0V and MIP These are monitored inputterminals that can accept theconnection of a switch. Anactive input will triggerCommand build 250.

NC, C and NO(clean contact)

These are voltage free relaycontact outputs that operatewith a fire event.

Terminals on Audio Control Card (ACC)

Descriptions of ACC terminals


These terminals accept theconnection of backgroundmusic, pre amplified output ofan amplifier.

24V, B, A, PA1,PTT and 0V

These connections accept theconnection of a microphone forPA application.

PA2, PTT2 and 0V These terminals are for futureuse to accept the connection ofa second microphone.

O/A, O/B, I/A andI/B (for Audio loop 1and 2)

These terminals accept theaudio loop circuit connection.Here the O in O/A and O/Bsignify output, while the I in I/Aand I/B signify input. Audioloop 1 is associated withanalogue loop 1 and audioloop 2 is associated withanalogue loop 2.



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Vo

ice

Ala

rmP

an

el

P6

P9

P2

P15

RAB PTT 0V

P10

PA2 PTT2 0V

P13

O/A O/B I/A I/B

AUDIOLOOP 2

P12

O/A O/B I/A I/B

AUDIOLOOP 1

BGMPA MIC 1L

24V

P14

P4

AUDIO LOOP 1

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

P1 -P3

SMTP2P9

-SMT

P4

LD1

0VPA MIC2

BGM MPG MIC PA

MICROPHONE

P11

AUDIO LOOP 2

FS2

FS1

TE

51

A0

TE

51

A0

AB PTT1 0V

P10

PA2 PTT2 0V

P13P12

O/A O/B I/A I/B

AUDIO LOOP 1

PA MIC 2

PA MIC 1

P15

R

BGM

L

24V

P14

PAPA1

FOR FUTURE USE

O/A O/B I/A I/B

AUDIO LOOP 2

Message cardwith Audio Pack

O/A O/B I/A I/B

AUDIO LOOP

How to link out anaudio loop if it isnot being used

RL

Factory settings

The factory settings of the panel are described here.

P0 - RS485, Baud: 1200 Mode: Repeat(dedicated for repeat indicator panel)



NVM - software write allowed (NVM protect -disabled)hardware write allowed (NVM protect -disabled)NVM hardware link P13

System configurationDomain address - 0


All devices assigned to sector 1

All devices assigned to zone 1

Sector 1 is assigned to all ten voice alarm zones

Loop Processor Card (LPC)

A Loop Processor Card (part number : COMPACT-LPC) is ableto control up to 200 devices connected onto a loop circuit. TheLPC drives the loop circuit from both ends, and handles allmessages to and from each device. The control panel canaccommodate up to 2 LPCs.

� Fit the Loop Processor Card in Card 1/2 slot on theMCB.



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Vo

ice

Ala

rmP

an

el

P15 P10 P11 P9 P8

P2 CARD 1

IC3

KE

YB

OA

RD

PR

INT

ER

IC16

POWERSUPPLY

P12

MA1 - FS1 250mA

MA2 - FS2 250mA

P1 CARD 2

P16

P13SW1

CODE BCKUP

Loop Card


P7P6

24V

FS3 200mA

P14

'

Factory setting is NVM protectdisabled

Hardware' NVM protect link P13

NVM protect - [Enabled](ie NVM protected,that is )write not allowed

NVM protect - [disabled](ie NVM unprotected,that is )write allowed

BATT1

Connector P1 Plugs into the MCB

Local Processor Card

IC4 LoopProcessor

Power up

Battery supply

� A battery lead supplied in the spares pack must befitted to the Power supply board, connector P7 labelledBat1. Next install the batteries inside the enclosure,which requires removal of battery brackets from thepanel and installation of the batteries in correctorientation, standing on the small side with terminals atthe top facing outwards. Secure the batteries byrefitting the battery brackets.

� Switch On the mains supply to the panel and thenmake the connection to the battery.

� The panel makes use of sealed lead acid typebatteries which can have a useful life of up to 5 yearsfrom the date of manufacture. It is strongly recommendedthat batteries are replaced after 4 years of use. Batteriesmust be disposed of as per recommendation made bybattery manufacturer.


Mains supply

� Ensure the mains supply cable enters the equipment viaa dedicated cable entry point, which is located adjacentto the mains terminal block and is also segregated fromany loop wiring.

� The mains supply to the fire alarm control andindicating equipment must be via a 2-pole unswitchedfused spur unit (Disconnect device).A Disconnect Device should be available as part of thebuilding installation, fitted near the panel. The contactsof the disconnect device should have a separation of atleast 3mm.

� Hazardous voltage remains afteroperation of a protection fuse. Take appropriateaction to guard against the risk of equipment havingexposed live mains supply.

� Each fire alarm equipment fused spur unit must befrom a dedicated switch or protective device at thelocal mains supply distribution board, which should beclearly labelled FIRE ALARM - DO NOT SWITCHOFF.

Indicators on the power supply board

Description Y1(yellow)

Y2(yellow)

G1

(green)

Normal condition(no faults in thesystem)

fast flash

Mains out of limit slow flash


Battery 1 failureonly


Battery 1 and24VDC failure



No power to PSU

Earth fault only On On On

Note on initial power up all three LEDs on the PSUwill switch on for approximately 1 second duration.



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Vo

ice

Ala

rmP

an

el

Black Red

2 - 12V 12Ah battery

P3

43VFS61A

24

VF

S4

-1

A

P7BAT1

Ba

t1-

FS

1-

3.1

5A

+-

Y1 Y2 G1

PANELPSU BOARD

- + - +

PANEL


5A Unswitched fusedspur unit

P2N E L


DANGER

Battery bracketsSecured with two nuts

Battery lead connectionon PSU board P2 Bat1

Battery bracketsSecured with two screws

Panel with doors openPSU

External printer

As for Vigilon Compact, see page 31.

How to configure the monitored input

As for Vigilon Compact, see page30.

How to configure the buttons U1 and U2


How to configure LEDs CB253 and

CB254


How to check and set the audio signal

Jack socketsThere are two stereo 3.5mm jack socket on the Audio ControlCard labelled Audio 1 and Audio 2. A standard low impedanceheadphones may be plugged into the jack sockets to listen to theaudios. Any audio from the panel that is outputted can belistened to using the headphones.

VU MeterThe VU (Volume Unit) meter provides an indication of the signallevel of audio being sent to the two audio loops.

For an optimum setting of audio the deflection on the VU metermust not exceed 0dB.

The noise level remains constant for all input signals. If the inputsignal is low as read on the VU meter then noise level will bemore noticeable.

Where an amplifier of a music system provides an adjustablepre-amplified output, the adjustment must be such that the heavybeat of background music does not cause the pointer on the VUmeter to deflect above 0dB, in the red range.

The actual volume settings of background music, PA and VA tothe speaker circuits are held at the micro-DAUs in the system.The settings of these volume are made to site specificrequirement using the commissioning tool.



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Vo

ice

Ala

rmP

an

el

PANEL

ACC BOARD AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

large signal

small signal

Noiseremainsconstantirrespective ofsignal level

+20 10 7 5 3 0 3

020

40 60 80 100%

-vu

Deflection of pointer in thered range may cause signaldistortion

Average deflectionof pointer to bearound here

Normal range Maximum for any signal

Indications on power upThese are typical power up indications given at the panel with noloop circuits connected. For Vigilon Compact VA panel the audioloop must remain disconnected at this stage.

� Switching on the mains power to the panel andconnecting the battery supply:

• the panel buzzer sounds

• some LEDs on the panel will be momentarily lit

• a message is displayed.

Powering up - please wait........

• the dots below the powering up message is aprogress indicator.

• the Disablement light gives a flashing indicationand after a short duration changes to a steadyindication.

• the display gives messages similar to:

Time not setNVM Card FittedAudio Card Keypad fitted -(Compact VA)NVM is not write protectedCard found at Card 1 x.xx (aa/bb/cc)Allocating Loop nACC Loop O/S 2

• NVM Card is the Non Volatile Memory (NVM)Card

• Card 1 is always a Loop card

• Card 2 message will only appear if an optionalloop card is fitted in CARD 2 slot of the Mastercontrol board (Vigilon compact or compact VAonly)

• the x.xx is the software version number of the card

• the aa/bb/cc signifies the day month and year ofsoftware release.

Allocation: OK at Card X : Nothingfound

There may be other indications and messages depending on thepanel condition.

• Disablement indicator is lit.

Initial tests

� The menus at the control panel are accessibleby pressing the Menu On/Off button. For details of all themenu options see Appendix A - Menu Maps .

Display test

� To test the display press the Menu On/Off button and

then select [Test/Eng] ->[Disp Test]. The Display Testoption will cause all the LEDs and buzzer (including

backlight) to remain On for a short duration.

Setting the Clock

� To set up the time and date, press the Menu On/Off

button and then select [SetUp] ->[Set Clock]. The SetClock option will allow the setting of the time and date

at the panel.

Printer test (if fitted)

� To test the printer press the Menu On/Off button and

then select [Control] -> [Printer], if the printer is On

select [Test] to carry out a printer test.

Power supply test

� Test the panel’s mains and battery supply by carryingout temporary disconnection and reconnection, toallow an indication of the events to be given on thepanel. Ensure sufficient time is given for the event tobe displayed, normally within 2 minutes.

Master alarms circuit tests

� Check that indications are given when there is a faulton the master alarm circuit. Carry out an open circuittest by disconnecting the end of line resistor. Thencarry out a short circuit test by shorting the masteralarm circuit terminals.



Ind

icati

on

so

np

ow

er

up

Useful menu optionsThe menu map for all the menu driven controls that areaccessible at the control panel are detailed in Appendix A.

Panel Buzzer

� It may be necessary during commissioning to disablethe panel buzzer. It is possible to selectively switch thedisablement, fault, fire and supervisory buzzer soundOff or On. It is important to ensure that the buzzers areswitched On for normal operation after commissioning.

Press Menu On/Off button and then select [Test/Eng],

[UserCode] and enter the Engineering password(PIN), this is only necessary if an Engineering

password has been set up. Select <etc> [Config],

[Buzzer] this will allow selection of [Disable],

[Fault], [Fire] or [Supervis] signifying total buzzerdisablement or disablement of local sound signal for

this type of event and then select [On/Off] and

[Enter].

� There is no indication given at the panel ofbuzzer disablement.

Software version

The software version of the panel can be displayed by viewingthe status of the master control board/card.

To check the software on the master control board/card: PressMenu On/Off button and then select [Info], momentarily press<etc> to select [Status] -> [Card] and enter Card number 0,which is the Main Control Card / Master Control Board and select[Enter]. The display will show software version number and dateof release.

Password or PersonalIdentification Number

� The terms Password, PIN, Usercode andAccess code mean the same and are usedinterchangeably.

A password or personal identification number (PIN) restrictsaccess to the controls available to the user at the Control panel.

There are three access levels to the controls these are accesslevel 1, 2 and 3. Access level 1 only allows the cycling throughmultiple events on the screen using the two buttons on the outerdoor.

� Access level 2a is for the CUSTOMER, here theperson responsible for the system can access essentialcontrols using the panel door key

� Access level 2b is for the CUSTOMER - here theperson responsible for the system can access essentialcontrols and some configuration menu options usingthe panel door key plus customer PIN.

� Access level 3 is for the ENGINEER - here the personresponsible for the system can access essential controlsand all system menu options using the panel door keyplus Engineer PIN.

� There is another password (PIN) that changes daily,which is available to the servicing organisation. Thisdaily password provides the same access to controls asthe Engineers' PIN. The daily PIN is only used whenthe Engineer's PIN is not known.

� Always make a note of the Customer andEngineering passwords or PINs once they are created.Ensure the Customer password or PIN is passed on tothe person responsible for the fire alarm system on site.



Usefu

lm

en

uo

pti

on

s

How to set up the Engineer password

The engineer password (PIN) gives access to level 3 menuoptions which are used during the commissioning andmaintenance of the fire alarm system. To set up the password forthe first time:

� Press the Menu On/ Off button and select [Test/Eng]

-> then momentarily press <etc> to select [Config] ->

[New Pass] and then type a password (PIN) and pressthe Enter key.

� It is recommended that the PIN is at least 4 numbersand no greater than 15 numbers for Vigilon compactand Vigilon Compact VA panels. The Vigilon panelscan use numbers and letters.

How to set up a Customer password

� An Engineer PIN must be set up before youcan create a Customer PIN.

The customer authorised operators can be given a password(PIN) to access level 2b controls, which provides access torestricted menu options that cannot alter the configuration of thesystem. To set up the customer password for the first time:

� Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] ->

[UserCode] ->type '2' and select [Enter] , select [New

Pass] and then type a password of less than 15characters in length and press the Enter key.

� It is recommended that the PIN is at least 4 numbersand no greater than 15 numbers for Vigilon compactand Vigilon Compact VA panels. The Vigilon panelscan use numbers and letters.



Passw

ord

or

Pers

on

alId

en

tifi

cati

on

Nu

mb

er

Address allocation

� Always power-up with the mains supplyfirst and then connect the battery. The power-downsequence should be in the reverse order.

Connecting Loop 1 circuit

� Ensure the panel is powered down firstbefore connecting the external loop cables to thepanel.

It is recommended that each external circuit is wired up to theterminals at the panel, one circuit at a time and tests conductedto ensure that each circuit is functioning correctly. We start byconnecting End 1 only.

With Loop 1 End 1 connected

� Ensure end-2 of the loop cable remains

disconnected.

� Connect the mains and battery supply to power up thepanel, you will initially see the powering up messages.If there are no device address allocation faults thepanel will start the loop.

Allocating Loop nAllocation: OK at Card X : Allocated YStarting Loop nLoop started OK at Card X: Started Y

� Even if all the devices are wired correctly and there areno allocation faults, there may still be some devicefaults, like mains and battery disconnected at interfaceunits, these will be displayed at the panel. The panelfault buzzer will sound and the Fault LED will be lit.

� To stop the local buzzer from sounding pressCancel Buzzer button.

� In practice there may be system wiring andhardware faults during the address allocation stage,these faults are also displayed as messages and forfurther information on what they mean and possibleaction that can be taken, see Appendix B - Messageaction.



Ad

dre

ss

allo

cati

on

1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12

5 6 7 8 13

22 23 24 25 14

30 31

29

28 21 15

32 27 26 20 19 18 17 16

CONTROL PANEL

Mainloop

circuit Spuron

mainloop

Spur on main loop

END 1

Note: The End 2 connection isnot made at this stage of commissioning

Spuron

mainloop

Previous Next

How to re-allocate a loop circuit

It is possible to selectively commence the process of addressallocation on a loop by loop basis.

� Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] ->

[UserCode] ->type your password if one is set up and

then select [Loop] ->[Allocate], now enter the CARDnumber n to power up loop circuit n and now select

[Enter].

How addresses are allocated to devicesEach device connected to a loop circuit is allocated a softwareaddress on a sequential lowest unused value basis.

� The allocation of addresses start from one End of aloop circuit in a numerical order. If both ends of theloop are connected then the allocation of addressesstart from End1. On reaching a T-breaker the spurcircuit off is allocated addresses. On completion theprocess continues along the main loop.

� The new map is checked against the last mapon the NVM, if found to be different then a warningindication is given.

Possible allocation faults

� The device with a hardware fault may have its LED lit.

Allocation : HW Fault Card x number yLoop zAllocation : Tx Fault Card x number yLoop zAllocation : Double Allocated Card xnumber y Loop zAllocation : Map Error at Card x numbery Loop z

� An allocation fault that has been rectified will not berecognised until after re-allocation of the loop.

� A loop with allocation faults will not be able todistinguish between a point type sensor and a callpoint.

� When a short circuit fault is found, the loopre-allocates to the device before the short circuit. Thedevice loop breaker remains open and the device LEDis lit.

During start up

� A loop is started after allocation. Each device is set upto start operating normally based on its type, whenanalogue channels are read.

Typical starter fault

ASCII Device is Faulty, number X Loop Y

Loop circuit 1 End 2

� Power-down the loop before making anychanges to the wiring.

� Disconnect end 1 of loop 1 and connect the loop cableEnd-2 and power up to reallocate the loop.

� On completion of this test, power down the loop andconnect both ends of the loop. Repeat the test on theother loops if fitted.



Ad

dre

ss

allo

cati

on

Checking a loop mapA loop map is checked against the as fitted wiring drawings. Thiswill confirm the exact location of each system device and itsaddress.

� It is possible to display or print a loop map. Thefollowing procedure assumes no password access is

required. Press the Menu On/Off button and then

[Info] -> [Display]/[Print] note these options will onlyappear if a printer is connected to the panel.

Momentarily press <etc> to select [Loop Map], type

in a loop number and select [Enter]. The loop map iseither displayed or printed. A typical example is

shown:

To find devices on loop circuit

� Checking physical location of devices on a loop map ismade easier by having two people in communicationwith each other. While one person walks around thesite and marks the devices on the as fitted wiringdrawings, the other person operates the panel controls.

� The find device is a function that gives visual oraudible indication at the respective device on a loopcircuit.The following procedure assumes no password accessis required.

Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng]

->[Loop] ->[Find Dev], now enter CARD number n to

select the loop circuit n, select [Start] and type in a

device number (usually device 1) and select [Enter].The display shows the device and loop number:

Number 1 on Loop 1

� Press [Next] to find the next device on the loop and atany stage if the previous device needs to be found then

select [Previous].

� A found device will provide visual or audibleindication.

Sensors and MCP

� A fire sensor or system manual call point will operateits LED for 0.5 second On and 0.5 second Off repeated.

Sounders and S cubed

� Each system alarm sounder or S cubed or S-Quaddevice will provide an audible and / or visualindication for 0.5 second On and 0.5 second Offrepeated.

Interface units

� Ensure outputs are not connected toexternal equipment at this stage of commissioning.

� Each interface output will in turn be activated for 0.5second On and 0.5 second Off , this will repeat.

� The loop powered zone module and singlechannel interface will provide an indication by switchingon the red LED (D22) on the interface board.

Panels on loop circuits

� A mimic and repeat panel on a loop circuit willdisplay its device number.

� Check the suitability of each device for the area inwhich it is installed and the location of installation withreference to the as fitted drawings.



Ch

eckin

ga

loo

pm

ap

Map information for Loop 2

Os Prev Next Common Position1 End1 2 Main Loop

2 1 3 Main Loop

3 2 4 Main Loop

4 3 9 L2 5 Spur Loop

5 4 6

6 5 7

7 6 8

15:45

Spur LoopSpur LoopSpur Loop

Spur Loop

Non Volatile Memory(NVM)The Backplane and the Master Control board fitted insidethe panel have the Non Volatile Memory (NVM).

The NVM should the latest system configuration data.

Hardware write protect

� Do not attempt to write protect using thelink P13 while a back up to the flash chip orinitialisation of the memory is in progress.

The link header P13 on the Backplane provides hardware writeprotection and will stop [Save] and [Back-up] commands fromthe panel controls modifying the memory. The link is factory fittedto allow card data to be saved to the NVM.

� Where the system is required to be EN54 Part 2compliant, then the link P13 must be left in the protectenable state, that is to disallow write to NVM.

Hardware write protect on Vigilon 4-looppanel

Hardware write protect on Vigilon Compact(+ VA) panels

The configuration data held at the panel

Master Controller Card (MCC)

� Holds the status or configuration of:

• printer state - On/ Off

• usercode - the user entry password

• timeslots and time blocks

• sounder configuration for all three Signals plus IOline

• auxiliary relay

• action/deaction #

• assign/remove #

• setup ## - some exceptions are held on the loop processorcard

Loop Processor Card (LPC)

� Holds the status or configuration of devices:

• labels

• gain

• assign/remove to sectors

• setup of states and timeblocks.



No

nV

ola

tile

Mem

ory

(NV

M)

P15 P10 P11 P9 P8

P2 CARD 1

IC3

KE

YB

OA

RD

PR

INT

ER

IC16

POWERSUPPLY

P12

MA1 - FS1 250mA

MA2 - FS2 250mA

P1 CARD 2

P16

P13SW1


CODE BCKUP

P7P6


24V

FS3 200mA

P14

BATT1


Non VolatileMemory - NVM

There is also 'software'NVM protect enable anddisable, see menu maps.

'

Factory setting is NVM protectdisabled

Hardware' NVM protect link P13

NVM protect - [Enabled](ie NVM protected,that is )write not allowed

NVM protect - [Disabled](ie NVM unprotected,that is )write allowed

BATT1

PB15 PB6 PB9

P2 CARD 1

IC3

KE

YB

OA

RD

IC16

POWERSUPPLY

P12

MA2 - FS2 250mA

MA1 - FS1 250mA

P1 CARD 2

P16P1

3

SW1RESET

24V B A0V TX1RX1 0V

PB8


FIRMWARE BACKUP

PB10 PB7

L1 0V L2 0V

24V

FS3 200mA

TX2 RX2

PB14


PB11

NEW Master Control Board (MCB)

SW2MODE

IC2IC1

P13P

11

P1

0

P13

Write protected NOT Write protected(factory setting)

TERMINALSFOR CARD IN P8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TERMINALSFOR CARD IN LOOP 5

1 2 3 4 5 6

LC

C

P13

Backplane

Protected- Write protected

P13LK1

Unprotected- NOT write protected

(factory setting)

New Vigilon 4/6-loops panelExisiting Vigilon 4-loops panel

Backplane

Data Back-up &RecoveryTo back up loop data to NVM

A fully allocated loop should be backed up to the Non VolatileMemory (NVM). The following procedure assumes no passwordaccess is required and write protect is disabled.

� Press the Menu On/Off button and then [SetUp],

momentarily press <etc> to select [Backup] and selectthe loop number n to be backed up to the NVM. Select

[NVM card] ->[Enter]. A confirmation will be givenon the display:

Loop card n Backed upChecksum written to card 14

� It is also important to back up data held inCard 0 (MCC), to do this follow the above proceduresexcept after the [Backup] command enter 0, as this iscard 0.

To recover loop data from NVM

� On power-up the information stored on the NonVolatile Memory is automatically recovered to theLocal Controller (MCB) and Loop processor cards.

If there is a recovery failure you will get the following message:

Recovery failed at card x

� It is possible to recover data previously backed up toNon Volatile Memory. The following procedureassumes there is no password access required.

Press the Menu On/Off button and then [SetUp],

momentarily press <etc> to select [Recover] and selectthe card number n to be recovered from the Non

Volatile Memory. Select [NVM card] ->[Enter]. Aconfirmation will be given on the display:

Loop card 1 Recovered

� A warning will be given if the loop map isdifferent to that previously backed up to the memory(NVM). For information on how to 'hardware' write protectNVM see page 44.

To 'software' write protect NVM

Once the NVM is protected it is not possible to write or backupcard data to NVM. To write to NVM it must first be unprotected.

� The following procedure assumes no password accessis required.


momentarily press <etc> to select [Protect] and then

select [Enable] ->[Enter]. A confirmation will begiven on the display:

NVM is write protected at card 14

To 'software' write unprotect NVM

Once the NVM is unprotected it is possible to write or backupcard data to the NVM. After card data is backed up to NVM itmust be write protected.

� The following procedure assumes no password accessis required.


momentarily press <etc> to select [Protect] and then

select [Disable] ->[Enter]. A confirmation will begiven on the display:

NVM is not write protected at card 14

How to electrically erase the NVM

� Under normal circumstances erasing theNVM is not necessary as there is only one back upof the complete system configuration data held atthe panel. The NVM Initialisation should only beperformed by a trained and qualified engineer, asexecuting this command will erase all the databacked up at the panel.

� To completely erase the NVM you will firstneed to switch On the freeblock and disable the hardwareand software write protect. This will allow access to theinitialisation command.

To switch On freeblock

The following procedures assume no password access isrequired.Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] ->[UserCode] momentarily press <etc> and select [Test] and thenselect [Freeblock], press [Next] for controller and select [Enter],which will display numbers on the top left of the display to showthe freeblock is On.

To initialise Non Volatile Memory

The following procedures assume no password access isrequired.Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] ->[UserCode] and then select [Card] -> [Init NVM] and then[Enter].

NVM Card Being Initialised NVM card 14: 512K bytes

To switch Off freeblock

Press the Menu On/Off button and then [Test/Eng] ->[UserCode], momentarily press <etc> and select [Test] andthen select [Freeblock], press [Previous] for Off and select[Enter]. On completion do a display test to clear the freeblocknumber display.



Data

Back-u

p&

Reco

very

Safe AddressingA safe address is an address given to a devices duringcommissioning, the value of which is stored in the non volatilememory within the electronics module of the device, the Safeaddress is therefore carried with the device.

A Safe address can be given to any device on loop circuit:

� Individually

� in a consecutive range

� or an entire loop can be safe addressed

To safe address a device

Press Menu On/Off button and then [Set Up] and thenmomentarily press <etc> to select [Set Up] and thenmomentarily press <etc> to select [Device], now type in the softaddress of the device and then select [Loop], now type in theloop on which the device resides and then select [Safe] andfinally type in a safe address and select [Enter].

� It is efficient to safe address devices using thecommissioning tool. If safe addressing a range of devicesit is quicker to do using the controls at the panel.

To convert from safe to soft address

If for any reason the safe address given to a device is notrequired and the device needs to be converted for softaddressing, then:

Press Menu On/Off button and select [Set Up] and thenmomentarily press <etc> to select [Set Up] and thenmomentarily press <etc> to select [Device], now type in thesafe address of the device and then select [Loop], now type inthe loop on which the device resides and then select [Safe] andfinally type in 0 the safe address and select [Enter]. This willconvert the device back to soft addressing mode.



Safe

Ad

dre

ssin

g

Map information for Loop 2

Os Prev Next Common Position+1 End1 2 Main Loop

+2 1 3 Main Loop

+3 2 4 Main Loop

+4 3 9 L2 5 Spur Loop

+5 4 6

+6 5 7

+7 6 8

15:45

Spur LoopSpur LoopSpur Loop

Spur Loop

+ indicatesthe deviceis safeaddressed

Loop circuit testsThe loop circuit test involves checking the loop circuit resistanceand capacitance and then to carry out open circuit, short circuitand break tests.

Loop resistance and capacitance

� Power down and disconnect both ends of the loop 0Vwiring at the control panel, whose resistance andcapacitance are to be measured.

Resistance

� Using a multimeter measure the resistance between theloop 0V (End 1) and loop 0V (End 2). In practice this

should not be greater than 13 ohms.

Capacitance

� Check the capacitance between the loop 0V and cablescreen. The capacitance should not be greater than

1.0uF. Also the cable end-1 and end-2 should read the

same value.

How to [Repair] a loop circuit

When a loop circuit is tested for open or short circuit faultor if a genuine wiring short or open circuit fault shouldoccur, then rectification action must be taken. To rectifythe fault remove the fault and process the repair commandat the control panel.

a. Press the Menu On/Off button and select[Test /Eng].

b. Select [Usercode] and if a password access isrequired, type in your user code and press theEnter button.

c. Select [Loop] and then momentarily select<etc> until [Repair] appears on the display.

d. Select [Repair] and type in the loop circuit youwant to repair, for example loop 1 or 2 and thenselect [Enter].

Loop short circuit test

A loop short circuit isolation test should be carried out at thisstage. It is recommended that the sounders are switched Onbefore conducting this test.

End 1 Short test

� Short circuit the pair of loop terminals at End-1. Thereshould be no loss of any part of the system. Thedisplay shows:

Wiring changed - short at card x numbery loop zWiring changed - loop split

� After rectification re-allocate the loop circuit.

End 2 and Mid circuit Short test

� A short circuit test should then be repeated at End-2

and again at mid point of the loop.

� The loop circuit on which a short circuitoccurred must be repaired using the [Repair]function.

� At the end of the test operate the [Repair] function atthe panel.



Lo

op

cir

cu

itte

sts

L1 0V

TERMINALS

BOARD

PANELenclosure

MICC CABLE

SHORTING LINK

Ground break test

A ground break test should be carried out at this stage:

� Disconnect the 0V line from End-1 of a loop circuit.

� A single 0V line break should not cause theloss of any part of the system.

End 1 cable break test

� The cable break may have to be sustained for up to aminute. The display will show:

Wiring changed - ground break at card xnumber y on loop z

� To clear the fault, the 0V line should be reconnectedand then the loop should be re-allocated.

End 2 loop break test

� The ground break test should be repeated at the other

end of the loop circuit, End-2 and again at Mid point

of the loop.

� The exact location of a ground break is notindicated, however the loop will run as normal. When thefault is rectified and the defective cable has been repairedand the loop must be re-allocated.


Positive line break test

A positive line break test should be carried out at this stage:

� Disconnect the +ve loop connection at one End of aloop circuit.

The display shows:

Wiring changed - split at card x numbery on loop z

� A single +ve line break should not cause theloss of any part of the system.

� Reconnect +ve line to clear the fault.




Lo

op

cir

cu

itte

sts

L1 0V

BOARD

TERMINALS

BOARD

PANEL

enclosure

L1 (+ve)LINEGROUNDBREAKTEST

L1 0V

MICC CABLE

BOARD

TERMINALS

BOARD

PANEL

enclosure

REMOVE THE 0VLINE TOINTRODUCE AGROUND BREAK

Earth fault test

Earth fault tests should be carried at this stage:

0V-line earth fault test

� Connect the 0V line to the earth of the control panelenclosure. This may have to be sustained for up to1 minute for the fault to be detected. The displayshould show:

Earth Fault

� Restore normal conditions. The display show:

Earth Fault cleared

+ve line earth fault test

� Now connect the +ve line to earth via a 10K ohm

resistor. This may have to be sustained for up to1 minute for the fault to be detected. The displayshows an Earth fault message as above and afterrestoration a cleared message.

� If the resistance between Earth and Loop +veis in the order of a few ohms then this will be registeredas a ‘short circuit’.

Type of earth fault

Interrogate the [PSU] readings in the [Test/Eng] menu toestablish the type of Earth fault.

Type of Earth fault Earth (Ear) reading

No earth fault around 60

+ve line and earth greater than 75

-ve line and earth less than 40




Lo

op

cir

cu

itte

sts

MICC CABLE

BOARD

TERMINALS

BOARD

PANEL

enclosure

L1 0V

10K

resistor

L1 0V

0V (-ve)LINEEARTHFAULTTEST

L1 (+ve)LINEEARTHFAULTTEST

Checking device statusTo list the status of a device on an allocated loop at the ControlPanel: Press Menu On/Off button and then select [Info],momentarily press <etc> to select [Status] -> [Device], enter adevice number, select [Loop], enter the loop number n, select[Enter] to view device status information.

0 - Output, I - Input and . signifies not used

Device digital I / 0 channels

S cubed 0 0 0 0

1- IR control

2 - Tone

3 - Power

4 - Strobe

5

Sounder . 0 0 .

3 - Low freq.

2 - On/Off

Repeat sounder . 0 0 .

Interface unit (mainspowered)

all possible

I - input

0 - output

1-channel 1

2-channel 2

3-channel 3

4-channel 4

5-battery

6-mains

Optical . . . 0 1

Optical heat . . . 0 1,2

Heat . . . 0 4

Slave Relay 0 . . 0+R

Slave LED . . . 0 +L

Beam transmitter . . . 0 2

Beam receiver . . . 0 1- raw data

2- averagedata

MCP . . . 0 6

Repeat panel . . . 0 -

Zonal mimic . . . 0 -

Device digital I / 0 channels

Mimic panel(standard A2 and A4size)

. . . 0 -

Loop interface all possible

I - input

0 - output

1-channel 1

2-channel 2

3-channel 3

4-channel 4

5

Single channelinterface unit

I 0 . 0 1,2,5

Loop powered zonemodule

I . . 0 1,5

Optical/HeatSounder

. 0 0 0 1,2

T-breaker O/S . . . 0

S-Quads

S-Quad Heat Sensor . . . 0 2

S-Quad Heat SensorSounder

. 0 0 0 2, 5

S-Quad Dual OpticalHeat Sensor

. . . 0 1, 2,4

S-Quad Dual OpticalHeat Sensor Strobe

0 . . 0 1, 2, 4, 5

S-Quad Dual OpticalHeat SensorSounder

. 0 0 0 1, 2, 4, 5

S-Quad Dual OpticalHeat Sensor SpeechStrobe

0 0 0 0 1, 2, 4, 5

S-Quad Dual OpticalHeat Sensor CO

. . . 0 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

S-Quad Dual OpticalHeat Sensor COSpeech Strobe

0 0 0 0 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

+ Monitored input 6

+ Monitored output 6

Analogue Channel 1 is forward scatter optical smoke sensor

Analogue Channel 2 is heat sensor

Analogue Channel 3 is for CO gas sensor

Analogue Channel 4 is for backward scatter optical smoke

sensor

Analogue Channel 5 reports sounder/flasher/speech faults to

the control panel

Analogue Channel 6 reports monitored input/monitored output

faults/operation to the control panel

� The correct device type may not be displayedif the loop circuit has allocation faults.

� Check that the device is of the correct type and issuitable for the area in which it is installed.

� Check the digital status of all devices.

� On successful allocation check that the total number ofdevices found equals the number installed. Also therewill be a loop voltage on the unconnected end of thecable.



Ch

eckin

gd

evic

esta

tus

Loop 1 No. 7 Dual optical/Heat/CO

LB1:C End1:Hi End2:HiI/O:...0 Anal:1-42nd:250 3rd:0 Short delay:0Zone 1 Zone 1

LED)

,6

Loop on which

the device is installed

Location of the

device on the loop

Device description

Description of

monitored input/LED

attached to the device

Loop breaker

condition

C:closed

Status of End 1

of the device

(high or low)

Status of End 2

of the device

(high or low)

Digital

Input outputs

Analogue channels

used

1:Optical (forward)

2:Heat

3:Gas

4:Optical (Backward)

5:Sounder/Strobe/Speech fault

6:Monitored line or LED

Secondary address

denotes group of devices

Tertiary address

used primarily by

sounders/strobe

Short circuit delay

associated with

number of T breakers

off T breakers

Zone number and label

Device checks

� Ensure all dust covers have been removed from the sensor heads and the system is allowed to operate for atleast 24 hours to obtain accurate time average and condition code readings.

Checking the time averages

You can manually recover card data. The followingprocedure assumes there is no password accessrequired. Press the Menu On/Off button and then[Info], momentarily press <etc> to select [TimeAvg] and type in the channel number from therange 1-6, select [Device] and type in the devicenumber for which the time average is required,select [Loop] and type in the loop number of thedevice ->[Enter]. The display shows time averages for the device.

Foreground (fast) time average readings Background (slow) time average readings

Tnew T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11

Ondemand

80mS 320mS 1.28S 5.12S 20.48S 1.36min 5.46min 21.84min 1.45hr 5.82hr 23.3hr

Normally reads 252, unless there is athreshold.

Device type 34K Analogue Channelnumber

Time average

Tnew

OpticalHeat

12

200 - 235180 - 210

Heat 180 - 210

Beam Transmit 0

Beam Receive 2 150 - 170

Device type S-Quad Analogue Channels Time average Tnew

Heat Sensor 2 - heat 66

Heat Sensor Sounder 2 - heat 66

Dual Optical Heat Sensor 1 - optical (forward)2 - heat4 - optical (backward)

256640

Dual Optical Heat Sensor Strobe 1 - optical (forward)2 - heat4 - optical (backward)

256640

Dual Optical Heat Sensor Sounder 1 - optical (forward)2 - heat4 - optical (backward)

256640

Dual Optical Heat Sensor Speech Strobe 1 - optical (forward)2 - heat4 - optical (backward)

256640

Dual Optical Heat Sensor CO 1 - optical (forward)2 - heat3 - CO4 - optical (backward)

25662540

Dual Optical Heat Sensor CO Speech Strobe 1 - optical (forward)2 - heat3 - CO4 - optical (backward)

25662540



Devic

ech

ecks

Average Channel 1 Device 1 Loop 1

19 252 252 252 252 252 19 19 19 19 18 18

Time average readings of Channel 1 device 1 loop 1

23:15Tnew (On demand)

Background (slow) Timeaverage readings T6 of T11Channel 1 Device 1 loop 1

Foreground (fast) Timeaverage readings T1 to T5 ofChannel 1 Device 1 loop 1

e Aver channel 1 Device 1 Loop 1

[Repeat] [Previous] [Next] [Cancel]

Checking the sensor Exceptions/Subfault

codes

Exceptions (EN) or Subfaults (BS) are also called conditioncodes and these codes provide information about a sensordevice. A code indicates small changes in the environmentalcondition, sensor mechanism and how the sensor performs in thesystem. To ensure that the sensor exception codes aremeaningful, all existing codes must be cleared and the systemleft undisturbed for at least 24 hours.

Code definition

There are ten different conditions possible for each sensor type,although not all of them are defined. Each condition code has arange of 0-3.

ExceptionCode

Meaning

0 This condition is OK. This code isnot displayed unless another nonzero code exists.

1 or 2 Suggests preventive maintenance isrequired, where necessary, to avoidpossible false alarms.

3 The sensor is faulty. A fault conditionindication is given at the controlpanel. A message reading ‘SensorOut of Specification’ is displayed.

� A sensor having code 3 is automaticallydisabled by the system to prevent false alarms.

To view the exceptions/condition codes of a device press MenuOn/Off button and select [Info] -> <etc> -> [Event] -> <etc> ->[Exception] -> [Enter].

How to clear Exceptions

This can be done by removal and replacement of the sensorchamber, by re-allocation of the loop having the sensor or, byusing the menu controls: Press Menu On/Off button to select[Test/Eng] -> [Usercode] -> <etc> -> [Config] -> [Clear]->[Exception] -> [Enter]. Cleared codes will return if theconditions are still true.



Devic

ech

ecks

Exceptions/Condition codes

Meaning Action

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

This is the sub-fire band and if setshould be taken as showing that thesensor is at its optimum sensitivityfor its location.

No action need be taken.

2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

A sub-fire has been generated whichwould suggest that the sensor waseither too sensitive for itsenvironment or that the sensor typemay be incorrect for the location.

Action should be to check location and altersensor state or type as required. This shouldonly be done with the knowledge of thecustomer. Remember to re-backup allchanges to states onto the NVM Card.

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

These codes indicate that the sensoris in a windy location. This will causethe chamber voltage to drop. CodeLevel 1 shows one drop only, Level2 shows greater than one drop.

The location should be checked and a changein siting made, if required.Note: Wind will not cause the sensor to falsealarm.

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 or0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 or0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 or0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0

This shows that the sensor timeaverages are close to acceptablelimits.

On commissioning the sensor should bereplaced. A sensor with code 2 is worse thancode 1. On maintenance sensors with code 2should be replaced.

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 or0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 or0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 or0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0

This shows that high frequencynoise events have been detected bythe system. A code 1 shows oneevent and a code 2 shows morethan one event.

The device should be replaced. Onmaintenance, sensor with code 2 should bereplaced. If it reoccurs then check theenvironment.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 or0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0

This shows device hardware faults.1 for code 1 and more than one for acode 2.

The sensor should be replaced.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 or0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2

This shows that transmission faultsare being noted. Code 2 is worsethan code 1.

The device should be replaced. If it reoccursthen check the environment.

Time: 15:54.07 Fri 20 December 2002ExceptionNumber 2 on Loop 1condition 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Time and date when exceptions (Condition code) were read

23:15

Location of the device residing on this loopwhose exceptions are shown beneath These condition codes indicate the

device is probably disconnected

1st 10thFor definition see tables on the following pages

Exception codes for Optical (heat) (sounder) sensor

� For the Heat sounder product ignore the Optical codes.

Gentype

PosNo. Description

Exception codes

normalband

sub fault band fault band

0 1 2 3

ENVIORNMENT

1st Opticalsubfire

None Small signalsensed[Checklocation, state& type]

Subfire[Check location,state & type]

2nd Heat subfire None Small signalsensed[Checklocation, state& type]


3rd -

4th -

SENSOR

5th Opticalchannel driftor out ofrange

OK Close toacceptable limitLow T11<175

High T8>240

[Clean]

Out of limitsLow T11<165

High T8>245

[Clean/replace]

6th Heat channeldrift or out ofrange

OK Close toacceptable limit[Clean]

Out of limitsLow T9>250

High T11<20

[Clean/replace]

7th Opticalchannelnoisy (Highfreq)

OK Single HFnoise eventdetected

Multiple HFnoise seen(Check locationand report)

8th Heat channelnoisy (Highfrequency)


Multiple HFnoise seen(check locationand report)

DEVICE

9th devicefirmware

OK Isolated fault

[Note/report]

Repetitive fault

[Note/report/replace]

Total failure

[Replace]

10th devicetransmission

OK Low error rate Medium errorrate

[Report]

High error rate

[Replace]



Devic

ech

ecks

Exception codes for Heat sensor

Gentype

PosNo. Description

Exception codes

normalband


0 1 2 3

ENVIORNMENT

1st Subfirebackground

None Small signalsensed [Checklocation, state& type]


2nd Subfireforeground



3rd

4th

SENSOR

5th Drift out ofrange high

OK Above upperlimitT9>250

[Replace]


OK Below lowerlimitT11<20

[Replace]

7th Noisy (Highfrequency)


Multiple HFnoise seen

8th

DEVICE

9th devicefirmware

OK Isolated fault

[Note/report]

Repetitive Fault


Total Failure

[Replace]



[Report]

High errorrate

[Replace]



Devic

ech

ecks

Exception codes for Beam sensor

Gentype

PosNo. Description

Exception codes

normal band sub fault band fault band

0 1 2 3

ENVIORNMENT

1st Subfirebackground



2nd Subfireforeground



3rd

4th Total beamobscuration

OK Obscured for>1 minute orTx failed[Replace]

SENSOR

5th Drift out ofrange high

OK Gain not setcorrectly[Check gain/replace]

6th Drift out ofrange low

OK Out ofSpecification.[Clean/checkgain/repair]

Below lowerlimit[Clean/checkgain/replace]

7th Noisy (Highfrequency)

OK Single HF fallseen

Multiple HF fallseen

8th

DEVICE

9th devicefirmware

OK Isolated fault

[Note/report]

Repetitive fault


Total failure

[Replace]



[Report]

High error rate

[Replace]



Devic

ech

ecks

Exception (or Condition) Codes for S-Quads

Gentype

PosNo. Description

Exception codes

normalband


0 1 2 3

ENVIORNMENT

1st Opticalsubfire

None Small signalsensed[Checklocation, state& type]


2nd Heat subfire None Small signalsensed[Checklocation, state& type]


3rdGas subfire

- Small signalsensed[Checklocation, state& type]


4th -

SENSOR

5th Optical/Gaschannel driftor out ofrange

OK Close toacceptable limit

Out of limits[Clean/replace]


OK Out of limits[Clean/replace]

7th Optical/Gaschannelnoisy (Highfreq)


Multiple HFnoise seen(Check locationand report)

8th Heat channelnoisy (Highfrequency)


Multiple HFnoise seen(check locationand report)

DEVICE

9th devicefirmware

OK Isolated fault

[Note/report]

Repetitive fault


Total failure

[Replace]



[Report]

High error rate

[Replace]



Devic

ech

ecks

Pre Fire, Fire and Super fireDefinitions

Condition meaning.. ..and for State 0 it implies

PreFire Fire detection is at a highersensitivity than the selectedstate.

Fire detection that will easily passthe respective EN54 test.

Fire Fire detection at thesensitivity of the selectedstate .

Fire detection that is referencedto the respective EN54 test.

SuperFire Fire detection at lowersensitivity than the selectedstate.

Fire detection that will not passthe British Standard test.



Pre

Fir

e,F

ire

an

dS

up

er

fire

Device StatesStates are normally used to switch sensor sensitivity or to disable the sensing channel during specific times of a day. For examplethe optical smoke sensing channel may be disabled during normal working time in an area where smoking is allowed and occupantscan smoke in the designated area and the channel is enabled to a sensitive state during non working time.

Non defined states

� If a non defined state is selected during commissioning then the control panel will revert to State 15. Whichmeans the device is functionally switched OFF .

Optical heat (sounder) sensor states (34000 range)

These states cover the following sensors:

� Optical heat sensor

� Optical heat sounder

� Heat sounder

� For the Heat sounder product ignore the Optical states.

State Definition Application

State 0(LPCapproved)

Medium sensitivityHeat Grade 2Optical smoke normal sensitivity

Suitable for most applications. Provides smokedetection to meet BS5445:Part 7 and provides heatdetection to meet Grade 2 as defined inBS5445:Part 5.

State 1 High sensitivity optical or Grade 2heat

Used in areas or situations where airborne smoke ordust is unlikely to occur and therefore a moresensitive detection is available.

State 5 Medium sensitivity optical only Where high ambient temperatures of greater than40oC are expected in the detection area.


Medium sensitivity optical with 20seconds time constant orGrade 2 heat

This state is useful in hotel bedrooms where lowlevels of signal could occur for short durations. Ifsmoke and heat occur simultaneously the time delayis effectively overridden to provide fast detection.

State 10 Medium sensitivity optical with timedelay (20 second time constant) orGrade 2 heat

Similar performance to state 8 without the time delayoverridden. Useful in hotel bedrooms and loadingbays where low levels of signal may occur.

State 11 Low sensitivity optical or Grade 3heat

Used for smoke detection in areas where airborneparticles or smoke are normally present, or hightemperatures (up to 40oC) can be normally attained.


Grade 1 heat only No optical smoke detection. Can be used whereairborne particles or smoke could occur briefly or atspecific times. Optical detection can be used inconjunction with time blocks/slots to enable/disablesensor depending on application.State 13

(LPCapproved)

Grade 2 heat only


State 15 No detection This state can be used to provide total disablementon a timed or temporary basis.



Devic

eS

tate

s

Heat sensor states (34000 range)



(Default) Grade 2, rate of rise andfixed temperature

Suitable for general use in ambient temperatures upto 40oC. Provides detection to Grade 2 performanceas defined in BS5445 : Part 5.


Grade 1, faster rate of temperaturerise as well as fixed temperature

Applicable for areas with normally very steady lowambient temperatures. A faster rate of rise cansignal a fire below the normal set temperature at58oC.

State 2 Grade 1, limited rate of rise Applicable for normal ambient temperature wheretemperature variations are expected up to 40oC butfaster response than grade 2 is required e.g. hotelbedroom.

State 5 High temperature with rate of rise Provides detection as specified by Range 1BS5445:Part 8 .

State 6 High temperature with no rate ofrise

Provides detection as specified by Range 1BS5445:Part 8.

State 15 No detection No detection. This is a total disablement of thesensor.

Beam sensor states (34000 range)

Beam sensor Path length State

Short path 2-30m State 2/3

Long path from 30-100m State 0/1



Default detection A fire is detected when there is a 50% (3dB) fall in signal level,however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than 1second and ismaintained for 40 seconds, then a fault is registered. This allowsthe Control panel to differentiate between a fire and a fault signalcaused by accidental obscuration.

State 1 Normal sensitivity A fire is detected when there is a 50% (3dB) fall in signal level,however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than 1 second and ismaintained for 40 seconds then a fire is registered.


Medium Sensitivity A fire is detected when there is a 25% (1.3dB) fall in signal level,however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than 1 second and ismaintained for 40 seconds then a fault is registered.

State 3 Medium Sensitivity A fire is detected when there is a 25% (1.3dB) fall in signal level,however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than 1 second and ismaintained for 40 seconds then a fire is registered.

State 4 High Sensitivity A fire is detected when there is a 10% (0.5dB) fall in signal level,however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than 1 second and ismaintained for 40 seconds then a fault is registered.

State 5 High Sensitivity A fire is detected when there is a 10% (0.5dB) fall in signal level,however if the fall is by 90% (10dB) in less than 1 second and ismaintained for 40 seconds then a fire is also registered.

State 15 No detection. This is a total disablement of the sensor.



Devic

eS

tate

s

The state in which the S-Quad sensors operate can be changed from the default factory set state to another state duringcommissioning. The environment in which the S-Quad device is installed will determine what state is applicable.

# - Default state

DeviceLPCB approvedsensor STATE *

MeetsEN54 : Part 7 :2000 ~EN54 : Part 5 :2002 *

Dual optical & Heat sensor(S4-711 & S4-711-ST)

State 0 # Medium optical smoke~ / Class A1 heat *

State 5 Medium optical smoke~ / Class B heat *

State 8 Delayed medium optical smoke~ / Class A1 heat *

Dual optical, Heat & COsensor (S4-911)

State 0 # Medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat *

State 9 Class A1 heat *

Heat sensor (S4-720) State 0 # Class A1 heat *

State 5 Class B heat *

Heat Sounder (S4-780) State 0 # Class A1 heat *

State 5 Class B heat *

Dual Optical HeatSensor Speech strobe

(S4-711-ST-VO & S4-771)


State 5 Medium optical smoke ~ / Class B heat *

State 8 Delayed medium optical smoke ~ / Class A1 heat *

Dual Optical Heat CO SensorSpeech & Strobe(S4-911-ST-VO)


State 9 Class A1 heat *

All S-Quad range of sensor sounder devices meet CEA GEI 1 - 084 Requirements and test methods for input/output devices for useon the transmission paths of fire detection and alarm system.

S-Quad Heat sensor states

State Definition / Class Application / Suitable for:

State 0# Class A1 heat Where high level of smoke/dust/steam present

State 5 High temperature Class B heat High ambient temperature and where dust/smoke/steam ispresent

State 6 High temperature Class BS heat -with no rate of rise component

Rapid temperature changes in areas wheredust/smoke/steam is present

State 13 Class A2 heat Moderate temperature changes in areas where dust/smoke/steam is present

State 15 No detection

S-Quad Optical sensor states


State 0# Medium sensitivity optical General application

State 2 Low sensitivity optical Application with moderate dust or smoke present

State 3 High sensitivity optical Clean environments (where early detection is required).

State 8 Delayed medium sensitivityoptical

General application with transient steam, dust or smokepresent




Devic

eS

tate

s

# - Default state

S-Quad Dual Optical Heat / Optical Heat sensor states


State 0# Medium sensitivity optical,Class A1 heat

General application

State 2 Low sensitivity optical,Class A1 heat

Application with moderate dust, smoke or steam is present

State 3 High sensitivity optical,Class A1 heat

Clean environments (where early detection is required)

State 5 Medium sensitivity optical,Class B heat

High ambient temperature plus low dust or smoke or steampresent

State 6 Low sensitivity optical,Class BS heat

High ambient temperature with change, plus moderatedust, smoke or steam present

State 8 Delayed medium sensitivityoptical, Class A1 heat

General application with transient steam dust or smokepresent

State 11 Low sensitivity optical,Class B heat

High ambient temperature where moderate dust, smoke orsteam present

State 12 Class A1 heat only Smoke, dust or steam occurring often


S-Quad Dual Optical Heat CO sensor states


State 0# Medium sensitivity optical,Class A1 heat, Medium sensitivity gas(false alarm resistant)

General application where false alarmreduction is required

State 1 High sensitivity optical, Class A1 heat,high sensitivity gas

Clean environments (where early detection isrequired) false alarm reduction

State 9 Medium sensitivity gas,Class A1 heat

High levels of smoke/dust/steam often present

State 11 Medium sensitivity optical,Class B heat

High ambient temperature, plus low levels ofdust/smoke/steam

State 12 Class A1 heat only Smoke/dust/steam/gas occurring often




Devic

eS

tate

s

Interface input states

4 - channel interface input states

These include the mains or loop powered interface.

State Definition Applications

State 0 Default - all Inputs enabled Normal use

State 1 Input 1 disabled Selective disablement and enablement ofinterface input circuits

Where an input circuit is used forfire detection application, the callpoints on the circuits will remainoperational on disablement of thecircuit.

State 2 Input 2 disabled

State 3 Inputs 1 and 2 disabled




State 7 Inputs 1, 2 and 3 disabled




State 11 Input 1, 2 and 4 disabled




State 15 All inputs disabled interface input disablement

Single channel interface

This include loop powered single channel interface and loop powered zone module.

State Definition Applications

State 0 Default - all Inputs enabled Normal use

State 1 Input 1 disabled Selective disablement andenablement of interface inputcircuits

Where an input circuit is used forfire detection application, the callpoints on the circuits will NOTremain operational on disablementof the circuit.

State 15 All inputs disabled Interface input disablement



Devic

eS

tate

s

Installed equipmenttestsPreparation

� Check to ensure access will be provided to areas whereinstalled equipment is to be tested, such as locked orsecure areas.

� Ensure all sensor dust covers are removed from sensordevices.

� Tests may be made easier by having: sensor extractortool, smoke poles, smoke canister, heat gun, beamobscuration filter, sensor removal kit and MCP testkey, plus keys to open system equipment.

Communication to site occupants

� Before undertaking any of these tests and to preventunnecessary building evacuation, ensure:

• all affected personnel on site are informed, via aresponsible person that the fire alarm system isbeing commissioned.

• where there is a link to an alarm receiving centre,the appropriate action should be taken to ensurethey are informed that tests are being carried out onthe system.

Commissioning computer

It is much easier for the panel and system to be configured froma Commissioning computer, see Programming tool manual.

Zone 'Test' mode

The Zone Test mode is applicable for EN Vigilon 4-loop panel,Vigilon Compact panel and Vigilon Compact VA panel only.

The Zone Test mode may be used when testing devices in azone. It allows the engineer to test zones without having to returnto the panel to silence alarms and reset

While the panel is in the Zone test mode, following a fire eventthe alarm sounds for 5 seconds and then automatically performsthe silence alarm sequence and thereafter a panel reset. Thepanel inhibits the operation of delay block functions, networkfunctions, auxiliary and clean contact relays operation in thismode.

� All zones of the system that are not in test mode willoperate normally.

� To put the control panel in or out of zone test mode.

Press Menu On/Off button and select [Test/Eng].

Select [UserCode] and enter the Engineeringpassword, this need only be done if an Engineering

password is set up. Press <etc> and select [Test] and

select [Zone] and [On] / [Off]. Now enter the zone

number and select [Enter].

'Commission' mode

The Commissioning mode is applicable for BS Vigilon 4-looppanels only.

� The 'Commission' mode may be used when testing thesystem. It allows the engineer to test devices withouthaving to return to the panel to perform silence alarmsand reset. While the panel is in the Commissioningmode, following a fire event the alarm sounds for 5seconds and then automatically performs a silencealarm sequence and thereafter a panel reset. The panelinhibits the operation of delay block functions, networkfunctions, auxiliary and clean contact relays operationin this mode.

� To put the control panel in or out of commissioning

mode. Press Menu On/Off button and select

[Test/Eng]. Select [UserCode] and enter theEngineering password, this need only be done if an

Engineering password is set up. Press <etc> and select

[Commission] and [On] .

� On completion of commissioning, switch Offthe [Commission] mode and notice the Commissionindicator also switches Off.

Fire Sensors

�1. When testing heat sensors DO NOT use a heatgun for the test in a hazardous environment.

2. Recommended test equipment and methods mustbe used to fire test flame detectors off interfaceunits.

4. When smoke testing fire sensors using artificialsmoke, avoid excessive spray to preventaccumulation of sticky residue on sensor, seeinstructions on the smoke canister.

5. The beam sensors should be tested usingobscuration filters to simulate smoke at defaultsensitivity.

The BS5839:Part 1 recommends that all sensors are tested forcorrect operation.

� Unless otherwise instructed all sensors should betested.

� Each sensor should also be checked for any physicalobstacles that would inhibit the operation of the sensorin the event of a fire.

� Where practical, each conventional flame detectoroperating via an interface unit should be functionallytested.



Insta

lled

eq

uip

men

tte

sts

Test

Commission

Manual Call Points

� Each call point should be tested for correct initiation ofa fire event.

Interface Units

�1. In some instances it may not be possible tofunctionally test input / output circuits off aninterface unit, such as when it is connected to plantequipment.

2. Ensure the contact rating of interface outputcircuits are adequate for the ancillary equipmentload requirement.

3. Fit a mains voltage warning label where mainssupply is being switched.

Ancillary equipment

� Tests should be carried out following customerconsent. It may also be necessary to obtain third partyconsent.

� All tests on ancillary equipment should have beenagreed during the project design stage.

� The loop powered single channel interfaceoutput is not fault monitored, in this case the output testsare not applicable.

Tests

� Each interface should be tested for the following:

• Battery disconnection*

• Mains supply disconnection*

• Input line open circuit

• Input line short circuit

• Input line detector fire*

• Input line MCP fire*#

• Output line open circuit ~

• Output line short circuit ~

• Output line operation ~

* - not applicable for the loop powered interface units, but inputtests are applicable to loop powered zone module.

# - a fire from a manual call point or detector connected to aloop powered zone module input cannot be differentiated.

~ - the output of the single channel interface operates withsector. The output is a set of voltage free contacts which arenot fault monitored.

Interfaced equipment test

� The external equipment connected to the system via aninterface unit should be tested as per projectspecification.

Keyswitches

� Where the interface unit has a keyswitch door fitted,then the keyswitches should be configured for correctoperation and tested as per project specification.

� Check on operating the keyswitch the adjacent LEDwill be lit.

S Cubed

� The remote control is only operable when thepanel is in the zone Test mode (EN) / Commission mode(BS).

� Depending on the type of S cubed device beingcommissioned check to ensure correct output soundtone, speech message and strobe rate are given. TheS-Cubed devices should have been setup using thecommissioning tool.

� The volume of the sounder S-Cubed device can beadjusted by using a remote control.

� Each S-Cubed should be tested, for correct operation inthe event of fire.

� The sound levels in the areas should be tested inaccordance with the British Standard requirements andto meet the site specific needs as agreed with thecustomer.



Insta

lled

eq

uip

men

tte

sts

Thinnedsectionon base

3m

-m

axim

um

range

Press the function button to toggle between:

function and note the Red LED flashes x2 every 2 secondsToneVolume function and note the Red LED flashes x1 every 2 seconds

Press the button to increase or to select the next

Press the button to decrease or to select the previous

volume tone

volume tone

+-

Wall S unit3

+-

Red LED

Flash

Steady On

Perform a short press on the Power button to turn Onthe remote control. The Red LED will flash

x1 every 2 seconds

Off

Press and hold the Power button to save the settings and adjustments.The Red LED will remain On whilst the button is held pressed.The data is saved to the unit when the tone/speech on the S unitstops briefly. Release the button on the remote control and theRed LED will switch Off .

3

Note: The strobe light on the S unit if fitted will flash rapidly when the volume is beingadjusted using the remote control.

3

Remote Control

Trouble shootingIf the remote control fails to operate in closeproximity to the thinned section of the Sproduct, then a possible cause may be thebattery. Replace the battery.

3

S-Quad

� The sensor(s) part of the S-Quad must be systemtested, see Testing fire sensors.

� For the Sound and Speech part of the S-Quad ensureeach device outputs the correct signal at theappropriate volume level and ensure the strobeoperates at the required flash rate. All S-Quad devicesin the system should have been setup using thecommissioning tool.

� Each S-Quad should be tested for correct operation inthe event of fire.


Sounders

� With the standard alarm sounder it is possible to lowersound levels by shorting link P3 across pins 2-3(adjust). This enables the sound output to be variedusing RV3.

� The sensor sounder and repeat sounderdevices have no sound level adjustment. The sensorsounder has a blue band running around the central outermoulding to ease identification.

� Each sounder should be tested for correct operation inthe event of fire.


Auxiliary equipment

� Prior to any functional tests on the system, allauxiliary equipment should be isolated.

Tests

� Tests should be carried out following customerconsent. It may also be necessary to obtain third partyconsent depending on the equipment connected to theauxiliary contacts.

� All these tests on auxiliary equipment should be asagreed during the project design stage.

Repeat panel

Each repeat panel should be tested for the following:

� Cancel Buzzer

� System event messages and indications

� Display of active event log

Mimic Panel

Each Mimic Indicator should be configured and tested for thefollowing:

� To confirm fires are indicated

�1. The power to an A4 mimic display is supplied from theconnected A4 mimic control unit.

2. The fire/fault buzzer in an A4 mimic panel will notoperate if it is disabled. However the panel does providecommon light indication of fire and fault event.

� Battery disconnection

� Mains supply disconnection

Lamp Test

� On an A2 mimic panel is performed by using a testkey.

� On an A4 mimic panel is performed by inserting a2mm pin like object (for example a small terminalscrewdriver) into a hole located on the underside of thepanel enclosure.

Deviations from standards

� The results of system tests carried out must be inaccordance with the relevant standards and projectspecification.

� Any deviations must be documented and reported forapproval.



Insta

lled

eq

uip

men

tte

sts

Vigilon Compact NetworkA networked fire alarm system can consist of a number of control panels of standalone systems wired together in a secure networkloop. A network loop is achieved by installation of a network card in each Vigilon Compact panel, which facilitates theinterconnection. Each standalone system is first commissioned before being networked. The network commissioning involvessystematic introduction of each standalone system to the network and tests to ensure the network is working. The whole networkedsystem is then configured and tested to ensure it works, with master sectors and global alarms configured to site requirements.

When setting the address switches on the network card ensure the network controller is given the lowest address. A networkcontroller is a panel that can connect to a Supervisor system.

� All panels in a networked system must operate at the same baud rate, normally this is 38.4K where coppernetwork card is used.

Single Network connections

� Each standalone system must first be fully commissioned individually.

� Check that the correct cable is used to wire the network, the installers manual lists all the approved cables.



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Netw

ork

side 1

RS485 - 1.2Km

SecureNetwork

side 1

side 1

side 1

side 2

side 2

side 2

side 2

RS23215mmax

Control panelNetwork card (NC)

Graphics &Textual

SupervisorRS485 - 1.2Km

RS485 - 1.2Km

RS485 - 1.2Km

Loop processor card (LPC)



Co

ntro

lpa

ne

lN

etw

ork

ca

rd(N

C)

Lo

op

pro

ce

sso

rca

rd(L

PC

)

Lo

op

pro

ce

sso

rca

rd(L

PC

)

Ma

ste

rC

on

trolB

oa

rd(M

CB

)

Co

ntro

lpa

ne

lN

etw

ork

ca

rd(N

C)

Lo

op

pro

ce

sso

rca

rd(L

PC

)

Lo

op

pro

ce

sso

rca

rd(L

PC

)

Ma

ste

rC

on

trolB

oa

rd(M

CB

)

Control panelNetwork card (NC)




Wiring a Copper network

Single network without domain bridge



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Netw

ork

Node 1Node 3

Node 2

Vigilon CompactControl panel

Network Card

Address 2Baud 38.4K

Node 4

Vig

ilon

Co

mpa

ct

Co

ntro

lpa

ne

l

Ne

two

rkC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

1B

au

d3

8.4

K

Vig

ilon

Co

mpa

ct

Co

ntr

olpa

ne

l

Ne

two

rkC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

3B

au

d3

8.4

K

Vigilon CompactControl panel

Network Card

Address 4Baud 38.4K

Cable screen

N/CN/C

Cable screen

N/CWhere a multicore cable is beingused ensure the unused cores(cores without signal) areconnected to 0V.

N/C = No connection

Connections for Network card inCard 2

Control Panel

L1-0V L1+

PB1B

L2-0V L2+

PB1A

MASTER CONTROL BOARD


Control Panel

L1-0V L1+

PB1B

L2-0V L2+

PB1A


Control Panel

L1-0V L1+

PB1B

L2-0V L2+

PB1A


N/C

Control Panel

L1-0V L1+

PB1B

L2-0V L2+

PB1A



Control Panel

L1-0V L1+

PB1B

L2-0V L2+

PB1A



Control Panel

L1-0V L1+

PB1B

L2-0V L2+

PB1A


The cable screen mustbe connected to an earthterminal in the backbox,as shown.

Network Card baud and node address Switches

� The copper network card is factory set for 38.4K baud with node address 4.

Node address Baud rate

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

64 off off off off off off off off 2400

1 on off off off off off on off 9600

2 off on off off off off off on 19.2K

3 on on off off off off on on 38.4K

4 off off on off off off

63 on on on on on on

Address Baud

- factory settings

Powering-up the Network

� Add one panel at a time starting from the network controller (Node 1) at side 1.

� It can take a few minutes for the system map to update.

� For each panel powered-up the network controller will automatically try to establish communication with theconnected equipment.

� The network controller will display the status of the network as being started, secure or non-secure and from now onwill monitor and control the network communications.

� Use disable comms to isolate a panel from the rest of the network, ie it operates at the network card in an echo

mode, select Menu On/Off -> [Control] -> [Disable] -> [Comms] and enter the Network Card number 4.

How to check a Network map

� Using the Menu On/Off -> [Info] -> [Map] -> [NetMap] menu, enter the network card address, usually 4.The display will provide a list in cabling order the addresses of panels in the networked system.These are examples of different networks. The lowest address ‘1’ has been given to the network controller.

This example shows the network is notsecure

This example shows the network issecure



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Netw

ork

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8On Off

Component side

Map information for Network at card 10Nodes on side 11 9 7 6 5Nodes on side 21 3

Map information for Network at card 10Nodes on side 11 9 7 6 5 3 1Nodes on side 21 3 5 6 7 9 1

How to check Network Card status

Using the Menu On/Off -> [Info] -> [Status] -> [Card] and enter the network card 10. The display will confirm:

� address of the network card

� address of network controller

� and a set of condition codes

Errors meaning

Parity Parity is incorrect, data corrupted.

Framing 8- bit transmitted incorrectly and the data line does not return to logic 1 at the end of the transmission.

CRC Cyclic redundancy code. When a message consisting of a number of 8 bit transmissions is sent, a calculation iscarried out to check that data corruption has not occurred.

Time outerror

Where an 8 bit transmission block is not fully received, the network card will time out ready to receive the nextmessage. Time out error will also be generated for each parity/ framing error.

Freeblock Free memory blocks available to temporarily store messages waiting to be processed. The maximum number =199, although it may drop as low as 175 - 180 on a highly populated network. A lower value may indicate a higherror value and will require rectification.

Fault Finding

� The communication path in a secure network alternates between end 1 (side 1) and end 2 (side 2) every minute.

� The network will be non secure until the last panel is connected and powered-up.

High errors

� Check cable lengths and type used.

� Check wiring, connections and earthing arrangements.

� Replace network card at point of failure.

� Check the addresses and baud rates of the input output and network cards of the networked panels.

� Check the network cable is correctly earthed to the equipment.

� It may be necessary escalate an investigation to:

• look at the noise voltage between conductors, screen and earth.

� Always reset the Network Card first when rechecking for errors, using [Test/Eng] -> [Card] ->[Reset] ->Network Card 10.

The networked system may now be configured for network commands to be actioned, such as master sectors and global alarms asper site requirement.



Vig

ilo

nC

om

pact

Netw

ork

Card 10 Is OK Fault 0:Disable 0:Warning 0Address (0) Version 4.06 5/7/06Node 3 Controller 1 Baud Rate 38400Condition 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 198 199

Side 2

Parity/

Framing

error

Side 1

Parity/

Framing

error

Side 2

CRC

Side 1

CRC

Side 2 Side 1 Endcommunicating

1 or 2

Freeblock

Check

software

1 error = count of10 but every 1secthe counter isdecremented by 1

Currentmessageerrors

1 error =count of100

Timingerrors

UARTtype

0-Rckwell1-Phillips

2-Phillips SMTOnly appearson Controller

Single Vigilon NetworkA networked fire alarm system can consist of a number of control panels of standalone systems wired together in a secure networkloop. A network loop is achieved by installation of a network card in each panel, which facilitates the interconnection. Eachstandalone system is first commissioned before being networked. The network commissioning involves systematic introduction ofeach standalone system to the network and tests to ensure the network is working. The whole networked system is then configuredand tested to ensure it works, with master sectors and global alarms configured to site requirements.

When setting the address switches on the network card ensure the network controller is given the lowest address. A networkcontroller is a panel that is connected to a Supervisor system.

� All panels in a networked system must operate at the same baud rate, normally this is 38.4K where coppernetwork card is used and 115.2K where Fibre network card is used.

Single Network connections

� Each standalone system must first be fully commissioned individually.

� Check that the correct cable is used to wire the network.



Sin

gle

Vig

ilo

nN

etw

ork

side 1

RS485 - 1.2KmFibre optics - 2Km

SecureNetwork

side 1

side 1

side 1

side 2

side 2

side 2

side 2

Network card (NC) *

Spare

Local controller card (LCC)

Input output card (IOC)

# - Control panel can be configuredas a terminal node

* - can be copper or fibre network card

RS23215mmax

Ne

two

rkca

rd(N

C)

*

Inputoutp

utcard

(IO

C)

x3

Opt.

Lo

ca

lco

ntr

olle

rca

rd(L

CC

)

Inputoutp

utcard

(IO

C)

Co

ntr

olpa

ne

l#Loop processor card (LPC) x 4

Local controller card (LCC)

Input output card (IOC)

Network card (NC) *

Control panel

Lo

op

pro

ce

sso

rca

rd(L

PC

)x

4

Lo

ca

lco

ntro

ller

ca

rd(L

CC

)

Inputoutp

utcard

(IOC

)

Ne

two

rkca

rd(N

C)

*

Co

ntro

lpa

ne

l

Graphics &Textual

Supervisor

Control panel#




Wiring a Copper network

Wiring a Fibre network

Single network without domain bridge



Sin

gle

Vig

ilo

nN

etw

ork

C8

76

54

32

1

BACKPLANE

Control Panel

Side 1(End 1)

P7Rx

P4Tx

P6Rx

P5Tx

P3P2

Links P2 and P3 are booster links.Normally the links are not fitted, however fordistance exceeding 750m the links must be fitted.

RxTx

C8

76

54

32

1

BACKPLANE

Control Panel

P7Rx

P4Tx

P6Rx

P5Tx

P3P2

RxTx

Side 2(End 2)

Side 1(End 1)

Side 2(End 2)

On EN panels, DKC switches setthe Domain address.

IO Card switches must be set to Offposition, The baud and addressswitch settings are now located on DKC

Node 1Node 3

Node 2

Control panel

Network Card

Address 2Baud 38.4K

Control panel

Network Card

Address 4Baud 38.4K

Control panel

Ne

two

rkC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

1B

au

d3

8.4

K

Control panel

IOC

ard

all

sw

itch

es

toO

ffp

ositio

n

Ne

two

rkC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

3B

au

d3

8.4

K

Node 4

DK

CA

dd

ress

1B

au

d1

9.2

K

IOC

ard

all

sw

itch

es

toO

ffp

ositio

n

IO Card

all switches toOff position

DKCAddress 1Baud 19.2K


IO Card


DK

CA

dd

ress

1B

au

d1

9.2

K

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 80V -ve +ve 0V I -ve +ve |

P10

Connections forNetwork card inSocket P8 (Card 6)

BACKPLANE

Control Panel

P10

BACKPLANE

Control Panel

Cable screen


To Nextpanelor node

Fromprevious

panelor node

Noconnection

Noconnection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 80V -ve +ve 0V I -ve +ve |

Powering-up the Network

� Add one panel at a time starting from the network controller (the panel) at side 1.

� It can take a few minutes for the system map to update.

� For each panel powered-up the network controller will automatically try to establish communication with theconnected equipment.

� The network controller will display the status of the network as being started, secure or non-secure and from now onwill monitor and control the network communications.

� Use disable comms to isolate a panel from the rest of the network, ie it operates at the network card in an echo

mode, select Menu On/Off -> [Control] -> [Disable] -> [Comms] and enter the Network Card usually card 6.

How to check a Network map

� Using the Menu On/Off -> [Info] -> [Map] -> [NetMap] menu, enter the network card address, usually 6.

The display will provide a list in cabling order the addresses of panels in the networked system.

� These are examples of different networks. The lowest address ‘1’ is normally the network controller.

Nodes on side 1 of a SECURE NETWORK

1 10 4 24 3 6 2 22 7 23 1

Nodes on side 1 of a NON-SECURE NETWORK

1 10 4 24 3 6

Nodes on side 2 of non-secure network

1 23 7 22 2

How to check Network Card status

Using the Menu On/Off -> [Info] -> [Status] -> [Card] and enter the network card address. The display will confirm:

� address of the network card

� address of network controller

� and a set of condition codes



Sin

gle

Vig

ilo

nN

etw

ork

Card 6 Is OK Fault 0: Warning 0

Network (0) Version 4.xx 30/04/04

Address 5 Controller 5 Baud Rate 38400

condition 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 198 199

Side 2

Parity/

Framing

error

Side 1

Parity/

Framing

error

Side 2

CRC

Side 1

CRC

Side 2 Side 1 Endcommunicating

1 or 2

Freeblock

Check

software

1 error = count of10 but every 1secthe counter isdecremented by 1

Currentmessageerrors

1 error =count of100

Timingerrors

UARTtype

0-Rckwell1-Phillips

2-Phillips SMTOnly appearson Controller

Errors meaning

Parity Parity is incorrect, data corrupted.

Framing 8- bit transmitted incorrectly and the data line does not return to logic 1 at the end of the transmission.

CRC Cyclic redundancy code. When a message consisting of a number of 8 bit transmissions is sent, a calculation iscarried out to check that data corruption has not occurred.

Time outerror

Where an 8 bit transmission block is not fully received, the network card will time out ready to receive the nextmessage. Time out error will also be generated for each parity/ framing error.

Freeblock Free memory blocks available to temporarily store messages waiting to be processed. The maximum number =199, although it may drop as low as 175 - 180 on a highly populated network. A lower value may indicate a higherror value and will require rectification.

Fault Finding

� The communication path in a secure network alternates between end 1 (side 1) and end 2 (side 2) every minute.

� The network will be non secure until the last panel is connected and powered-up.

High errors

� Check cable lengths and type used.

� Check wiring, connections and earthing arrangements.

� Replace network card at point of failure.

� Check the addresses and baud rates of the input output and network cards of the networked panels.

� Check the network cable is correctly earthed to the equipment.

� It may be necessary to escalate an investigation to:

• look at the noise voltage between conductors, screen and earth.

� Always reset the Network Card first when rechecking for errors, using [Test/Eng] -> [Card] ->[Reset] ->Network Card number, normally Card 6.

The networked system may now be configured for network commands to be actioned, such as master sectors and global alarms asper site requirement.



Sin

gle

Vig

ilo

nN

etw

ork

Multiple Vigilon NetworksDomain Bridge using Input Output card

Two or more Vigilon networks can be connected together at domain bridge IO cards by having a direct RS232 connection, Modems,RS422 Converter unit, Fibre Optics units or NPORT units. This allows the display of events at any control panel in the connectednetworks.

Two networks using Domain bridge IO card

Star network using Domain bridge IO cards



Mu

ltip

leV

igilo

nN

etw

ork

s

Previous NextPrevious Next

IOCRS232

15m max

DOMAINBRIDGE

Modem

RS4221200m max

Computernetwork

FibreOptics

IOC

Previous Next

Previous Next

Previous Next

Previous Next

Previous Next

Previous Next

Previous Nextxt

Previous Next

Previous Next

Previous NextPrevious Next

Previous Next

Previous Next

DomainBridge

DomainBridge

DomainBridge

Network Node- 4 IOC Cards- 1 Network Card

If remote sites areresidential it is notpermissible to rely ondomain bridge link tocall fire brigade

Domain3

IOCDomain

4

IOCDomain

2

IOC

Domain1

Previous Next

Previous Next

Previous Next

IO domain bridge network switch settings



Mu

ltip

leV

igilo

nN

etw

ork

s

Do

ma

in2

No

de

1

No

de

3

No

de

2

Co

ntr

olpa

ne

l

Ne

two

rkC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

2B

au

d3

8.4

K

Co

ntr

olpa

ne

l

Ne

two

rkC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

3B

au

d3

8.4

K

Co

ntr

olpa

ne

lNetwork Card

Address 1Baud 38.4K

IO Card


IOC

ard

all

sw

itch

es

toO

ffpositio

n

DK

CA

dd

ress

2B

au

d1

9.2

K

DK

CA

dd

ress

2B

au

d1

9.2

K

IOC

ard

all

sw

itch

es

toO

ffp

ositio

n


Ne

two

rkca

rda

dd

ress

isth

eD

om

ain

Brid

ge

IOC

ard

ad

dre

ss

isth

eN

od

ead

dre

ss

Do

ma

ina

dd

res

s

Bau

dra

tesett

ing

sm

ust

be

set

as

sh

ow

n.

Sw

itch

sett

ing

so

fcard

sin

sid

eE

N54

Vig

ilo

np

an

els

/N

od

es

wh

ere

Do

main

Bri

dg

eIO

Card

isu

sed

ton

etw

ork

fire

syste

ms

Do

ma

inB

rid

ge

Do

ma

in1

IOC

ard

sw

itc

he

sm

us

tb

es

et

toO

ff,

the

se

are

no

wlo

ca

ted

on

the

DK

C.

No

de

1

No

de

3

No

de

2

Co

ntr

olpa

ne

l

Ne

two

rkC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

2B

au

d3

8.4

K

Co

ntr

olpa

ne

l

Ne

two

rkC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

3B

au

d3

8.4

K

Co

ntr

olpa

ne

l

Network Card

Address 1Baud 38.4K

IO Card


IOC

ard

all

sw

itch

es

toO

ffp

ositio

n

DK

CA

dd

ress

1B

au

d1

9.2

K

DK

CA

dd

ress

1B

au

d1

9.2

K

IOC

ard

all

sw

itch

es

toO

ffp

ositio

n


Message routing



Mu

ltip

leV

igilo

nN

etw

ork

s

NC

IOCDomainbridge

IOCDomainbridge

LCC

Control panelMessagesfromthe localnetwork

NC

LCC

Control paneleMessages tothe localnetwork

Message routing at Card 0

All events - 1

Domain 2 - Card 6

Domain 3 - Card 6


All events - 1

Domain accessed via LCC: 2,3


All events - 1

Domain accessed via LCC: None

--------------------------------

Controlpanel


All events - 1

Domain 1 - Card 15

Domain 3 - Card 15


All events - 1



All events - 1


--------------------------------


All events - 1

Domain 2 - Card 15

Domain 3 - Card 1


All events - 1



All events - 1

Domain accessed via LCC: 3

--------------------------------


All events - 1

Domain accessed via LCC: 2

Thewill accept

from Master group 1 and route messagestovia the (Card 6).

local controller card(Card 0) all messages

domains 2 and 3network card

Messagesfrom otherNetworkDomains

The (Card 6)will accept messagesto and from from Master group 1

viathe (Card 0).

Network cardall

local controller carddomains 2 and 3

The(Card 15) has no need toroute messagesas there is nothing connected.

Domain bridge IO card


All events - 1

Domain 1 - Card 15

Domain 2 - Card 15


All events - 1



All events - 1


--------------------------------

IOCDomainbridge

Messagesto otherNetworkDomains

15

1

Domain 2 Vigilon Fire SystemGENT 2004


15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

CB253

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

CB253

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

CB253

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

CB253

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

CB253

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next

Domain 1



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

CB253

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

CB253

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

CB253

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next Domain 3

IOCDomainbridge



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

CB253

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next

Domain bridge message passing tests

To check the domain bridge connections and to ensure messages can be passed between networks the following must be done.

Trigger an event in a network, such as a fault.

� Check the event is passed on to the connecting networks and is displayed at the networked control panels.

� Repeat the test at each network to establish message passing between networks.

� Finally back up the cards of the panel including the Network card and IO card to the Memory card. This ensures thepanels of each network knows the location of network controller, ie the domain bridge connection point.



Mu

ltip

leV

igilo

nN

etw

ork

s

Domain bridge using Fibre Optic network card

Up to 64 small Vigilon networks can be connected together in a secure loop by using domain bridge fibre optics network card(VIG-NC-DOM-FO), with the card is installed in socket P7 of the backplane. This allows the display of events at any control panel inthe connected networks.

The above diagram shows small fibre network connected together to a network domain. It is equally possible to mix small coppernetworks and small fibre networks together in the manner shown above to a network domain.



Mu

ltip

leV

igilo

nN

etw

ork

s

Fibre Optics Domain bridge network card( installed in P7 of backplaneVIG-DOM-NC-FO)

Networkdomain bridge

#

#



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

AlarmsSilenced

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next

#

#

#



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

CB253

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next

#

#



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

CB253

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next

Fibre opticpatch panel

Fibre patch cable

Fibre opticpatch panel Panel/NodePanel/Node

Tx Tx

RxRx



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

AlarmsSilenced

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

AlarmsSilenced

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

AlarmsSilenced

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

AlarmsSilenced

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

AlarmsSilenced

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

AlarmsSilenced

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

AlarmsSilenced

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

AlarmsSilenced

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

AlarmsSilenced

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

AlarmsSilenced

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next



15:45Fault

System Fault

Delay

Test

Fire

Power

Power Fault Verify

AlarmsSilenced

CB254

Disablement

Sounder

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Previous Next

FO Domain Network switch settings



Mu

ltip

leV

igilo

nN

etw

ork

s

Mu

ltip

leV

igilo

nN

etw

ork

s

Network card address is theIO Card address is the

Node addressDomain address

Baud rate settings must as shown.

The FO Network DOM card switches mustbe set to the domain address

Switch settings of Cardsinside a EN54 Vigilon panelswhere Fibre Optics Network

Card is installedDomain

Bridge

Domain 1

Node 1

Node 3

Node 2

Control panel

Network Card

Address 2Baud 38.4K

Control panel

Network Card

Address 3Baud 38.4K

Control panel

Ne

two

rkC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

1B

au

d3

8.4

K

IOC

ard

all

sw

itch

es

toO

ffp

ositio

n

IO Card




IO Card


DK

CA

dd

ress

1B

au

d1

9.2

K

Fibre Optics Network domain ring

FO

Netw

ork

DO

MC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

1B

au

d2

30

.4K

Domain3

Node 1

Node 3

Node 2

Control panel

Network Card

Address 2Baud 38.4K

Control panel

Network Card

Address 3Baud 38.4K

Control panel

Ne

two

rkC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

1B

au

d3

8.4

K

IOC

ard

all

sw

itch

es

toO

ffp

ositio

n

IO Card




IO Card


DK

CA

dd

ress

3B

au

d1

9.2

K

Netw

ork

DO

MC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

3B

au

d2

30

.4K

Domain 5

Node 1

Node 3

Node 2

Control panel

Network Card

Address 2Baud 38.4K

Control panel

Network Card

Address 3Baud 38.4K

Control panel

Netw

ork

DO

MC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

5B

au

d2

30

.4K

IOC

ard

all

sw

itch

es

toO

ffp

ositio

n

IO Card




IO Card


DK

CA

dd

ress

5B

au

d1

9.2

K

Domain 6

Node 1

Node 3

Node 2

Control panel

Network Card

Address 2Baud 38.4K

Control panel

Network Card

Address 3Baud 38.4K

IO Card




IO Card


Control panel

Netw

ork

DO

MC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

6B

au

d2

30

.4K

IOC

ard

all

sw

itch

es

toO

ffp

ositio

n

DK

CA

dd

ress

6B

au

d1

9.2

K

Netw

ork

Ca

rdA

dd

ress

1B

au

d3

8.4

K

Control panel

Netw

ork

DO

MC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

4B

au

d2

30

.4K

IOC

ard

all

sw

itch

es

toO

ffp

ositio

n

DK

CA

dd

ress

4B

au

d1

9.2

K

Domain 4

Control panel

IOC

ard

all

sw

itch

es

toO

ffp

ositio

n

DK

CA

dd

ress

2B

au

d1

9.2

K

FO

Netw

ork

DO

MC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

2B

au

d2

30

.4K

Domain 2

Ne

two

rkC

ard

Ad

dre

ss

1B

au

d3

8.4

K

Appendix A - Menu maps for EN54 Vigilon 4-Looppanel, Vigilon Compact (and VA) panelsThe menu options [Control], [SetUp], [Info] and [Test/Eng] are accessible on pressing the MENU ON/OFF button.



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rE

N54

Vig

ilo

n4-L

oo

pp

an

el,

[Co

ntr

ol]

[Se

tU

p]

[In

fo]

[Te

st/E

ng

]

[En

ab

le]

[Dis

ab

le]

<etc

>[S

ecto

r][M

Secto

r]

[De

vic

e]

[IO

Lin

e]

<etc

>[S

ecto

r][Z

on

e]

[Gro

up

][A

uxR

ly]

[MS

ecto

r][C

om

ms]

Pa

ram

s1

-8{

}[E

][C

][Q

]

Pa

ram

s1

-4{

}[D

evic

e]

Pa

ram

s1

-32

{}[

E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

1-1

28

{}[

E]

[C][Q

]

<etc

>

Pa

ram

s1

-2{

}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5{

}[E

][C

][Q

]

<etc

> Pa

ram

s0

-15

{}

[E]

[C]

[Port

]

<etc

>

[Au

xR

ly]

<etc

>[S

ou

nd

er]

[Dig

ital]

[Tim

eslo

t]

[So

un

d]

<etc

>

[Sile

nce

][R

eset]

<etc

>[S

tart

MA

][S

topM

A]

[Use

rCo

de]

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7{

}[L

oo

p]

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[L

oo

p]

Pa

ram

s1

-32

{}

[Lo

op

]

Pa

ram

s1

-8{

}[A

ctio

n]

[Sig

na

l1]

[Off]

[Sig

na

l2]

[Sig

na

l3]

[E]

[C][Q

]

[Sig

1]

[Sig

2]

[Sig

3]

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5{

}[A

ctio

n]

Pa

ram

s1

-2{

}[O

n]

[Off]

[E]

[C][Q

]Pa

ram

s1

-20

7{

}[L

oo

p]

Pa

ram

s1

-8{

}[A

ctio

n]

Pa

ram

s1

-4{

}[O

n]

[Off]

[Pu

lse

]

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7{

}[L

oo

p]

[E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

1-8

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

{}

[De

vic

e]

[E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

1-8

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7{

}[L

oo

p]Pa

ram

s1

-16

{}

[De

lay][

On]

Pa

ram

sH

H:M

M:S

S{

}[O

n]

[E]

[C][Q

]

[Pa

use

][B

uild

]<

etc

>

[E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

0-3

0s

ec

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5{

}[O

n]

[Off]

[E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

1-2

55

{}

[E]

[C][Q

]

[Sig

1]

[Off]

[Sig

2]

[Sig

3]

[Off]

[Off]

[No

de

][E

][C

][Q

][E

][C

][Q

]

EN

Vig

ilon

pa

ne

lsw

ith

MV

4.3

7[

]M

en

um

ap

Co

ntr

ol

CC

/MC

Bso

ftw

are

[E]

[C][Q

]

Ke

y

[E]=

[En

ter]

[C]=

[Ca

nce

l]

[Q]=

[Quit]

[En

]=

[En

ab

le]

[Dis

]=

[Dis

ab

le]

[Verify

]<

etc

>

Pa

ram

s0

-3{

}[E

][C

][Q

]

ifo

ffif

on

[On][

Q]

[E]

[C][Q

]

[Test]

[Q]

[Pa

pe

rF

d]

[Off]

8L

ine

fee

ds

[E]

[C][Q

]

******

PRINTER

TEST

******

!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGH

IJKLMNOPQRSRUVWXYZ[=]^-`abcdefghijklmnop

qrstuvwxyz{|}

[Printe

r]

NO

TE

:T

he

Ne

two

rkco

mm

an

ds

su

ch

as

Ma

ste

rS

ecto

r,M

aste

rG

rou

pa

reo

nly

ap

plic

ab

lew

he

na

ne

two

rkca

rdis

fitt

ed

inth

eco

ntr

olpa

ne

la

nd

Ne

two

rkn

od

e.

[Bu

ild]

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5{

}[E

][C

][Q

]P

ara

ms

1-8

{}[

E]

[C][Q

]

[MA

larm

]

[E]

[C][Q

]

Co

mm

an

ds

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

re

ng

ine

er

(le

ve

l3

)p

as

sw

ord

on

ly

Co

mm

an

ds

are

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

rc

us

tom

er

(le

ve

l2

)p

as

sw

ord

[De

layB

lk]

Pa

ram

s1

-16

{}

[De

laye

d]

[E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

MM

:SS

0-1

0m

in{

}

[En

d]

[E]

[C][Q

]

[Sto

p]

No

pa

ss

wo

rdre

qu

ire

d

[Au

dio

]

Se

eC

on

tro

lm

en

um

ap

2-1

[Au

dio

]

Se

eC

on

tro

lm

en

um

ap

2-2

[E]

[Fro

m]

[C][

Q]

[Sig

1]

[Sig

2]

[Sig

1]

[E]

[Fro

m]

[C][

Q]

#

#-

Me

nu

op

tio

ns

will

sh

ow

ifth

ep

rin

ter

isfitt

ed

[Off]

[Off]



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rE

N54

Vig

ilo

n4-L

oo

pp

an

el,

[Au

dio

]

Co

ntr

ol

me

nu

ma

p2

-2

[Au

dio

]

Co

ntr

ol

me

nu

ma

p2

-1

Vig

ilon

Co

mpa

ctV

oic

eA

larm

pa

ne

lw

ith

V4

.32

MC

Bso

ftw

are

[Co

ntr

ol]

Me

nu

ma

p2

-1a

nd

2-2

[Music

]

[Me

ssa

ge

]

[Me

ssa

ge

][A

ux

Msg

][A

lmM

sg

][M

icro

ph

on

e]

Pa

ram

s0

-31

{}

[Off]

[On]

[E]

[C][Q

]

<etc

>

[Alm

Zo

ne

]P

ara

ms

0-3

1{

}

[E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

1-1

0{

}[E

][C

][Q

]

[Sig

na

l1]

[Off]

[Sig

na

l2]

[Sig

na

l3]

Pa

ram

s1

-10

{}

<etc

>

[Off]

[On]

[E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

1-1

0{

}

[PA

]

[E]

[C][Q

]

[Music

][P

er

Msg

]K

ey

[E]=

[En

ter]

[C]=

[Ca

nce

l]

[Q]=

[Quit]

[En

]=

[En

ab

le]

[Dis

]=

[Dis

ab

le]

[PA

]

[Off]

[On]

[E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

1-1

0{

}

Co

mm

an

ds

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

rc

us

tom

er

(ac

ce

ss

lev

el2

)p

as

sw

ord

.

Co

mm

an

ds

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

rE

ng

ine

er

(ac

ce

ss

lev

el3

)p

as

sw

ord

.

[Op

tio

n]

Th

isfu

nc

tio

nw

illo

nly

be

dis

pla

ye

da

ta

cc

es

sle

ve

l3

wit

hF

ree

blo

ck

sO

n

Me

ss

ag

e

To

ne



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rE

N54

Vig

ilo

n4-L

oo

pp

an

el,

[Co

ntr

ol]

[Se

tU

p]

[Info

][T

est/

Eng]

<e

tc>

[Use

rCo

de

]

[Pro

tect]

[Re

mo

ve

][B

acku

p]

[Re

co

ve

r]<

etc

><

etc

>[S

etC

lock]

[Ne

xt]

[Re

tard

][A

dva

nce

][E

nte

r]

[Assig

n]

[Mo

dify]

[En

ter]

<etc

>[S

et

Up

]

{}

[La

be

l]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-12

8

[MC

P]

[IO

Lin

e]

[De

vic

e]

<e

tc>

[Zo

ne

][L

oca

l]<

etc

>

[Lo

op

]

[De

vic

e]

Pa

ram

s1

-8

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-4

[De

actio

n]

[NV

M]

[C]

[Q]

[E]

[En

][D

is]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

<e

tc>

En

ter

La

be

l

[Pe

rio

d]

[Sig

na

l1

][S

ign

al2

][S

ign

al3

]<

etc

><

etc

>

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[So

un

de

r][O

utp

ut]

En

ter

up

to8

FA

B/S

AB

pa

irs

[Actio

n]

Se

eS

etu

pm

en

um

ap

3S

ee

Se

tup

me

nu

ma

p2

-1

[So

un

d]

[Sig

na

l1]

[Lo

op

]

[Actio

n]

[Se

cto

r]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-32

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[MA

larm

][B

uzze

r]

[No

Actio

n]

[Sig

na

l2]

[Sig

na

l3]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Dis

ab

le]

/[E

na

ble

] {}

Pa

ram

s1

-2s [C

] [Q

][E

][C

] [Q

][E

]

[C][

Q]

[E]

[No

Actio

n]

EN

Vig

ilon

pa

ne

lw

ith

MC

C/M

CB

so

ftw

are

V4

.37

[]

Me

nu

ma

p1

Se

tU

p

#[S

av

e]

#[S

av

e]

op

tio

nw

ill

on

lya

pp

ea

ru

nd

er

cu

sto

me

rp

as

sw

ord

toa

llo

ws

av

ing

of

lab

els

an

dclo

ck

sett

ing

s

Co

mm

an

ds

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

re

ng

ine

er

(le

ve

l3

)p

as

sw

ord

on

ly

Co

mm

an

ds

are

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

rc

us

tom

er

(le

ve

l2

)p

as

sw

ord

[Cu

sto

m]

En

ter

La

be

l

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[SD

Ca

rd] *

[NV

M]

*-

[SD

Ca

rd]

op

tio

nis

for

Vig

ilo

nC

om

pa

ct

pa

ne

lo

nly

wh

en

SD

Ca

rdis

fitt

ed

Se

eS

etu

pm

en

um

ap

2-2

[Ma

nF

ire

]<

etc

>[M

CP

][A

uto

Fire

]

[Op

tio

n]

Th

es

eo

pti

on

sa

rea

cc

es

sib

lew

ith

fre

eb

loc

ks

wit

ch

ed

On

[C] [

Q]

[E]



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rE

N54

Vig

ilo

n4-L

oo

pp

an

el,

[Re

mo

ve

][A

ssig

n]

[De

vic

e]

NO

TE

:T

he

Ne

two

rkco

mm

an

ds

are

on

lya

pp

lica

ble

wh

en

an

etw

ork

ca

rdis

fitt

ed

inth

eco

ntr

olpa

ne

l.

Ke

y

[E]

=[E

nte

r]

[C]

=[C

an

ce

l]

[Q]=

[Quit]

[En

]=

[En

ab

le]

[Dis

]=

[Dis

ab

le]

[MC

P]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

[IO

Lin

e]

<etc

><

etc

>[M

Ala

rm]

<etc

>

{}

[Secto

r]P

ara

ms

1-8

[Zo

ne

][G

rou

p]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-32

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-12

8

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-4

{}

[Lo

op

]P

ara

ms

1-2

07

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-32

[Secto

r]

[Secto

r]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-32

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[Lo

op

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[MS

ecto

r]

[Gro

up

]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-12

8

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[MG

rou

p]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5[C

] [Q

][E

]

[AuxR

ly]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-2

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[MS

ecto

r]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

EN

Vig

ilon

pa

ne

lw

ith

MC

C/M

CB

so

ftw

are

V4

.37

[]

Me

nu

ma

p2

Se

tU

p

[Bu

ild]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5[S

ou

nd

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Sile

nce

][R

eset]

Co

mm

an

ds

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

re

ng

ine

er

(le

ve

l3

)p

as

sw

ord

on

ly

[De

layB

lk]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-16

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[MS

ecto

r]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

Se

tup

me

nu

ma

p2

-1

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-10

[Alm

Zo

ne

]

Ap

plic

ab

lefo

rV

igilo

nC

om

pa

ct

VA

on

ly

[Secto

r]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-3

2

[Secto

r]{

}P

ara

ms

1-8

[De

layB

lk]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-3

2{

}P

ara

ms

1-1

6[C

] [Q

][E

]

[Sig

na

l1]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5[S

ign

al2

][S

ign

al3

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[MS

ecto

r]

[MS

ecto

r]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

55

<etc

>[A

uxR

ly]

[Secto

r]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-3

2

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

] [Q

][E

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Fault]

[Dis

ab

le]

<etc

>

[Sig

na

l1]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[S

ign

al2

][S

ign

al3

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[De

layB

lk]

[Secto

r]{

}P

ara

ms

1-1

6

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-3

2

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

] [Q

][E

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-16

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[De

layB

lk]

[De

actio

n]

[Actio

n]S

etu

pm

en

um

ap

2-2



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rE

N54

Vig

ilo

n4-L

oo

pp

an

el,

[Bu

ild]

<e

tc>

[Au

xR

ly] Se

eS

etU

pM

en

um

ap

4{}

Pa

ram

s1

-16

[Tim

eS

lot]

[Da

y]

[Tim

eB

lok]

[En

ab

le]

{}

[Dis

ab

le]

Pa

ram

sH

H:M

M:S

S

{}

Pa

ram

sH

H:M

M:S

S[C

][Q

][E

]

[C][

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Se

tU

p]

[Zo

ne

]<

etc

>[M

essa

ge

s]

[Glo

ba

l][S

ecto

r]<

etc

>

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-32

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[Lo

op

]

[On]

[Off]

[So

un

de

r]

Se

eS

etU

pm

en

uM

ap

4

<e

tc>

[DS

T]

[De

vic

e]

{}

[De

laye

d]

Pa

ram

s1

-2

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-10

min

MM

:SS

[Off] [C

] [Q

][E

]

[On

]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

{} [

Sta

te]

en

ab

le

Pa

ram

s1

-8

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[Sta

te]

dis

ab

le

[Tim

eB

lok]

[SA

FE

] [C][

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-25

5

[Mo

n][T

ue

][W

ed

]<

etc

>[T

hu

][F

ri][S

at]

<e

tc>

[Su

n]

[An

d]

[Or]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[SC

ub

ed

]

[Sig

na

l1]

[Vo

lum

e]

[So

ftS

t]

[Sig

na

l2]

[Fin

dD

ev]

[Sig

na

l3]

[Ste

p]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-10

0

[Sig

na

l]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

6-1

00

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-25

5

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-10

0[C

][Q

][E

]

<e

tc>

<e

tc>

[Dis

ab

le]

[Sta

rt]

[En

d]

[En

ab

le] [C

] [Q

][E

]

01

:00

02

5-3

13

10

(HH

:MM

Da

yD

ate

1-

Da

te2

mo

nth

offse

ts)

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Sile

nce

][S

ou

nd

][R

ese

t]

[Ou

tpu

t][B

oth

][N

on

e]

[In

pu

t] {}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[Ve

rify

]

NO

TE

:T

he

Ne

two

rkco

mm

an

ds

su

ch

as

Ma

ste

rS

ecto

r,M

aste

rG

rou

pa

reo

nly

ap

plic

ab

lew

he

na

ne

two

rkca

rdis

fitt

ed

inth

eco

ntr

olpa

ne

la

nd

Ne

two

rkn

od

e.

EN

Vig

ilon

pa

ne

lw

ith

MC

Cso

ftw

are

V4

.37

[]M

en

um

ap

3S

et

Up

Co

mm

an

ds

accessib

leu

nd

er

en

gin

eer

(level3)

passw

ord

on

ly

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[L

oo

p]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[O

utp

ut]

[Fire

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Lin

k]

[Un

link]

[All]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-12

8[C

][Q

][E

]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[Ou

tpu

t]

[Fire

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Lin

k]

[Un

link]

[All]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

] [Q

][E

]

[Ca

rd]

[Ve

rify

] [C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-10

min

MM

:SS

[De

layB

lk]

[Sig

na

l1]

[Sig

na

l2]

[Sig

na

l3]

<e

tc>

[Off]

[No

Actio

n]

<e

tc>

[Actio

n]

[De

laye

d]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-16

[C][

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

sM

M:S

S0

-10

min

Se

tu

pm

en

um

ap

3

Vo

ice

/To

ne

nu

mb

er

[Off]

[MG

rou

p]

[Au

toZ

on

e]

[Ma

nZ

on

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

][Q

][E

]

[E]

[Fro

m]

[C]

[Q]

[E]

[C]

[Q]

[Sig

1]

[Sig

2]

[Sig

3]

[E]

[Fro

m]

[C]

[Q]

[Sig

1]

[Sig

2]

[Sig

1]

[E]

[Fro

m]

[C]

[Q]



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rE

N54

Vig

ilo

n4-L

oo

pp

an

el,

[Bu

ild]

[Actio

n]

[La

be

l]

Ke

y

[E]=

[Ente

r]

[C]

=[C

an

ce

l]

[Q]=

[Quit]

[En

]=

[En

ab

le]

[Dis

]=

[Dis

ab

le]

[Trig

ge

r]

[Lo

op

]

[De

vic

e]

[IO

Lin

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-48

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7

[Tim

eB

lk]

[Secto

r]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-12

8[M

od

e]

[Zo

ne

][1

stD

ev]

[AllD

ev]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Tim

eB

lok]

[Task]

[Trig

ge

r]{

}P

ara

ms

1-8

[Sensors

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

55

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Re

mo

ve

]

<etc

>[M

Secto

r][C

ha

nn

el]

[No

ne

]<

etc

>

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

] [Q

][E

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-1

5

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-3

2

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

] [Q

][E

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[Lo

op

]

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-6

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Zo

ne

]

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

[Pre

Fires]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-3

[Fires]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-3

[Sta

rtM

A]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Sto

pM

A]

[No

Actio

n]

[Use

rCo

de

]

[Dis

pla

y]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[No

ne

]

En

ter

text

tob

ed

isp

layed

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Re

ve

rsb

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[No

tR

evs]

Access

tow

hole

of

[Co

ntr

ol]

me

nu

[C] [

Q]

[E]

NO

TE

:T

he

Ne

two

rkco

mm

an

ds

su

ch

as

Ma

ste

rS

ecto

r,M

aste

rG

rou

pa

reo

nly

ap

plic

ab

lew

he

na

ne

two

rkca

rdis

fitt

ed

inth

eco

ntr

olpa

ne

la

nd

Ne

two

rkn

od

e.

EN

Vig

ilon

pa

ne

lw

ith

MC

C/M

CB

so

ftw

are

V4

.37

[Se

tU

p]

Me

nu

ma

p4

Co

mm

an

ds

accessib

leu

nd

er

en

gin

eer

(level3)

passw

ord

on

ly

[Print]

[Bo

th]

Se

tu

pm

en

um

ap

4-1

Se

tu

pm

en

um

ap

4-2

[Su

pe

rFire

s]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-3



[Co

ntr

ol]

[Se

tU

p]

[Info

][T

est/E

ng]

<etc

>[A

ctive]

Ke

y

[E]=

[Ente

r]

[C]=

[Ca

nce

l]

[Q]=

[Quit]

[En

]=

[En

ab

le]

[Dis

]=

[Dis

ab

le]

[His

toric]

[Events

][L

ab

el]

[Use

rCo

de

][T

ime

Avg

][S

tatu

s]

[Ma

p]

<etc

>

[E]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[C] [

No

de

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

55

[C]

[Q]

[Fault]

[Wa

rnin

g]

[Superv

is]

[Exce

ptio

n]

[His

tFire]

<etc

>

[E]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[N] [

Q]

[P]

[Ca

rd]

[No

de

]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[E]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[N][

Q]

[P]

[Ca

rd]

[No

de

]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[Active]

[N] [

Q]

[P]

[Lo

g]

[Ca

rd]

[E]

[No

de

]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5[C

] [Q

]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-10

0[C

] [Q

]

{}

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-12

8

[MC

P]

[IO

Lin

e]

[De

vic

e]

<etc

>[Z

on

e]

[Lo

ca

l]<

etc

>

[Lo

op

]

[De

vic

e]

Pa

ram

s1

-8

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7{}

Pa

ram

s1

-4[C

][Q

][E

]

[C][

Q]

[E]

[C][

Q]

[E]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-6

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C][

Q]

[E] [N

][C

][P

][R

]

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

~-

will

on

lya

pp

ea

rif

an

etw

ork

ca

rdis

fitt

ed

inth

eco

ntr

olpa

ne

l{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Ne

tM

ap

]~

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[C][Q

][E

]

<etc

>

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-3

2

[Secto

r]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[Ca

rd]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[No

de

][C

]{}

Pa

ram

s1

-12

8[Zo

ne

][G

rou

p]

[Netw

ork

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-32

[SectL

ink]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Lo

op

][De

layL

ink]

<etc

>

[So

un

de

rs]

De

fau

ltS

ig1

65

00

65

00

65

00

65

00

10

Sig

24

F2

54

F2

54

F2

54

F2

51

5S

ig3

4F

00

4F

00

4F

00

4F

00

15

[Sta

rt]

[Co

nfig

]

<etc

>

[C] [

Q]

[E]

<etc

>

[Q]

[E]

<etc

>

[Dis

pla

y]

[Print]

Th

ese

op

tio

ns

will

on

lya

pp

ea

rif

an

exte

rna

lp

rin

ter

isfitt

ed

an

dth

ep

rin

ter

issw

itch

ed

On

(se

eC

on

tro

lm

en

us).

[Lo

op

Ma

p]

EN

Vig

ilon

pa

ne

lw

ith

MC

C/M

CB

so

ftw

are

V4

.37

[]M

en

um

ap

Info

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-16

[Tim

eS

lot]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-2

[AuxR

ly]

<etc

>

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[SD

Ca

rd] * [C

] [Q

][E

]

[De

layB

lk]

Co

mm

an

ds

are

accessib

leu

nd

er

cu

sto

mer

(level2)

passw

ord

No

pa

ss

wo

rdre

qu

ire

d

[Test]

[E][C

ard

]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[No

de

]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[Au

dio

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-10

[Alm

Zo

ne

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

Au

dio

Co

ntr

ol

Mu

sic

Off

Mic

rop

ho

ne

To

ne

2A

ux

Msg

2,9

2,1

02

,14

PA

To

ne

2P

AA

lmZ

on

eA

:1

Mu

sic

Tim

eB

lock:0

Mu

sic

Alm

Zo

ne

:1

PA

Alm

Zo

ne

B:1

Ap

plic

ab

lefo

rV

igilo

nC

om

pa

ctV

Ao

nly

[Dis

ab

le]

[Glo

ba

l]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

<etc

>

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[Me

ssa

ge

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Ca

rd]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[L

oo

p]

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

][Q

][E

]

<etc

>[M

Gro

up

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[MS

ecto

r][M

SLin

k]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[DS

T]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

<etc

>{}

Pa

ram

s1

-2[C

] [Q

][E

][Bu

ild]

*-

[SD

Card

]o

pti

on

isfo

rV

igilo

nC

om

pact

pa

nelo

nly

wh

en

SD

Card

isfi

tted



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rE

N54

Vig

ilo

n4-L

oo

pp

an

el,

[Co

ntr

ol]

[Se

tU

p]

[Info

][T

est/E

ng]

<etc

>

[Dis

pTest]

[Use

rCo

de

]

[Co

nfig

][L

oo

p]

[Ca

rd]

[Test]

<etc

>

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[Dis

ab

le]

[E]

[N]

[C]

[P]

[Fault]

[Exce

ptio

n]

[All]

[Ca

rd]

[No

de

][E

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[E]

<etc

>[C

lea

r][N

ew

Pa

ss]

[Zo

ne

][B

uzzer]

[La

ng

ua

ge

]<

etc

>[D

isp

lay]^

En

ter

an

acce

ss

co

de

[Dis

ab

le]

[Fault]

[Su

pe

rvis

][F

ire]

[Off/O

n] [C

] [Q

][E

]

[Sensors

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-1

28

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[AllD

ev]

En

glish

-E

spa

no

l-

Po

rtu

gu

es

-C

ze

ch

oslo

va

kia

n-

Bra

zili

an

[N] [

E]

[P]

[N]

[P]

[E]

Ra

ng

e0

-31

15

-de

fau

lt

[Co

mm

issn

]

[C][

Q]

[E]

[On/O

ff]

[PS

U]

Mns

DC

Bt1

BC

1B

t2B

C2

MA

1M

A2

Ear

Lpv

21

41

41

20

62

06

00

74

74

60

22

12

06

13

82

00

20

30

07

47

46

51

97

[R]

[Q]

Vig

ion

[Pre

vio

us]

[Next]

[E]

Off

Co

ntr

olle

rC

ard

1to

15

[Fre

eB

lok]

[De

layb

lk]

[Off]

^- T

his

op

tio

nis

on

lyap

plicab

lefo

rn

ew

pan

els

[La

be

l]lo

ng

lab

els

[C] [

Q]

[E][O

n]

[Off]

[Contr

ast]

EN

Vig

ilon

pa

ne

lw

ith

MV

4.3

7[

]M

en

um

ap

1Te

st/

En

gC

C/M

CB

so

ftw

are

Co

mm

an

ds

accessib

leu

nd

er

en

gin

eer

(level3)

passw

ord

on

ly

Co

mm

an

ds

are

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

rc

us

tom

er

(le

ve

l2

)p

as

sw

ord

[Ne

two

rk]*

[Da

talo

g]

[C][

Q]

[E]

[On]

[Off]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[No

Re

se

t][N

oS

ilen

ce

]see

Test/E

ng

me

nu

ma

p2

-1[C

om

ms]

[Ro

utin

g]

<etc

><

etc

>

En

ter

me

ssa

ge

tob

ed

isp

laye

d

[En

ter]

[Do

ma

in]

[1]

[Bo

th]

[2]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[On/O

ff]

[C][

Q]

[E]

[Me

ssa

ge

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[En

ter]

[Do

ma

in]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[Rem

ote

]+[T

est]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[On]

[No

Re

se

t][N

oS

ilen

ce

]

[Bu

ild]

<etc

>[B

ypass]

[On]

[Off]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Zo

ne

]

[Fla

sh

ing

]

[C][

Q]

[E]

[Off]

[On]

<etc

><

etc

>

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[Init]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Reset]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Up

da

te]#

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[NV

MC

ard

][S

DC

ard

]#

[Off]

[Zo

ne

][D

evic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-12

8[C

] [Q

][E

]{

}P

ara

ms

0-2

00

[Op

tio

n]

Th

ese

op

tio

ns

are

accessib

lew

ith

freeb

lock

sw

itch

ed

On

[Com

ms]

see

Test/E

ng

me

nu

ma

p2

-2

<etc

>[D

ela

y]

[Co

-in

cid

]

[Zo

ne

][G

rou

p]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

sM

M-S

S0

-10

<etc

>

[Glo

ba

l]

#-

Th

iso

pti

on

iso

nly

ap

plicab

lefo

rV

igilo

nC

om

pact

wit

hS

Dcard

fitt

ed

Vig

ion

Co

mpa

ct

+- T

his

op

tio

nis

no

tap

plicab

lefo

rV

igilo

nC

om

pact

No

te:B

t2a

nd

BC

2a

reo

nly

ap

plic

ab

lefo

rV

ig1

-72

[Ca

rd]

[Port

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

55

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-3

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[C] [

Q]

[E]

Dis

pla

ye

do

nV

IG1

-24

&V

IG1

-72

:'V

igilo

nP

SU

V1

.00

20

/08

/06

'D

isp

laye

do

nV

igilo

nC

om

pa

ct:'V

igC

om

pa

ctV

2.0

22

4/1

0/0

6'



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

s

[Lo

op

]

[Allo

ca

te]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

][Q

][E

]

[Fin

dD

ev]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[S

tart

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[C

][Q

][E

]

[Ga

in]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-7

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-63

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Fla

me

][B

ea

m]

[Au

toG

ain

] [Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Alig

n]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[D

evic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[L

oo

p]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

][Q

][E

]

<e

tc>

<e

tc>

[Sim

ula

te]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-6[D

evic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[L

oo

p]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

] [Q

][E

]

[Op

tio

n]

Th

es

eo

pti

on

sa

rea

cc

es

sib

lew

ith

fre

eb

loc

ks

wit

ch

ed

On

[Re

pa

ir] [L

oo

p]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

<e

tc>

<e

tc>

EN

Vig

ilon

pa

ne

lw

ith

MV

4.3

7[

]M

en

um

ap

2Te

st/

En

gC

C/M

CB

so

ftw

are

Co

mm

an

ds

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

re

ng

ine

er

(le

ve

l3

)p

as

sw

ord

on

ly

Co

mm

an

ds

are

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

rc

us

tom

er

(le

ve

l2

)p

as

sw

ord

[Fire]

[Pre

Fire]

[Su

pF

ire

]

Te

st/

En

gm

en

um

ap

2-2

[Co

mm

s]

[Ad

dre

ss]

[Do

ma

in]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Ca

rd] [C

] [Q

][E

]{

}P

ara

ms

0-1

5

for

oth

er

ca

rds

Ca

rd0

(MC

C/M

CB

)

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-3P

OR

T[P

] [E

][N

]

[P] [

E]

[N]

[Mo

de

][B

au

d]

RS

48

5P

ort

0-

Rp

t-

Off

RS

23

2P

ort

1R

S2

32

Po

rt2

US

BP

ort

3-

Std

-O

ff

As

Sw

itch

es

50 ! 60

0P

ort

01

80

02

40

03

60

04

80

07

20

0-

Po

rt1

19

20

0

57

60

011

52

00

23

04

00

12

00

96

00

38

40

0-

Po

rt1

&2

Std

-A

sco

m-

Prin

ter

Un

ive

rsa

l-

Off

RS

23

2P

ort

0-

Re

pe

at

RS

48

5P

ort

1-

Std

MC

B

MC

C

Te

st/

En

gm

en

um

ap

2-1

Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rE

N54

Vig

ilo

n4-L

oo

pp

an

el,

Appendix A - Menu maps for BS version 3+ Vigilon4-Loop panelsThe menu options [Control], [SetUp], [Info] and [Test/Eng] are accessible on pressing the MENU ON/OFF button.



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rB

Svers

ion

3+

Vig

ilo

n

[Co

ntr

ol]

[Se

tU

p]

[In

fo]

[Te

st/E

ng

]

[En

ab

le]

[Dis

ab

le]

<e

tc>

[Se

cto

r][M

Se

cto

r]

[De

vic

e]

[IO

Lin

e]

<e

tc>

[Se

cto

r][Z

on

e]

[Gro

up

][A

uxR

ly]

[MS

ecto

r][C

om

ms]

Pa

ram

s1

-8{

}[E

][C

][Q

]

Pa

ram

s1

-4{

}[D

evic

e]

Pa

ram

s1

-32

{}[

E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

1-1

28

{}[

E]

[C][Q

]

<e

tc>

Pa

ram

s1

-2{

}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5{

}[E

][C

][Q

]

<e

tc> P

ara

ms

0-1

5{

}[E

][C

][P

ort

]

<e

tc>

[Au

xR

ly]

<e

tc>

[So

un

de

r][D

igita

l][T

ime

slo

t]

[So

un

d]

<e

tc>

[Sile

nce

][R

ese

t]<

etc

>[S

tart

MA

][S

top

MA

][U

se

rCo

de

]

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7{

}[L

oo

p]

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[L

oo

p]

Pa

ram

s1

-32

{}

[Lo

op

]

Pa

ram

s1

-8{

}[A

ctio

n]

[Sig

na

l1]

[Off]

[Sig

na

l2]

[Sig

na

l3]

[E]

[C][Q

]

[Sig

na

l1]

[All]

[Sig

na

l2]

[Sig

na

l3]

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5{

}[A

ctio

n]

Pa

ram

s1

-2{

}[O

n]

[Off]

[E]

[C][Q

]Pa

ram

s1

-20

7{

}[L

oo

p]

Pa

ram

s1

-8{

}[A

ctio

n]

Pa

ram

s1

-4{

}[O

n]

[Off]

[Pu

lse

]

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7{

}[L

oo

p]

[E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

1-8

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

{}

[De

vic

e]

[E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

1-8

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7{

}[L

oo

p]Pa

ram

s1

-16

{}

[De

lay][

On]

Pa

ram

sH

H:M

M:S

S{

}[O

n]

[E]

[C][Q

]

[Pa

use

][B

uild

]<

etc

>

[E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

0-3

0s

ec

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5{

}[O

n]

[Off]

[E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

1-2

55

{}

[E]

[C][Q

]

[Sig

na

l1]

[Off]

[Sig

na

l2]

[Sig

na

l3]

[Off]

[Off]

[No

de

][E

][C

][Q

]

[E]

[C][Q

]

BS

Vig

ilon

/3

4K

4-lo

op

pa

ne

lw

ith

MV

3.9

2xx/0

8/0

5[

]M

en

um

ap

Co

ntr

ol

CC

so

ftw

are

[E]

[C][Q

]

Ke

y

[E]=

[En

ter]

[C]=

[Ca

nce

l]

[Q]=

[Quit]

[En

]=

[En

ab

le]

[Dis

]=

[Dis

ab

le]

[Ve

rify

]<

etc

>

Pa

ram

s0

-3{

}[E

][C

][Q

]

ifo

ffif

on

[On][

Q]

[E]

[C][Q

]

[Test]

[Q]

[Pa

pe

rF

d]

[Off]

8L

ine

fee

ds

[E]

[C][Q

]

******

PR

IN

TE

RT

ES

T******

!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGH

IJKLMNOPQRSRUVWXYZ[=]^-`abcdefghijklmnop

qrstuvwxyz{|}

[Prin

ter]

NO

TE

:T

he

Ne

two

rkco

mm

an

ds

su

ch

as

Ma

ste

rS

ecto

r,M

aste

rG

rou

pa

reo

nly

ap

plic

ab

lew

he

na

ne

two

rkca

rdis

fitt

ed

inth

eco

ntr

olpa

ne

la

nd

Ne

two

rkn

od

e.

[Bu

ild]

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5{

}[E

][C

][Q

]P

ara

ms

1-8

{}[

E]

[C][Q

]

[MA

larm

]

[E]

[C][Q

]

Co

mm

an

ds

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

re

ng

ine

er

(le

ve

l3

)p

as

sw

ord

on

ly

Co

mm

an

ds

are

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

rc

us

tom

er

(le

ve

l2

)p

as

sw

ord

[De

layB

lk]

Pa

ram

s1

-16

{}

[De

laye

d]

[E]

[C][Q

]P

ara

ms

MM

:SS

0-1

0m

in{

}

[En

d]

[E]

[C][Q

]

[Sto

p]

No

pa

ss

wo

rdre

qu

ire

d



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rB

Svers

ion

3+

Vig

ilo

n

[Co

ntr

ol]

[Se

tU

p]

[Info

][T

est/

Eng]

<e

tc>

[Use

rCo

de

]

[Pro

tect]

[Re

mo

ve

][B

acku

p]

[Re

co

ve

r]<

etc

><

etc

>[S

etC

lock]

[Ne

xt]

[Re

tard

][A

dva

nce

][E

nte

r]

[Assig

n]

[Mo

dify]

[En

ter]

<etc

>[S

etU

p]

{}

[La

be

l]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-12

8

[MC

P]

[IO

Lin

e]

[De

vic

e]

<e

tc>

[Gro

up

][L

oca

l]<

etc

>

[Lo

op

]

[De

vic

e]

Pa

ram

s1

-8

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-4

NO

TE

:T

he

Ne

two

rkco

mm

an

ds

su

ch

as

Ma

ste

rS

ecto

r,M

aste

rG

rou

pa

reo

nly

ap

plic

ab

lew

he

na

ne

two

rkca

rdis

fitt

ed

inth

eco

ntr

olpa

ne

la

nd

Ne

two

rkn

od

e.

[De

actio

n]

[NV

M]

[C]

[Q]

[E]

[En

][D

is]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

Ke

y

[E]=

[Ente

r]

[C]=

[Ca

nce

l]

[Q]=

[Quit]

[En

]=

[En

ab

le]

[Dis

]=

[Dis

ab

le]

<e

tc>

En

ter

La

be

l

[Pe

rio

d]

[Sig

na

l1

][S

ign

al2

][S

ign

al3

]<

etc

><

etc

>

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[So

un

de

r][O

utp

ut]

En

ter

up

to8

FA

B/S

AB

pa

irs

[Actio

n]

Se

eS

etu

pm

en

um

ap

3S

ee

Se

tup

me

nu

ma

p2

[So

un

d]

[Sig

na

l1]

[Lo

op

]

[Actio

n]

[Se

cto

r]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-32

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[MA

larm

][B

uzze

r]

[No

Actio

n]

[Sig

na

l2]

[Sig

na

l3]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Dis

ab

le]

/[E

na

ble

] {}

Pa

ram

s1

-2s

[Se

cto

r]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-3

2

[Se

cto

r]{

}P

ara

ms

1-8

[De

layB

lk]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-3

2

[MS

ecto

r]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-16

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Sig

na

l1]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5[S

ign

al2

][S

ign

al3

]

[C][

Q]

[E]

[MS

ecto

r]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

55

<e

tc>

[Au

xR

ly]

[Se

cto

r]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-3

2

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

] [Q

][E

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Fa

ult]

[Dis

ab

le]

<e

tc>

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[C][

Q]

[E]

[No

Actio

n]

[Sig

na

l1]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[S

ign

al2

][S

ign

al3

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

BS

Vig

ilon

/3

4K

4-lo

op

pa

ne

lw

ith

MC

Cso

ftw

are

V3

.92

xx/0

8/0

5[

]M

en

um

ap

1S

et

Up

#[S

av

e]

#[S

av

e]

op

tio

nw

illo

nly

ap

pe

ar

un

de

rc

us

tom

er

pa

ss

wo

rdto

all

ow

sa

vin

go

fla

be

lsa

nd

clo

ck

se

ttin

gs

Co

mm

an

ds

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

re

ng

ine

er

(le

ve

l3

)p

as

sw

ord

on

ly

Co

mm

an

ds

are

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

rc

us

tom

er

(le

ve

l2

)p

as

sw

ord

No

pa

ss

wo

rdre

qu

ire

d

[De

layB

lk]

[Se

cto

r]{

}P

ara

ms

1-1

6

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-3

2

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

] [Q

][E

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-16

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[De

layB

lk]



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rB

Svers

ion

3+

Vig

ilo

n

[Re

mo

ve

][A

ssig

n]

[De

vic

e]

NO

TE

:T

he

Ne

two

rkco

mm

an

ds

are

on

lya

pp

lica

ble

wh

en

an

etw

ork

ca

rdis

fitt

ed

inth

eco

ntr

olpa

ne

l.

Ke

y

[E]=

[En

ter]

[C]=

[Ca

nce

l]

[Q]=

[Quit]

[En

]=

[En

ab

le]

[Dis

]=

[Dis

ab

le]

[MC

P]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

[IO

Lin

e]

<e

tc>

<e

tc>

[MA

larm

]<

etc

>

{}

[Se

cto

r]P

ara

ms

1-8

[Zo

ne

][G

rou

p]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-32

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-12

8

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-4

{}

[Lo

op

]P

ara

ms

1-2

07

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-32

[Se

cto

r]

[Se

cto

r]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-32

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[Lo

op

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[MS

ecto

r]

[Gro

up

]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-12

8

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[MG

rou

p]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5[C

] [Q

][E

]

[Au

xR

ly]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-2

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[MS

ecto

r]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

BS

Vig

ilon

/3

4K

4-lo

op

pa

ne

lw

ith

MC

Cso

ftw

are

V3

.92

xx/0

8/0

5[

]M

en

um

ap

2S

et

Up

[Bu

ild]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5[S

ou

nd

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Sile

nce

][R

ese

t]

Co

mm

an

ds

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

re

ng

ine

er

(le

ve

l3

)p

as

sw

ord

on

ly

[De

layB

lk]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-16

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[MS

ecto

r]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

fro

mse

tup

me

nu

ma

p1



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rB

Svers

ion

3+

Vig

ilo

n

[Bu

ild]

<e

tc>

[Au

xR

ly]

Se

eS

etU

pM

en

um

ap

4

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-16

[Tim

eS

lot]

[Da

y]

[Tim

eB

lok]

[En

ab

le]

{}

[Dis

ab

le]

Pa

ram

sH

H:M

M:S

S

{}

Pa

ram

sH

H:M

M:S

S[C

][Q

][E

]

[C][

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Sile

nce

][S

ou

nd

][R

ese

t]

[Ou

tpu

t][B

oth

][N

on

e]

[In

pu

t] {}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[Se

tU

p]

[Gro

up

]<

etc

>[M

essa

ge

s]

[Glo

ba

l][S

ecto

r]<

etc

>

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-32

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[Lo

op

]

[On]

[Off]

[So

un

de

r]

Se

eS

etU

pm

en

uM

ap

4

<e

tc>

[DS

T]

[Dis

ab

le]

[Sta

rt]

[En

d]

[En

ab

le] [C

] [Q

][E

]

01

:00

02

5-3

13

10

(HH

:MM

Da

yD

ate

1-

Da

te2

mo

nth

offse

ts)

[De

vic

e]

{}

[De

laye

d]

Pa

ram

s1

-2

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-10

min

MM

:SS

[Off] [C

] [Q

][E

]

[On]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

{} [

Sta

te]

en

ab

le

Pa

ram

s1

-8

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[Sta

te]

dis

ab

le

[Tim

eB

lok]

[SA

FE

] [C][

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-25

5

[Mo

n][T

ue

][W

ed

]<

etc

>[T

hu

][F

ri][S

at]

<e

tc>

[Su

n]

[An

d]

[Or]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[SC

ub

ed

]

[Sig

na

l1]

[Vo

lum

e]

[So

ftS

t]

[Sig

na

l2]

[Fin

dD

ev]

[Sig

na

l3]

[Ste

p]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-10

0

[Sig

na

l]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

6-1

00

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-25

5

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-10

0[C

][Q

][E

]

<e

tc>

<e

tc>

[Ve

rify

]

NO

TE

:T

he

Ne

two

rkco

mm

an

ds

su

ch

as

Ma

ste

rS

ecto

r,M

aste

rG

rou

pa

reo

nly

ap

plic

ab

lew

he

na

ne

two

rkca

rdis

fitt

ed

inth

eco

ntr

olpa

ne

la

nd

Ne

two

rkn

od

e.

Vig

ilon

/3

4K

4-lo

op

pa

ne

lw

ith

MC

Cso

ftw

are

V3

.92

xx/0

8/0

5[

]M

en

um

ap

3S

et

Up

Co

mm

an

ds

accessib

leu

nd

er

en

gin

eer

(level3)

passw

ord

on

ly

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[Ou

tpu

t]

[Fire

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Lin

k]

[Un

link]

[All]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

] [Q

][E

]

[De

vic

e]

[Ca

rd]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[L

oo

p]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[O

utp

ut]

[Fire

] [C] [

Q]

[E]

[Lin

k]

[Un

link]

[All]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

] [Q

][E

]

[Ve

rify

] [C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-10

min

MM

:SS

[De

layB

lk]

[Sig

na

l1]

[Sig

na

l2]

[Sig

na

l3]

<e

tc>

[Off]

[No

Actio

n]

<e

tc>

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Sig

na

l1]

[Sig

na

l2]

[Sig

na

l3]

[All]

[Actio

n]

[De

laye

d]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-16

[C][

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

sM

M:S

S0

-10

min

Fro

mse

tu

pm

en

um

ap

1

[Off]

An

um

be

rd

efin

es

the

ton

ea

nd

me

ssa

ge

for

asig

na

l



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rB

Svers

ion

3+

Vig

ilo

n

[Bu

ild]

[Actio

n]

[La

be

l]

Ke

y

[E]=

[Ente

r]

[C]=

[Ca

nce

l]

[Q]=

[Quit]

[En

]=

[En

ab

le]

[Dis

]=

[Dis

ab

le]

[Trig

ge

r]

[Lo

op

]

[De

vic

e]

[IO

Lin

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-48

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7

[Tim

eB

lk]

[Se

cto

r]

[C][

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-12

8[M

od

e]

[Gro

up

][1

stD

ev]

[AllD

ev]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Tim

eB

lok]

[Ta

sk]

[Trig

ge

r]{

}P

ara

ms

1-8

[Se

nso

rs]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Re

mo

ve

]

<e

tc>

[MS

ecto

r][C

ha

nn

el]

[No

ne

]<

etc

>

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

][Q

][E

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-1

5

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-3

2

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

] [Q

][E

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[Lo

op

]

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-6

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Gro

up

]

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

[Pre

Fire

s]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-3

[Fire

s]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-3

[Sta

rtM

A]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Sto

pM

A]

[No

Actio

n]

[Use

rCo

de

]

[Dis

pla

y]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[No

ne

]

En

ter

tex

tto

be

dis

pla

ye

d

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Re

ve

rsb

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[No

tR

evs]

Acce

ss

tow

ho

leo

f[C

on

tro

l]m

en

u

[C] [

Q]

[E]

NO

TE

:T

he

Ne

two

rkco

mm

an

ds

su

ch

as

Ma

ste

rS

ecto

r,M

aste

rG

rou

pa

reo

nly

ap

plic

ab

lew

he

na

ne

two

rkca

rdis

fitt

ed

inth

eco

ntr

olpa

ne

la

nd

Ne

two

rkn

od

e.

BS

Vig

ilon

/3

4K

4-lo

op

pa

ne

lw

ith

MC

Cso

ftw

are

V3

.92

xx/0

8/0

5[S

etU

p]M

en

um

ap

4C

om

man

ds

accessib

leu

nd

er

en

gin

eer

(level3)

passw

ord

on

ly

[Prin

t][B

oth

]

Fro

mse

tu

pm

en

um

ap

1

Fro

mse

tu

pm

en

um

ap

1



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rB

Svers

ion

3+

Vig

ilo

n

[Co

ntr

ol]

[Se

tU

p]

[In

fo]

[Te

st/

En

g]

<etc

>[A

ctive]

Ke

y

[E]=

[En

ter]

[C]=

[Ca

nce

l]

[Q]=

[Quit]

[En

]=

[En

ab

le]

[Dis

]=

[Dis

ab

le]

[His

toric]

[Eve

nts

][L

ab

el]

[Use

rCo

de

][T

ime

Avg

][S

tatu

s]

[Ma

p]

<etc

>

[E]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[C] [

No

de

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

55

[C]

[Q]

[Fault]

[Wa

rnin

g]

[Su

pe

rvis

][S

ubF

ault]

[His

tFire]

<etc

>

[E]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[N] [

Q]

[P]

[Ca

rd]

[No

de

]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[E]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[N][

Q]

[P]

[Ca

rd]

[No

de

]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[Active]

[N] [

Q]

[P]

[Lo

g]

[Ca

rd]

[E]

[No

de

]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5[C

] [Q

]

Se

e

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-10

0[C

] [Q

]

{}

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-12

8

[MC

P]

[IO

Lin

e]

[De

vic

e]

<etc

>[G

rou

p]

[Lo

ca

l]<

etc

>

[Lo

op

]

[De

vic

e]

Pa

ram

s1

-8

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7{}

Pa

ram

s1

-4[C

][Q

][E

]

[C][

Q]

[E]

[C][

Q]

[E]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-6

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C][

Q]

[E] [N

][C

][P

][R

]

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

*-

will

on

lya

pp

ea

rif

anetw

ork

card

isfitted

inth

eco

ntr

olpa

ne

l{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Ne

tM

ap

]*

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[C][Q

][E

]

<etc

>

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-3

2

[Secto

r]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15[C

ard

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[C][

Q]

[E]

[No

de

][C

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-12

8[Zo

ne

][G

rou

p]

[MG

rou

p]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-32

[SectL

ink]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Lo

op

][De

layL

ink]

<etc

>[S

ou

nd

ers

]

De

fau

ltS

ig1

65

00

65

00

65

00

65

00

10

Sig

24

F2

54

F2

54

F2

54

F2

51

5S

ig3

4F

00

4F

00

4F

00

4F

00

15

[Sta

rt]

[Co

nfig

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-16

[Tim

eS

lot]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

<etc

>

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-2

[Au

xR

ly]

<etc

>

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[Me

ssa

ge

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[Bu

ild]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[MS

ecto

r][M

SL

ink]

<etc

>[G

lob

al]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

<etc

>

[C] [

Q]

[E]

<etc

>

[Q]

[E]

[DS

T]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

<etc

>

[Dis

pla

y]

[Prin

t]

Th

ese

op

tio

ns

will

on

lya

pp

ea

rif

an

exte

rna

lp

rin

ter

isfitt

ed

an

dth

ep

rin

ter

issw

itch

ed

On

(se

eC

on

tro

lm

en

us).

[Lo

op

Ma

p]

Vig

ilon

/3

4K

4-lo

op

pa

ne

lw

ith

MC

Cso

ftw

are

V3

.92

xx/0

8/0

5[

]M

en

um

ap

Info

[De

layB

lk]

[Ca

rd]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[L

oo

p]

[De

vic

e]

Co

mm

an

ds

are

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

rc

us

tom

er

(le

ve

l2

)p

as

sw

ord

No

pa

ss

wo

rdre

qu

ire

d

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

][Q

][E

]

[Test]

[E][C

ard

]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[No

de

]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rB

Svers

ion

3+

Vig

ilo

n

[Co

ntr

ol]

[Se

tU

p]

[In

fo]

[Te

st/

En

g]

<e

tc>

[Dis

pTe

st]

[Use

rCo

de

]

[Co

nfig

][L

oo

p]

[Ca

rd]

[Test]

<e

tc>

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[In

itN

VM

]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[Wa

rnin

g]

[E]

[N]

[C]

[P]

[Fa

ult]

[Su

bF

au

lt]

[All]

[Ca

rd]

[No

de

][E

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[E]

<e

tc>

[Cle

ar]

[Co

mm

s]

[Ne

wP

ass]

[Gro

up

][B

uzze

r][L

an

gu

ag

e]

<etc

>[D

isp

lay]

En

ter

an

acce

ss

co

de

[Wa

rnin

g][F

au

lt]

[Su

pe

rvis

][F

ire

]

[Off/O

n] [C

] [Q

][E

]

[Se

nso

rs]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-12

8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[AllD

ev]

En

glish

-E

spa

no

l-

Po

rtu

gu

es

-C

ze

ch

oslo

va

kia

n-

Bra

zili

an

[N] [

E]

[P]

[Ca

rd]

[Ad

dre

ss]

[Do

ma

in]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[P] [

E]

[N]

[N]

[P]

[E]

Ra

ng

e0

-31

15

-de

fau

lt

[Co

mm

issn

]

[C][

Q]

[E]

[On/O

ff]

[PS

U]

Mn

sD

CB

t1B

C1

Bt2

BC

2M

A1

MA

2E

ar

Lp

v2

14

14

12

06

20

60

07

47

46

02

21

[R]

[Q]

Co

ntr

olpa

ne

l

[Pre

vio

us]

[Ne

xt]

[E]

Off

Co

ntr

olle

rC

ard

1to

15

[Fre

eB

lok]

[Re

se

t]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[De

layb

lk]

[Off]

[Op

tio

n]

Th

es

eo

pti

on

sa

rea

cc

es

sib

lew

ith

fre

eb

loc

ks

wit

ch

ed

On

for

oth

er

ca

rds

for

Ca

rd0

(MC

C)

[Mo

de

][B

au

d]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-3P

OR

T[P

] [E

][N

]

[La

be

l]lo

ng

lab

els

[C] [

Q]

[E][O

n]

[Off]

[Co

ntr

ast]

RS

23

2P

ort

0-

Std

RS

48

5P

ort

1-

Std

As

Sw

itch

es

50 ! 60

0P

ort

01

80

02

40

03

60

04

80

07

20

0-

19

20

03

84

00

57

60

011

52

00

23

04

00

12

00

96

00

Po

rt1

&2

Vig

ilon

/3

4K

4-lo

op

pa

ne

lw

ith

MV

3.9

2xx/0

8/0

5[

]M

en

um

ap

1Test/

En

gC

Cso

ftw

are

Co

mm

an

ds

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

re

ng

ine

er

(le

ve

l3

)p

as

sw

ord

on

ly

Co

mm

an

ds

are

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

rc

us

tom

er

(le

ve

l2

)p

as

sw

ord

[Ne

two

rk]

[Da

talo

g]

[C][

Q]

[E][O

n]

[Off]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-15

[No

Re

se

t][N

oS

ilen

ce

]se

eTe

st/

En

gm

en

um

ap

2[M

essa

ge

][C

om

ms]

[Glo

ba

l]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[En

ter]

<e

tc>

<e

tc>

[Do

ma

in]

En

ter

me

ssa

ge

tob

ed

isp

laye

d

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-25

5

[En

ter]

[Do

ma

in]

[1]

[Bo

th]

[2] [C

] [Q

][E

]{

}P

ara

ms

0-1

5

[On/O

ff] [C

][Q

][E

]

[Re

mo

te]

[Zo

ne

]

[C][

Q]

[E]

[On/O

ff]

[No

Re

se

t][N

oS

ilen

ce

]

[Bu

ild]

<e

tc>

[Bypa

ss]

[On]

[Off]

[C] [

Q]

[E]

<e

tc>



Ap

pen

dix

A-

Men

um

ap

sfo

rB

Svers

ion

3+

Vig

ilo

n

[Co

ntr

ol]

[Se

tU

p]

[Info

][T

est/E

ng]

[Dis

pTest]

[Use

rCo

de

]

[Lo

op

]

[Allo

ca

te]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

][Q

][E

]

[Fin

dD

ev]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[S

tart

]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[C

] [Q

][E

]

[Gain

]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-7

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

[De

vic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-63

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Fla

me

][B

eam

]

[Au

toG

ain

] [Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-2

07

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

[Alig

n]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[D

evic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[L

oo

p]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

] [Q

][E

]

<etc

><

etc

>[S

imu

late

]

{}

Pa

ram

s0

-6[D

evic

e]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-20

7[L

oo

p]

{}

Pa

ram

s1

-8[C

] [Q

][E

]

[Op

tio

n]

Th

ese

op

tio

ns

are

accessib

lew

ith

freeb

lock

sw

itch

ed

On

[Re

pa

ir]

[Lo

op

]{

}P

ara

ms

1-8

[C] [

Q]

[E]

<etc

><

etc

>

Vig

ilon

/3

4K

4-lo

op

pa

ne

lw

ith

MV

3.9

2xx/0

8/0

5[

]M

en

um

ap

2Test/

En

gC

Cso

ftw

are

Co

mm

an

ds

accessib

leu

nd

er

en

gin

eer

(level3)

passw

ord

on

ly

Co

mm

an

ds

are

ac

ce

ss

ible

un

de

rc

us

tom

er

(le

ve

l2

)p

as

sw

ord

[Fire]

[Pre

Fire]

[Su

pF

ire

]

se

eTe

st/

En

gm

en

um

ap

1

Appendix B - Message Action ListThis appendix lists all the messages that are likely to be displayed at the control panel . There are some fault events that are not selfclearing and will require manual intervention.

Clearable fault events

The following faults are identified as clearable fault events.

� FLASH corrupt

� Invalid device configuration

� Too many errorsCan be cleared but will not reset the counters.

� Unrecoverable Tx fault

� Checksum errorFLASH Configuration data and FLASH in sensors

� NVM recovery failures or map mis-match

How to clear a clearable fault eventTo clear the fault at the control panel press the Menu on/Off button -> [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode] -> enter your PIN (wherenecessary) -> <etc> -> [Config] -> [Clear] -> [Fault] -> [Enter].

Latching fault events

The following faults are identified as latching events.

� Slave devices lost

� Loop allocation fault

� Invalid loop configuration

How to clear a latching fault eventTo clear a latching fault it is necessary to re-allocate the loop circuit. To re-allocate a loop circuit refer to section headed How topower a loop

Repairable fault events

� Loop (partial) short circuit.

� Ground break

How to clear a repairable fault eventTo repair the fault at the control panel press the Menu on/Off button -> [Test/Eng] -> [UserCode] -> enter your PIN (wherenecessary) -> [Loop] -> <etc> -> <etc> -> [Repair] -> [Loop] -> enter the loop number on which the fault resides -> [Enter].

Message Action list

The messages displayed at the control panel or loop repeat panels are given here in an alphanumerical order to provide guidance:

� on fault message

� likely meaning of the message

� along with suggestions on what initial actions may be taken to rectify the problem.

� Only the messages that are applicable will appear on the display of the control panel or loop repeat panels.

� The term device was previously referred to as outstation.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t

Message associated with.. meaning.. ..possible action

A spurious FIRQat card x

MCC / MCB (maincontrol card/board)

There is glitch on the MCChardware that appears onthe backplane / MCB.

Clear and ignore singleoccurrence.

A spurious IRQat card x


There is glitch on the MCC/ MCB hardware.


A spurious NMIat card x




A spurious SWI2at card x


There is glitch on theMCC hardware.


A spurious SWI3at card x




Access fault atcard x

Any Card Card cannot talk to theMCC / MCB localcontroller.

Replace card if the faultkeeps reoccurring.Could also be caused byexcessive network messages.Investigate message passing.

ACIA Failed atcard x

Network Card orMCC / MCB

Communication chipfailure or the FABs andSABs are corrupt.

Reset the card and replace ifit fault keeps reoccurring.

Alarm ZoneDisabled /Enabled atcard x

Loop ProcessorCard

-

Alarms silenced MCC / MCB (maincontrol card/board)

Silence alarms button hasbeen pressed.

-

Alarms sounded MCC / MCB (maincontrol card/board)

Sound alarms button hasbeen pressed.

-

Alarms Verified MCC / MCB (maincontrol card/board)

Alarms verify oracknowledge button hasbeen pressed.

-

Allocation :memory Overflowat card x numbery on loop z

LoopProcessorCard

Loop processor has run outof memory duringallocation / when starting aloop.

Software error or more likelya faulty RAM chip.

Allocation :Double Allocated

card xnumber y onloop z

Loop ProcessorCard

Two devices are given thesame address. Loop breaker(relay contacts) are fused‘micro welded’ together(closed) or there is a badconnection.

The device may be faulty.

Allocation : Hwfault card xnumber y onloop z

Loop ProcessorCard

Loop breaker relay has notclosed or serial line End-2is faulty or relay is stucki.e. closed. The device maynot be correctly fitted.

Check the deviceconnections.

Allocation : Maperror card xnumber y onloop z

Loop ProcessorCard

Loop wiring is incorrect, ega sub loop may have beenwired on a spur.

Check and rewire ifnecessary. This fault can alsobe device failure.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


Allocation : notready at Card x

Loop ProcessorCard

An attempt allocate a loopwhen it is alreadyallocating.

Wait and if it takes longerthan 10 minutes then reset theloop card.

Allocation : OKat Card n :Allocated x

Loop ProcessorCard

The loop circuit has beensuccessfully allocated.

-

Allocation : Toomany card xnumber y onloop z

Loop ProcessorCard

Allocated more than 200devices or the device isrestricted for use theparticular software version.

Replace incompatible devicesie:32000 or SMS devicefound in system.

Allocation : Txfault card xnumber y onloop z

Loop ProcessorCard

Invalid reply from thedevice.

Check the device. Also checkcable routing and length(measure resistance andcapacitance of cable).

Allocationstarted fromend 2 at Card x

Loop ProcessorCard

No devices found on End-1or End 1 of loop is opencircuit.

Check the wiring to the firstdevice or last device on theloop.

ASCII Device isfaulty number xon loop y

Loop ProcessorCard

Failure of control panel tocommunicate with Repeat/ Mimic panel. The powersupplies to the panels arenot connected.

If applicable connect thepower supply or RESET theMaster Repeat Card in theRepeat and Mimic panel. Ifnecessary replace thecard/software.

Back up Memory (NVM)-Backplane

Data is being copied fromcards and stored onto theNVM Card.

-

Back up required Memory (NVM)-Backplane

Data must be saved tomemory

Back up data to the memory.

Batterydischarged

Power supply This indicates the failure ofbattery load test. The ADCvalue should be equal to orless than normal - 9.

Check load test and thebattery condition.

Batterydisconnected/restored

Power supply A disconnection isindicated when the ADCvalue from the battery isequal to or less than 130.

Normally it should be = 234(27.4V)

To give a restored indicationthe ADC value should =Vbatt 1/6x256/5.

Baud rate x atCard y

MCC / MCB /Network Card

Baud rate set has been read. If required, change the baudrate.

beingInitialised atCard x

Memory - onBackplane

Memory is being set up bythe MCC / MCB (maincontrol card/board), readyfor use.

-

Buffer full atcard x

Any Card Software error. -

Buffers out ofstep at card x

Any Card Software error. Software errors will activatea system reset.

Ignore single occurrence.Record the event in logbook.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


Call point glassis brokennumber x loop y

Device Call point has beenoperated when the device isdisabled.

Replace the glass, ifnecessary.

Call point oninterface unitoperated/restored

Device Mains powered interfaceinput has been triggered byconventional MCP. Valueof input is equal to or lessthan 6V.

-

Call point opencct number x onloop y

Device Monitored base does notsee end-of-line unit. Thereis a bad connection toMCP.

Check the internal wiring,there may be a looseconnection.

Call pointoperated/restored number xloop y

Device Break glass has beenbroken or operated with atest key.

Replace the break glass torestore the call point orremove the test key,whichever is applicable.

Call point shortcct number xloop y

Device Call point contacts areshort circuit.

Check the call point contactsand circuit internally.

Card found/lostat card x

Any Card The card has beenfound/lost. If lost then it islocked out.

There may be a hardwarefault on card or Bckplane.Investigate and rectify.

Card n recovered/Card n backedup

Memory (NVM) -Backplane

Data recovered to a cardfrom the NVM. A card datahas been backed up to theNVM.

-

Chamber Removed/Replaced numberx on loop y

Device Device chamber has beenremoved.

Replacing the chamber willcause a replaced indication.

Charger Fault PanelPower Supply Unit(PSU)

Charger circuit has failed. Replace the PSU.

Charger Faultnumber x onloop y

EN54 System devicepower supply(Repeat, Mimic ormains poweredinterface)

Charger circuit has failed. Replace the board (having thepower supply) on the loopdevice.

Charger Restored Panel power supply Charger circuit is workingagain.

-

Charger Restorednumber x onloop y

EN54 System devicepower supply(Repeat, Mimic ormains poweredinterface).

Charger circuit is workingagain.

-

Chk=4.874 NVMC41874 Flag=0NVM is writeprotected atCard x

Memory (NVM) -Backplane

The memory is read only. Disable the write protectusing the [set up] menu.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


Clock changed /Clock not set up


Time and date has beenaltered or no time has beenentered.

If necessary, set the clockusing the set up menu.

CO sensor faulty Device There is a fault with the COsensor on S-Quad.

Replace device

CO sensor nearend of life

Device The CO cell is nearing theend manufacturerrecommended lifeexpectancy (S-Quad).

Replace the device

CO sensorrestored

Device The CO sensor fault hasbeen restored (S-Quad)

Command buildactivated/deactivated


Command build has beenswitched ON (activated) orOFF (deactivated).

If necessary switch ON/OFFthe command build using the[control] menu.

Command buildenabled /disabled

MCC /MCB (maincontrol card/board)

This is an automatic ormanually controlled action.

If necessary, manuallyenable/disable the commandbuild using the [control]menu.

CommsEnabled/Disabledat card x


Network Card

Card communications havebeen enabled or disabled.

Control panel has beenisolated from the network.

If necessary, manuallyenable/disable the Commsusing the [control] menu

Comms SupplyFault

Network node The communications powersupply has failed.

Replace the power supplyunit.

Comms supplyRestored

Network node The communications powersupply has been restored.

-

Communicationsstarted/stoppedat Card x


Communication to aparticular panel or toexternal equipment linkedto the panel (eg Laptop forcom. tool) has started /stopped.

Check the wiring.

Control passedat Card x

Network - -

Corrupted NVMmemory at card x

Any Card Checksum failure onconfiguration at midnight.

Recover data and record inlog book. If it reoccurs thenreplace the card.

DC Power failrestored

Power supply The ADC of output 27VregulatorNormal=146(28.5V).

-

DC too high / DCtoo low

Power supply The DC supply is:

Too high if greater than164 (32V)

Too low if less than 102(20V)

Check the mains supply.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


Delay blocksetup


A Delay Block has beenconfigured.

-

Delay blocksCleared


- -

Detection ZoneDisabled/Enabledat card x

Loop ProcessorCard

The detection zone hasbeen enabled or disabledautomatically or manually.

If necessary, manuallyenable/disable the Detectionzone using the [control]menu.

Detector oninterface unitnumber x onloop y channel z

Device Mains powered interfaceinput has been triggered byconventional detector.Value of the input is equalto or less than 10V.

-

Device AddressChanged from xnumber y onloop z

Loop ProcessorCard

Device SAFE address haschanged.

If necessary rectify the deviceSAFE address.

Device batteryfault /restored

Device The battery has failed theload test.

For a mains poweredinterface the value is equalto or less than normal - 2V.

Check and replace the batteryif necessary.

Device BatteryOC number x onloop y

Device Failure of fuse or batterywiring is OC on productslike mains poweredinterface unit.

Normal value = 27.4VValue is equal to or lessthan 16V (OC) / greaterthan 17V (Restored).

Check and replace ifnecessary to restore.

Device Enabled /Disabled atCard x

Loop ProcessorCard

Device has been enabled ordisabled manually orautomatically.

If necessary manually enableor disable the device.

Device Faultnumber x onloop y

Audio Control Unit Fault input has beenasserted.

Check remote equipmentwired to the fault input.

Device Gain setto x number y onloop z

Beam and Flamedevices

Confirmation of a changein gain setting.

-

Device Mains toohigh / lownumber x loop y

Devices like: Mimic/ Repeat / Mainspowered interfaceunit

Failure of device mainssupply.The value of rectified DCis too high / low i.e in theregion of 30V / 17V.

Check the power supply andreplace it if necessary

Device powerFault / Restorednumber x onloop y

Device The failure of internalpower supply rail.

Replace the device.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


Device powertoo high/restored too low/restorednumber x onloop y

Device Internal power rail of mainspowered interface unit hasa value of rectified DCequal to or greater than32V (high) / less than 30V(restored)DC equal to or less than24V (low) / greater than26V (restored)

Replace the device

Device Replacedis faultynumber x onLoop y

Loop ProcessorCard

Tx fault re-finding device. Check connections to device /base and also device type etc.

Device Replacednumber x loop y

Loop ProcessorCard

The replaced device is nowcommunicating with thepanel.

-

Device softaddress; SAFE:number x onloop y

Device Device primary addressdoes not match SAFEaddress.

Check loop configuration.

Device MainsFailed /Restored numberx loop y

Device Failure of mains supply tomimic/repeat /mainspowered interface unit. Thevalue of rectified DC isequal to or less than 8V i.e.failed.

Check mains supplyconnections and the mainsfuse. When the rectified DCis greater than 24V it isrestored.

Disables Cleared MCC / MCB (maincontrol card/board)

All disablements have beenremoved from the panel.

-

Duplicate SAFEAddress error:number x onloop y

Device Two devices on a loophave the same SAFEaddress.

Change one of the SAFEaddress.

Earth Fault/Fault Cleared

Power supply The ADC value to earth ofthe 8V regulator is equal toor greater than 5 (for a +vefault)or less than 3 ( for a -vefault).

A clear indication is normallygiven when ADC is equal to64.

Enabled Auxrelay xDisabled Auxrelay x


The auxiliary relay hasbeen enabled or disabledautomatically or manually.

If necessary, manuallyenable/disable the auxiliaryrelays using the [control]menu.

End switchingnormal at card x

Network Network card is back tonormal operation, (see alsoend switching disabled)

-

Exception numberx on loop y

(Exceptions alsoreferred to asSub-Fault)Loop Processor Card

Condition pattern has beenmatched.

Check the condition codes.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


Excessivetransmissionerror rate

Too many errors:lost device orloop split

Loop ProcessorCard

There were more than 10reply errors in one day.

(More than 16 reply errorswill cause the deviceisolation.)

Check screening andelectrical noise in area ofoperation + check looseconnections to loop.

External Fire atpanel n


There is a Fire on anotherpanel in a network.

Investigate the fire.

Fast scanstartednumber x on loopy channel z

Data logging Fire sensor has detected achange on its input.

The message is normallygiven when the data logger isconnected.

Fault clearedWarning cleared

MCC / MCB(maincontrol card/board)

Fault or warning has nowgone.

-

Fire number nloop y channel z

Loop ProcessorCard

Pattern match is equal to aFire or MCP operated orconventional detection onIO line of interfaceoperated.

-

Fire reset MCC / MCB (maincontrol card/board)

The Fire reset button hasbeen pressed.

-

Flash memorychecksum error

Device Speech MemoryChecksum Error

Replace the device

Full keyboardRemoved / Fittednumber x loop y

MCC/ MCB / DKC/MRC

The keyboard has been‘removed’ (is not fitted).

Check the cable connectionsto the keyboard to bringabout the ‘fitted’ message.

Group Enabled /Disabled


A group has beenautomatically or manuallydisabled or enabled.

If necessary, manuallyenable/disable the groupusing the [control] menu.

High Error rateat Card x

Network High number ofcommunication errors.

TBA

IncompatibleCard Version atcard x

Any Card There is a card softwareconflict.

Fit card with compatiblesoftware.

Interface Failedat Card x

MCC / MCB The interface timer chiphas failed.

Clear the fault and ignoresingle occurrence. Replacethe card on multiple failures.

Interface inputfault /restorednumber x onloop y channel z

Device IO line fault. Check the wiring and restorethe input for normaloperation.

Interface InputFire number x onloop y channel z

Device Interface IO line triggered afire event.

Check the wiring and restorethe input for normaloperation.

Interface inputnot Reset numberx on loop ychannel z

Device The input line continues totrigger.

Check devices on the IO line.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


Interface InputOC / restored

Device The end-of-line is not seen. Check the wiring. The devicemay have been removed, if sorefit the device to restore.

Interface inputoperated /releasednumber x on loopy channel z

Device Fixed extinguishantinterface unit input hasbeen triggered.

Follow the FE system resetprocedure to release theinput.

Interface inputSC / restorednumber x onloop y channel z

Device The interface wiring isshort circuit. The value ofinput is equal to or lessthan 2V.

Check the interface wiringand rectify to restore theinput.

Interface outputSC or OC orRestored numberx on loop ychannel y

Device The value of output isequal to or less than 50%for SCor is TBA for OC.

Check the wiring and restorethe output circuit.

IntermittentFault at card x

Any Card A fault has been picked upby the MCC / MCB (maincontrol card/board).

Replace the appropriate cardif the fault keeps reoccurring.

Invalidconfiguration

Loop Processor Card Loop recovered withfreeblocks ON.

This is not allowed. SwitchOFF the freeblocks andreallocate.

Device FLASH incorrectlyprogrammed

Replace the device

Invalidconfiguration atcard x

Loop ProcessorCard

Loop recovered withfreeblocks ON.

This is not allowed. SwitchOFF the freeblocks andreallocate.

Invalid message/ reply receivedat card x

Loop ProcessorCard

The message/reply receivedcannot be understood. Thecommunication can befrom a Repeat, Mimic,Supervisor, Network orOrator system.

Ignore single occurrence andrecord in log book.

Invalidmessage/reply atcard x

Network Card The message/reply has notbeen understood from otherpanels.

Ignore for single occurrenceand record in log book.

Invalid taskdelay at card x



Invalid taskstage



IO line Enabled/ Disabled atCard x

Loop ProcessorCard

The IO line is eitherenabled or disabledautomatically or manually.

If necessary, manuallyenable/disable the IO lineusing the [control] menu.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


Loop map haschanged card x

Loop ProcessorCard

The map is different to thatpreviously allocated.

Check and confirm differencewith backup map.

Loop powerrestored

Power supply Normal loop supplyrestored:

Normal ADC = 202 (44V).Value = Vsupp x1/11X256/5.

-

Loop Started notready at card xnumber y loop z

Loop ProcessorCard

As per message. Wait and if it takes longerthan10 minutes then reset the loopcard.

Loop stopped atCard x

Loop ProcessorCard

The loop has been abortedor is still being allocated.

Re-allocate the loop.

Loop voltage toohigh/low

Power supply The ADC value too high.

or

The ADC value is too low.

Check PSU values in the[Test/Eng] menu, normalreading is 221. Replace PSUif necessary.

Lost Commandnumber x onLoop y

Loop ProcessorCard

Lost FAB/SAB. Ignore single occurrence andrecord in log book.

Lost Devicenumber x on loopy

Loop ProcessorCard

There is no reply on ends1&2 of the device.

Check the deviceconnections.

Lost slaveDevice number xon loop y

Loop ProcessorCard

There is no reply on ends1&2 of the device.

Check the slave deviceconnections and replace ifnecessary.

Magnetic switchoperatednumber x loop y

Device The reset switch in the basehas closed.

Check base and proximity ofmagnetic field.

Main program notrunning atcard x

Any Card Problem with software. Thewatchdog will operate theMCC / MCB (main controlcard/board).

Software errors will activatea system reset.

Ignore single occurrence.

Record event in log book.

Mains failed /restored

Power supply Failure is detected whenthe ADC output from therectifier is equal to or lessthan 105.

Check mains and fuse.Replace PSU if necessary.This should normally equal to60V to get a restoredmessage.

Mains too high Power supply The ADC value is too high. Check the PSU values in the[Test Eng] menu. ReplacePSU if necessary.Mains too low Power supply Mains supply is too low.

Master alarm

oc

orsc

Restored

Power supply No end-of-line unit seen.

ADC value is greater than92orADC value is less than 37

ADC value is 74

Check the wiring to themaster alarm circuits. EnsureEOL is connected inside thecontrol panel if master alarmcircuits are not used.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


Master alarmenabled/disabled


The master alarm has beenenabled or disabledautomatically or manually.

If necessary, manually enableor disable the master alarmusing the [Control] menu.

Master alarmrestored

Power supply Master alarm fault cleared.The ADC value should be74.

Masterpolling/notpolling atcard x

MCC / MCB PC or SRI (service requestinterface) is nothandshaking with thecontrol panel

Check the wiring

Master SectorActioned


Master sector has beenswitched ON/OFF.

-

Master SectorEnabled/Disabled


Master sector has beenenabled or disabledmanually or automatically.

If necessary manually enableor disable the master sector.

Memory corruptnumber x loop y

Device FLASH checksum failure Replace the device

Messagediscarded

TBA TBA TBA

Neighbour ACKFailed at card n

- Repeated address Check domain addresses areunique

Neighbour ACKInvalid atcard n

TBA TBA TBA

Networkinitialised atCard x

Network Card Successful network mapwith polled panels.

-

Network Insecure/ Secure atCard x

Network Card There are 3 missing repliesin a row on End-2 of thecontroller.

Check the wiring.Check the error rate.

Network startingat Card x

Network Card Communication startingwith other connectedpanels.

-

Network wiringfault at card x

Network Card Wiring is presumed to beoc betweenpanel n and panel n.

Check the wiring.

New address n atcard x

MCC / MCBNetwork Card

The new address set hasbeen read.

-

New domainaddress n atCard x

Network Card The new address set beenread at the particular card.

-

NMI’s missed atcard x

Loop ProcessorCard

Software error. Software errors will activatea system reset.




Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


No periodicinterrupts atcard x

Any Card Problem with software, thewatchdog will operate theMCC / MCB (main controlcard/board).

Software error will activate asystem reset.

Ignore single occurrence.Record event in log book.

No responsenumber x loop y

Loop ProcessorCard

There is no communicationwith repeat or mimic panelsoftware.

Power-up the repeat or mimicpanel.

No room on NVMcard

Backplane (withmemory)

User attempts to backup orsave to an NVM that doesnot have enough free space

If there is no memory leftthen the card 14 located onBackplane needs to beinitialised

Node doubleallocated atcard x

Network Card Two network cards havesame address.

Keep address unique.

Node found atCard x

Network Card Another panel on thenetwork acknowledged.

-

Nodelost/restored atCard x

Network Card There have been 15missing replies fromanother panel.

Check the wiring or checkand reset the panel Networkcard to restore.

Not enough RAMat card x

Any Card Not enough memory. Reset the card and ignoresingle occurrence. Ifnecessary replace the card oradd RAM, where applicable.

Nothing found atCard x

Loop ProcessorCard

No devices found on End 1or End 2.

Check wiring of loop circuit.

NVM initialised Memory (NVM)-Backplane

Memory available verified. -

NVM is not writeprotected

Memory (NVM)-Backplane

Read and write is possibleto the memory card.

Enable protect if requiredusing the [set up] menu.

NVM is read only Backplane (withmemory)

User attempts to write to ahardware write protectedNVM card

Remove the hardware writeprotect before writing

Panel in/out ofcommissioningmode


Commissioning modeswitched ON/OFF.

To manually switchcommissioning mode use the[Test/Eng] menu.

Panel Label Setup


Panel label has been setfrom the menu.

-

Panel powerup MCC / MCB (maincontrol card/board)

Software reset of system orthere has been a manualreset of card 0.

If an automatic reset hasoccurred than check forsystem errors.

Patternnumber x on loopy channel x

Loop ProcessorCard

Sensor has detected aninteresting event egfire/fault.

-

Pointercorrupted atCard x





Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


Pointer missingat card x

Any Card Software error Software errors will cause asystem reset.

Card fault should be ignoredfor single occurrence.

Record the event in logbook.

Prefire number xon loop ychannel z

Loop ProcessorCard

Pattern match less than aFire.

-

Printerlost/fitted atcard x number yon loop z

MCC / MCB / DKC/ MRC

The external printer has notbeen seen and is ‘lost’.

Check the connections to theprinter. Also check for paperjam in the printer mechanism.

Program memorycorrupted atcard x

Any Card Checksum failure onFLASH at midnight.

Clear and ignore singleoccurrence. Record in logbook.

Program notrunning atCard x

Any Card Problem with software, thewatchdog will operate theMCC / MCB (main controlcard/board).

Software errors will activatean automatic system reset.

Ignore for single occurrence.

Record event in log book.

Program runawayat card x

Any Card CPU has crashed. Clear and ignore singleoccurrence. Record in logbook.

Q buffer full atcard x



Q buffer numberFailed at card x



Recover failedat Card x

Loop ProcessorCard

Loop does not match whatis on NVM card.

Check and confirm/correctthe difference and thenbackup.

Recoversucceeded atcard x

Loop ProcessorCard

Successful recovery after aprevious failure.

-

Replaced DeviceWrong typenumber x on loopy

Loop ProcessorCard

Device is a different type. Check and confirminstallation of correct typeand reallocate. Back up tomemory.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


SAFE Address notSet up number xon loop y

Loop Processor Card The replaced device is notSAFE addressed. Thedevice previously installedin the location was SAFEaddressed.

Set up the SAFE address.

Scan errornumber x atcard y

Loop ProcessorCard

Invalid universal scanreply.

Check loop length andscreening

Sector actioned Loop ProcessorCard

Sector is switchedON/OFF.

-

Sector Enabled/Disabled at cardx

Loop ProcessorCard

The sector(s) has beenenabled or disabledautomatically or manually.

If necessary , manuallyenable/disable the sectorusing the [Control] menu.

Sensor out ofspecificationnumber x on Loopy Channel z

Loop ProcessorCard

Fault pattern has beenmatched.

Check and replace the sensorif necessary.

Shared memoryhardware isfaulty at Card x

Any Card There is MCC / MCBproblem.

Replace all other cards thanthe MCC/MCB. See if theproblems persists.

Replace MCC / MCB ifnecessary.

Slave DeviceReplacednumber x on loopy

Loop ProcessorCard

Slave type device has beenreplaced.

-

Slave microfailed at Card x

Loop ProcessorCard

Loop driver iswatchdogged by loopprocessor.

Reset and ignore singleoccurrence. Record in logbook.

Software errors Software errors willactivate a systemreset

Software error Software errors will activatea system reset.


Sounder circuitfailed

Device There is a fault with thesounder hardware on theS-cubed or S-Quad.

Replace the device

Sounder circuitRestored

Device The fault on the soundercircuit associated withS-Quad or S-Cubed hasbeen restored.

-

Speech circuithas failed

Device There is a hardware faultpossibly associated withthe voice chip on thespeech S-cubed or S-Quad

Replace the device

Speech circuitRestored

Device The fault on the speechS-Quad and S-Cubed hasbeen restored.

-



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


Spuriousacknowledgmentat card x



Spurious FABNumber x on Loopy

Loop ProcessorCard

Device has FAB butshouldn’t have any.

Ignore single occurrence.Panel will remove theindication.

Stack overflowat card x

Any Card Software error Software errors will activatea system reset

Ignore single occurrence.Record the event in log book

Stack too deepat card x



Strobe circuithas failed

Device The strobe circuit on theS-Quad or S-Cubed devicehas failed.

Replace the device

Strobe circuitrestored

Device The strobe hardware fault,such as internal connection,on the S-cubed or S-Quadhas been restored

-

Sub Faults See exceptions

Superfire numberx on loop ychannel z

Loop ProcessorCard

Pattern match is equal to orgreater than a Fire.

-

Supply totallyFailed


The message does notnormally appear.

-

Switchinginhibited atend 1 at card x

Network Automatic end swappingon the network controllerhas been disabled for testpurpose.

-

System Printerfitted at card xnumber y loop z


An 80 column serial printeris fitted to the panel.

-

System PrinterLost at card xnumber y onloop z

MCC / MCB (Printeroption)

TBA TBA

System Restarted/Started


Link on back planerestored.

-

System stopped MCC / MCB (maincontrol card/board)

Backplane link movedcausing the system to stop.

The link should not benormally accessed.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


Task stuck atcard x



Test set found /removed atCard x

Loop ProcessorCard

Remote allocation unit hasbeen found connected tothe system.

Disconnection of the test setwill bring about a removedmessage.

Too many errorsnumber x on loopy

Device More than 15 errors from adevice in 34 hours.

Check the loop wiring to thedevice.

Too many errorsx at Card y

Network Card Up to 6 consecutivecommunication errors.

Check wiring and cablescreen. There may be faultswith the installation.

Two controllerat Card x

Network There are two networkcontrollers.

One network controller willautomatically shut down.

Two master hasthe same addressatCard x

MCC / MCB / DKC Two PCs have been giventhe same address.

Each PC must have a uniqueaddress.

Unable to claimbuffers atcard x

Any Card System too busy Wait or reset card if stuck,record in log book

Unrecoverable Txfaultnumber x loop y

Loop ProcessorCard

More than 3 consecutivereply errors

Check the device connectionsand replace if necessary.

Warm restart MCC (main controlcard)

The 5V rail has seen a dipactivating the watchdog orthe button has been pressedon MCC/MCB or panelpower reconnected.

-

Warning cleared MCC / MCB (maincontrol card/board)

Warning has beenremoved.

-

Wiring changed -ground break atcard x number yon loop z

Loop ProcessorCard

A test has shown a breakon the 0V line. The test isconducted every minute.

Check wiring of 0V aroundloop.

Wiring changed -short atcard x number yloop z

Loop ProcessorCard

Loop short circuit after theparticular device.

Check wiring and deviceafter indicated device.

Wiring changed -split/closed atCard x number yon loop z

Loop ProcessorCard

No reply received from adevice at End-2 of loop.

Check wiring, there can beother reasons.

Wiring changedpart short atCard x number yon loop z

Loop ProcessorCard

Less than 80 ohms betweenthe +ve and 0V of loopwiring.

Check wiring and deviceafter the partially shorteddevice.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t


Wrong card typeat Card x

Any Card Card in wrong slot. Move the cards to the rightlocation.

Zone enabled /disabled atCard x


The zone has been enabledor disabled automatically ormanually.

If necessary, manually enableor disable the zone using the

[Control] menu.



Ap

pen

dix

B-

Messag

eA

cti

on

Lis

t

Appendix C - Guidelines for standalone systemcommandsThis appendix provides guidance on factors that must be taken into consideration when applying standalone system functions, suchas:

� labels

� sectors (including flag set sectors)

� delay blocks

� time slots and time blocks

� zones

� groups

� voice alarm zones

� command builds

� sounder configuration

� auxiliary relays

Labels

� Labels are given to identify location of areas on a site.

� A previously created label can be modified.

� Where manual call points are being used then each can only have a label of up to 28 characters.

� a 32 character label can be assigned to a:

• device(must have a label having 28 characters if it is an MCP)

• each Input/Output line(must have a label having 28 characters maximum if one or more MCPs are installed on the input line)

• zone

• group

• control panel

Input channel label

� A supervisory input channel label of an interface unit will only be displayed at the control panel of the standalonesystem.

• By adding an * in front of the channel label it will allow the label to appear on all the networked panels.

The networked panels must however be setup to display all events. In this configuration the label will also bedisplayed at a network node and GENT Supervisor in the network.

• When an interface input is operated the standalone system’s (local) control panel buzzer can only be activated

by configuring the input to trigger a command build. In this case the command build should not have actions.

• To activate buzzers of control panels in a network an * must be inserted before the command build label.



Long labels

Long labels having up to 64 characters can be given to devices and command builds. This is achieved by replacing commonly usedwords with token values (special codes). Tokenised labels :When tokens are decoded, a trailing space is automatically added tothe decoded word. Likewise when a label is being tokenised, the word must have a space following it, or be at the end of a line.Therefore a token word cannot be followed with a comma, dash or other such character.

� All tokenised labels are displayed in Upper case.

Banks 0, 1 and 2 show the list of tokens used by the software to reduce the character label to 32 characters or less.

Bank 0General Building Features

AREA ANNEXE BLOCK BUILDING

CORE CORRIDOR DOOR DUCT

ENTRANCE ESCALATOR EXIT EXTENSION

FLAT HALL HOUSE LIFT

LOBBY RISER ROOM ROUTE

STAIRS TOWER UNIT VENTILATION

VOID ZONE

Vertical Location

LEVEL MEZZANINE FLOOR BASEMENT

GROUND FIRST SECOND THIRD

FOURTH CEILING ROOF ATRIUM

Geographic Location

NORTH SOUTH EAST WEST

NEAR OUTSIDE ABOVE UPPER

CENTRE LOWER LEFT RIGHT

FRONT REAR

Building Usage

ACCOMMODATION ADMIN BEDROOM BOILER

CENTRAL CHANGING COMPUTER CONTROL

CUPBOARD ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING EXTERNAL

GALLERY GARAGE GENERAL HOUSING

KITCHEN LAUNDRY LOUNGE OFFICE

PLANT RECEPTION RESTAURANT SERVICE

SERVICES SHOP STAFF STORE

STORES SWITCH SYSTEM TOILET

WORKSHOP WARD WAREHOUSE

Airport Tokens

AIR SIDE ARRIVALS BAGGAGE BRIDGE

BUREAU DE CHANGE CUSTOMS CONCOURSE DEPARTURES

DUTY FREE EXCHANGE GATE HANDLING

IMMIGRATION LANDSIDE LUGGAGE MALL

PASSENGER RETAIL SECURITY STATION

TERMINAL TRANSFER

Medical Tokens

MEDICAL THEATRE X-RAY CLINIC

PATIENTS PHYSIOTHERAPY GERIATRICS PAEDIATRICS

RECORDS HEALTH

Components of the Fire System

SOUNDER DETECTOR OPTICAL IONISATION

HEAT INTERFACE BEAM REPEAT

SPRINKLER



Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

for

sta

nd

alo

ne

syste

m


CHAMBER FOYER SHAFT STAIRCASE

STAIRWELL

Vertical Location

FIFTH SIXTH ATTIC BALCONY

LANDING PASSAGE SUBWAY TUNNEL

Positions

ADJACENT BOTTOM

Building Usage

CATERING COLLEGE CONFERENCE DEPARTMENT

DISPATCH EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT ESCAPE

MANAGER MEETING PACKING PHYSICS

POINT PREPARATION SHOPPING SITTING

STATIONERY SUITE SUPPLY TELEPHONE

TRANSFORMER

Airport Tokens

AIRLINES BONDED CHECK-IN CLORIFIER

CONVEYOR CUL-DE-SAC DOMESTIC FORECOURT

INFORMATION INTERCONNECTOR INTERNATIONAL RECLAIM

SCREENING SECRET SIGN TRAVOLATOR TRUCKING

Medical Tokens

DISPENSARY

Components of the Fire System

ASPIRATING INPUT OUTPUT PRESSURE

SHUTTER


BLOWER CHUTE DOORS HOIST

ROLLER SLUICE

Position

BEHIND BELOW UNDER MIDDLE

Building usage

BISTRO BUSINESS CANTEEN CHILLER

CLASS CLASSROOM CLEANERS DISABLED

ELECTRONICS FACTORY FEMALE LIBRARY

LOCKER MAINTENANCE MOTOR MUSIC

NURSERY PHASE QUIET SEATING

SHOWER STORAGE TENANT VEHICLE

VOLTAGE WALKWAY

Airport token

APRON AUTOWALK BOARDING CABIN

CONNECTOR CRAFT DEPARTURE FLIGHT

STAND TOUCHDOWN



Sectors

� There can be up to 32 sectors per loop

� a sector is a collection of devices on the same loop having a common action.

� a sector that is actioned ON will activate its alarm devices, such as interface outputs, S cubed and alarm sounders.

� a sector can be configured to give one of three signals

• Signal 1 Alert (priority 3)

• Signal 2 Evacuate (priority 2)

• Signal 3 Continuous (priority 1)

� sectors 1-28 operate automatically with ‘Sound Alarms’ and ‘Silence Alarms’ buttons

� a sector (any one of 1-28) that is configured for NO action on ‘Sound Alarms’ button will be silenced on operationof the ‘Reset’ button

� the sectors 29-32 are independent of the ‘Sound Alarms’ button and are primarily used with Fixed Extinguishantinterface product which is not no longer supported. However the sectors 29-30 can be configured to normal sectoroperation.

� sensors, call points and interface inputs may be assigned to more than one sector.

� a loop powered interface is assigned to a sector and consequently the inputs and outputs lines of that interface willbe assigned to the same sector.

� alarm sounders, OHS and interface outputs are restricted to one sector only.

� There can be up to 10 Voice Alarm Zones.

� Voice alarm zone are push button switches on the control panel that can be assigned to Sectors.

� Any normal Sector (1-28) can be assigned to any voice alarm zone (1-10)



Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

for

sta

nd

alo

ne

syste

m

SECTOR

SECTOR FUNCTIONS

32 SECTORSPER LOOP

DELAY

BLOCK

COMMAND

BUILD

TRIGGER

ACTION

ACTION

ASSIGN

NOTE : SECTORS 29 TO

DELAYBLOCK

ACTION

COMMANDBUILD

32 ARE FORSPECIAL USE

SECTORThat has justcome into fire

SIGNAL

1

2

SIGNAL

3

SIGNAL

ALL

SIGNALS

OFF

SIGNAL

1

2

SIGNAL

3

SIGNAL

ALLSIGNALS

OFF

SIGNAL

1

2

SIGNAL

3

SIGNAL

ALL

SIGNALS

OFF

ACTION

ACTION

DEVICES

& I/O LINES

WITHIN A

SECTOR *

DEFAULT: SIGNAL-1 = ALERT

SIGNAL-2 = EVACUATE

SIGNAL-3 = CONTINUAL

I/O LINES MAY BE SECTORED INDIVIDUALLYONLY FOR STANDARD MAINS POWERED INTERFACE UNITS

AND NOT FOR LOOP POWERED INTERFACE UNITS

*

SECTOR

SETUP THE SECTORTO DE-ENERGIZE ON

SILENCE ALARMS

OR RESETBUTTON

NOTE : A SECTOR CAN ONLY ACTION OTHER LINKS

IF THE FIRE IS AT A DEVICE ASSIGNED TO THAT SECTOR.

ASSIGN

ONOFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ONOFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ONOFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

MASTERSECTOR

ASSIGN

VOICE ALARMZONES

NOTE: Voice alarm zones are push buttoncontrols on the main panel.

AUX

RELAYS

ACTION

Integral sounder operation

� Integral sounder sector operation (also called flag set sector) can be configured using the menu commands

[SetUp]-> [Sector] -> [Sounder] -> [On].

A sector configured for integral sounder operation will in the event of a fire at an optical heat sensor sounder (OHS) device willoperate ONLY the local sounder (of the OHS).

Default fire plan

� The fire plan on power up is known as ‘one out all out’. This is when sector 1 is assigned with all devices of thesystem. A fire will activate evacuate (signal 2) on all interface outputs and alarm sounders.

� Fixed extinguishant inputs / outputs are automatically assigned to sector 29. Note the Fixed extinguishing interfaceunit is no longer a part of the product range.

To assign a default fire plan

� To manually configure the default fire plan using the set up menu:

• Assign all device and IO lines to sector 1

• and then action all sectors (except sectors 29-32) on all sectors to signal 2.

To remove the default fire plan.

� If the system is not intended to operate with the default ‘Fire Plan’, then do exactly the same as making the default

fire plan, but this time replace the [Assign] with [Remove]. Also remove IO lines.

� monitored line is a circuit of MCPs off a sensor, not allowed for the UK , this must be removed

� all sensors, call points, sounders and interface lines are now completely separate from each other

� also [Deaction] all sectors on all sectors. This will remove any configured sector actions

� a site specific ‘Fire Plan’ can now be set up by assigning devices within common initiation areas to sectors and thenactioning them together to form the required ‘Fire Plan’.

Fail safe fire plan

� It is advisable to build a fail safe mechanism when sectoring. If for any reason certain sector assignment has beenlost due to system power down and subsequent NVM recovery conflicts on system power up, the sounders will stilloperate in the event of a fire.

� the fail safe mechanism will involve leaving Sector 1 on each loop free from any device assignment, as any devicesthat lose their sector assignment will default to Sector 1.

� the following action will give an evacuate tone to any alarm sounders that have defaulted to Sector 1:

• Action all sectors (except sectors 29-32) on sector 1to signal 2

• Action sector 1 on all sectors (except Sector 1 and Sectors 29-32) to signal 2

Site specific fire plan

� A site specific fire plan can be created by configuring sectors.



SECTOR X

FLAG SETON

FLAGSET OFFDEFAULT

INTEGRALSOUNDER - ON

INTEGRALSOUNDEROFF(DEFAULT)

OHS

H

MCP

INTERFACE

SECTOR XOPERATION

FIREOHS

H

MCP

INTERFACE

SECTOR X

FIRE

DELAYBLOCK

COMMANDBUILD

ACTION

ACTIONSECTOR

This action is only applicableif the was from afire nonOHS sensor

1) The will operate normally.

2) The will operate normally whenactioned by another sector.

sector x

sector x

Setup

ONLY LOCALALARM SOUNDS

NOTE: OTHER OPTICAL HEAT SOUNDERSIN AN `INTEGRAL SOUNDER SECTOR'OPERATE IN A SIMILAR MANNER

INTEGRAL SOUNDER SECTOR FUNCTIONS

ACTION

Delay Blocks

� There can be up to 16 delay blocks per panel

� each delay block can provide a delay of between 4 seconds to 10 minutes (in 4 second increments) before starting adesired action

� a delay block can action:

• sectors

• delay blocks

� a delay block may be actioned by:

• sectored fire event

• command build

• delay blocks

� if the required delay is beyond 10 minutes. This can be achieved by a delay block actioning another delay blockbefore the required action is taken

� If Delay Blocks are linked to produce a delay of longer than 10 minutes, then the panel will no longer meet therequirements of EN54: part 2:1997.

� where a delay block is actioned by a command build, a different delay time is set up (within the command buildentry line).



Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

for

sta

nd

alo

ne

syste

m

COMMAND

BUILD

DELAY BLOCK FUNCTIONS

SECTORS SECTORS

10 MINSMAX

DELAY

BLOCK

10 MINSMAX

ANOTHER

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

16 DELAYBLOCKS

PER-PANEL

DELAY

BLOCK

ACTION

SIGNAL

1

2

SIGNAL

3

SIGNAL

ALLSIGNALS

OFF

ACTION

SET UP

NOTE : THIS CONFIGURATION IS POSSIBLE

A delay block

actioned from a

command build can

have a separate

delay of up to

10 minutes

NO

ACTION

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

NOTE: If no sectors are set up to be actioned

but there is a signal number set up and the

original trigger was from a sector, then

when the delay times out that sector will

be actioned.

Time slots and time blocks

Time slots

A time slot must be linked with a time block. It is the time block that perform actions on the system.

� Timeslots do not process when the panel is in a fire condition.

� a time slot can be:

• triggered automatically

• switched ON / OFF manually

• or switched ON / OFF by Command build

� it performs an action immediately or after a delay of 0 to 24 hours.

� There can be up to 16 time slots per panel

� each time slot has to be given an Enable time and a Disable time

� each time slot must be ANDed / ORed to the days of week, (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat Sun).

� when a time slot is ANDed with selected days, it will only operate on the selected days

� when a time slot is ORed with selected days, it will be enabled during selected times and will remain throughout thedays selected

Time blocks

A time block is used to perform periodic enable disable action on the system.

� There are 0 - 15 time blocks per panel

� the time block 0 is always in the enable state and is the default for all sensors

� a time block can be linked to one or more time slots

� when a time slot is enabled the time block it is linked to is also enabled

� a sensor or Interface input can only be assigned to one time block

� when a time block is in an enable state:

• any sensor(s) linked to it will operate in the enable state that has been set up

• any command build linked to it is triggered

� when a time block is in a disabled state any zone tasks linked to it are also disabled.



TIMESLOTS & TIMEBLOCKS FUNCTIONS

COMMANDBUILD

ENABLE TIME

DISABLE TIME

08:00

17:00

TIMESLOT 1ACTION

DAYS:

MON TUE WED

THU FRI SAT SUN

AND

(BOTH)

OR

(EITHER)

DELAYED BY 0 - 24 hrs

TIME

DAYS SETUPAND/OR

TIMEBLOCK 1

TIMESLOT 1

TIMESLOT 2

TIMESLOT 3

TIMESLOT 4

TIMESLOT 16

SETUP

*

ENABLE STATE

DISABLE STATE

0

15

OUTSTATION NO. = "X"SETUP

ENABLE STATE

DISABLE STATE

8

13

OUTSTATION NO. = "X"SETUP

TRIGGER

MAX. 16 PER PANEL MAX. 15 PER PANEL

ENABLE / DISABLE TIMESLOT

COMMAND BUILD NO. "Y"

SETUPZone

A COMMAND BUILD LINKED

TO A TIMEBLOCK WILL BE TRIGGERED

WHEN THE TIMEBLOCK IS ENABLED

AND REVERSED WHEN THE TIMEBLOCK

IS DISABLED.

NOTE: A Timeblock may contain any multiple Timeslots.A Timeslot may be linked to any number of Timeblocks.

The default is for all the outstations to be in Time block 0.A Timeblock is enabled if any one of the Timeslots withinit is in the enable state.

Zones

� A zone has a collection of trigger devices that arelocated in the same general area. It may be used forone or all three of the following:

• for illumination of zonal fire lamps on Main panelor Zonal mimic panel

• for common disablement purposes

� There can be up to 128 Zones per A2 / 64 Zones perA4 zonal mimic panel.

� Zones are used to provide local indication of fire at themain panel and to send fire messages to zonal mimicand loop repeat panels and repeat indicator panels offmain panel.

• integral zonal indicators can be configured to givesteady / flashing indication of 1st zone in fire

� Devices from any loop may be assigned to the samezone.

� A device may only be assigned to one zone.

� Input/output lines of an interface can not be assignedindividually to zones. The interface lines can only beassigned collectively to a zone.

Groups

� There can be up to 128 groups

� all devices default to Group 1

� all local controller events are in group 0, ie faults,warning, silence alarms and reset.

�All MCC / MCB / LCC (local controller) events are inGroup 0, ie FAULTS, WARNING, SILENCE ALARMS andRESET etc.



Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

for

sta

nd

alo

ne

syste

m

LOOP1

ZONE FUNCTIONS

OHS

INTERFACE

MCP

H

LOOP2

OHS

INTERFACE

MCP

DISABLE ZONE Z

ZONE E ENABLE

NOTE: AN OUTSTATION CAN ONLYBE ASSIGNED TO ONE ZONE

ZONE 1

ZONAL MIMIC PANEL

ZONE 4

OUTSTATIONSASSIGNED TOZONE 4

OUTSTATIONSASSIGNED TOZONE 4

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE 5

ZONE X

ZONE INDICATORS ON THE PANEL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 32

Zones

Flashing

On

OffTest/Eng

Zone Tasks

� There can be up to 128 Zones of which the first 64 are for standalone system and remaining zones for network use.The number of Zones for standalone system can be re-configured via the commissioning tool.

� a zone is a collection of devices, sharing a common label

� an device can only be assigned to one zone

� a Zone task may be used to control the display of fire messages, to provide:

• Common zone label only (this is the default).

• label of first device in fire

• or all individual device labels.

� a zone can provide 3-level sensing:

• Prefires

• Fires

• Superfires

� sensors can be configured to provide coincidence operation using a combination of all 3 levels if required

� up to 8 permutations of fire detection (Zone tasks) may be configured per zone

� a zone task can be made to trigger a command build or a range of command builds, (this is done in the zone set upmenu)

� the same command build can be triggered by different tasks within a zone

� disabling a zone will disable the sensors within that Zone

� disabling a zone via a time block disables the tasks performed by the zone.

� all devices default to zone 1



OUTSTATION IN ONE ZONE ONLY

ALL DEVICES THATGO INTO FIREWILL TAKE THISROUTE

DEVICES ASSIGNEDTO ZONE 'A'

DEVICES ASSIGNEDTO ZONE'A'

HEAT DET.

SMOKE DET.

MCP

I/O

LOOP 1

HEAT DET.

SMOKE DET.

MCP

I/O

LOOP 2

via TEST/ENG menu

TOTAL OF 128ZONESPER PANEL

ZONE'A'

DEFAULT

DISPLAY ALLINDIVIDUALDEVICE LABELS

DISPLAYFIRSTDEVICE LABEL

DISPLAYCOMMON ZONELABELS ONLY

TO ALL REPEATSON LOCAL PANEL

TASK NUMBER 1

w SENSOR x PRE FIRE y FIRE z SUPER FIRE

TIMEBLOCK

OUTPUT TRIGGERTO COMMAND BUILD 'X'








No

te:E

ach

ou

tpu

tca

ntr

igg

er

on

eco

mm

an

db

uild

TASK NUMBER 2


TASK NUMBER 3


TASK NUMBER 4


TASK NUMBER 5


TASK NUMBER 6


TASK NUMBER 7


TASK NUMBER 8


Command Builds

� Where possible use sectored action instead ofcommand build action.

� There can be up to 255 command builds per panel.

� a command build can only be set up with one trigger(can be a range)

� a command build can be triggered:

• for reversible action (automatic deaction onremoval of trigger)

• or non-reversible action, (deactioned by anothercommand build for a non-fire trigger or reset for afire Trigger).

� the command build trigger for zone tasks reside underthe zone menu.

� command builds that are triggered through a sector fireevent will deaction on fire reset. This is independent ofwhether the sector is configured to deaction on silencealarms.

� command builds that are configured for turn Offactions have no reverse action to turn On again,another command build or manual action is required.

� command builds can be used under fire and non fireconditions to carry out pre-configured actions built upfrom the Control menu.

� a command build can only be set up to perform oneaction (can be a range), any split range would require asecond command build.

� each command build can be given a 40 character labelto be displayed and/or printed when triggered. If nolabel is given then nothing will be displayed

� if a label is given, the local buzzer will operate for 1minute when the command build is active.

� command builds are logged with an On/Off time, this

information can be viewed by selecting [info] ->

[Event]-> [Supervis]-> [Log] and if still On via

[Info]-> [Event]-> [Supervis]-> [Active], this is onlypossible if a label has been given to the CommandBuild

� when speed of operation is required the lowest numbercommand builds should be used as these are processedfirst

� if a digital output line is to be actioned by a commandbuild, the I/O line should not be assigned to a sector asit may deaction when the silence alarms is pressedregardless of the command build still being active

� a fire condition takes priority over a command build

� Take great care not to action a digitaloutput to an input line, as this will effectively disablethe input.



Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

for

sta

nd

alo

ne

syste

m

TRIGGER

TRIGGER

TRIGGER

TRIGGER

COMMANDBUILD

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

ACTION

START MASTER ALARM

STOP MASTER ALARMS

NO ACTION

ENABLE

DISABLE

SECTOR

MASTER SECTOR

AUX RELAY

PRINTER

DIGITAL

TIME SLOT OVERRIDE

DELAY BLOCK

PAUSE SOUNDERS

RESET

LOCAL BUILD

1 TO 255

DIFFERENT

NOTE: Normally thebuild reverse actions

is selected.

MENU

1ST

2ND

REV OR NOT-REV

REV OR NOT-REV

REV OR NOT-REV

REV OR NOT-REV

REV OR NOT-REV

REV OR NOT-REV

REV OR NOT-REV

REV OR NOT-REV

REV OR NOT-REV

REVERSIBLE

NOT-REVERSIBLE

PAS

SW

OR

DLE

VE

LS

(CLEAR)

COMMAND BUILD FUNCTIONS

REV OR NOT-REV

COMMANDBUILD

TIMEBLOCK

INPUT LINE

I / O INTERFACE

SECTOR

That has just

come into fire

NONE

(CLEAR)

ZONE

ON

LYO

NE

AC

TIO

NFR

OM

EA

CH

CO

MM

AN

DB

UIL

D

'LABEL' OR NUMBER

UP TO 40 CHARACTERS

TASK

ONLY

ONEO

FTHE

SETR

IGGE

RSFO

REA

CHCO

MMAN

DBU

ILD

SILENCE

REV OR NOT-REV

SOUND

REV OR NOT-REV

DELAY 0 TO 24 HOURS

ACTION (INPUT)

DELAY 0 TO 30 SEC

FROM ANOTHER ZONE

TRIGGER

CHANNELIntegralsounder

TRIGGER

SOUNDERINTEGRALSOUNDER IN OHS

ACTION

REV OR NOT-REV

VERIFY

ACTION

REV OR NOT-REV

TONE/ MESSAGE

AUX MESSAGE

ALARM MESSAGE

Sound

Silence

Reset

ASSIGN

ASSIGN

ASSIGN

Sound

MASTERSECTOR

TRIGGER

Sounders Configuration

� The standard alarm sounders of each standalone system can be configured for three sound output signals.

� every 250mS over a 2 second time the sound output can be altered to high, low or off tone.

� sound signal configuration can be altered by modifying the FAB-SAB pairs by pressing the button Menu On/Off

to select [Set-Up] -> <etc-> -> [Modify]-> <etc> -> [Signal n] -> [Sounder] -> [Enter] and enter the FAB/SAB

for signal n and press enter.

FABs & SABs

The FAB (first action byte) determines tone and On/Off control while the SAB (second action byte) determines the action to beperformed on the output.

Number FAB action SAB action

0 no output Turns Off selected Outputs

1 - 10mS pulse on Selected Outputs

2 frequency tone 40mS pulse on Selected Outputs


4 On/Off control.(Onbeing low frequency)

160mS pulse on Selected Outputs


6 high frequency tone 350mS pulse on Selected Outputs




A - 980mS pulse on Selected Outputs

B - 1.2S pulse on Selected Outputs

C - 1.4S pulse on Selected Outputs

D - 1.6S pulse on Selected Outputs

E 1.9S pulse on Selected Outputs

F Turn on Selected Outputs

Factory Default FABs SABsTime in seconds

0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.25 1.5 1.75

Signal 3 (Continuous)

Output turns on Low frequency sound continuousevery 0.5 seconds.

4F 00 4F 00 4F 00 4F 00

Signal 2 (Evacuate)

First output turns on Low frequency soundcontinuously, then every half second the Highfrequency output is pulsed for 250mS.

4F 25 4F 25 4F 25 4F 25

Signal 1 (Alert)

Pulses high frequency for 250mS every half second.

65 00 65 00 65 00 65 00



Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

for

sta

nd

alo

ne

syste

m

S3

Mark I

An S3 device can operate in Tone or Voice mode, dependent on type.

All S3 in a system can share a common volume setting from a range between 16% to 100% sound output.

All S3 in a system can share a common soft start facility, if set the sound output will increment the volume every 0.25s from a definedstart level to maximum output.

Setting selectable using the commissioning tool:

S3 operating in tone mode allows selection from a range of low and high frequency tones that are outputted according to FAB/SABsettings, see sounders configurations section.

S3 set for Voice mode operation allows selection from a range of tones and messages that span over 10 seconds duration. Thetones and messages are those held in respective S3 device.



Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

for

sta

nd

alo

ne

syste

m

Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

for

sta

nd

alo

ne

syste

m

Voice

The Sounder S providessound output over a durationas defined by the FAB/SABheld at the control panel

3

The Speech only Sprovides voice messagewith tone output.

3

If actioned:Signal 1 will provide strobe output at 0.5HzSignals 2 or Signal 3 will provide strobe output at 1Hz.

Standard ToneTone 1Tone 2

““

Tone 7


““

Tone 15

Message 1Message 2

““

Message 7


““

Tone 15

Attention tone Speech Message

Std tone or Tone n

10 seconds period

MessageTone + Message

Tone onlyTone

The sequence repeated until Sounder is silenced

FAB/SAB is output, see Soundersconfiguration held at the control panel

The Strobe S output isdefined by what signalis being actioned on the S .

3

3

Sounder

Strobe

S-Cubed Mark II and S-Quad

Speech functionThe new Mark II S-Cubed or S-Quad Speech sounder function isprovided by stored messages on a flash memory chip within theassembly. The standard flash memory can hold up to 20 secondsof audio and additionally it holds local complex attention tones,such as the bell and DIN signals. Each signal output from anS-Cubed or S-Quad Speech device consists of an attention tonefollowed by a message. The attention tone can be a localcomplex tone or a panel tone, such as the standard 'nee naw'

sound.

Strobe functionIn the event of a fire the appropriate S-Cubed or S-Quad devicein the system will output alarm signals according to the sitespecific configuration and these can be either signal 1, 2 or 3alarm:

� every 2s with signal 1

� every 1 second with signal 2

� every 1 second with signal 3

However the operation of the strobe with the signals 1, 2 and 3can be changed at the commissioning stage. The strobe issynchronised with S-Cubed and S-Quad strobes installed in thesame system.

� The Disability Act 1995 recommends visualalarms, like S-Cubed and S-Quad, are installed inprotected premises to warn occupants who are hard ofhearing.

Sounder functionA new Mark II S-Cubed or S-Quad sounder can operate in turbomode if configured during commissioning to provide further 3dBoutput. The sound outputs are based on the settings of the FABsand SABs at the panel that gives changing levels over 2 secondsduration in 8 time slots. The standard outputs are synchronisedwith the 34000 sounders and other S-Cubed or S-Quad devicesinstalled in the same system.

The volume of the sound output can be individually set at thedevice, note that the sound level should not be set lower than65dBA at 1m for standards compliance. The system preventsadjustment of volume down to zero. Another feature that can beconfigured is the soft start that ramps the sound volume graduallyto the maximum level set at the device.

Turbo and Non Turbo ModesThe S-Cubed or S-Quad sounders can output in turbo and/or innon turbo modes. When the panel commands a low or high toneoutput at S-Cubed or S-Quad, if configured duringcommissioning, the S-Cubed or S-Quad sounder will output turboand/or non turbo tones. The high and low FAB mappings areused to change the tone output of the S-Cubed or S-Quadsounder. The turbo mode outputs a waveform with a basicfrequency that is the same frequency as the resonant frequencyof the S-Cubed or S-Quad piezo. The non turbo mode outputsmodulated turbo waveform.



Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

Turbo rich low tone

Turbo rich high tone

Turbo low tone

Turbo low tone - high output

Turbo square wave

Turbo high tone

Non-Turbo rich low tone

Non-Turbo rich high tone

Non-Turbo low tone (Default)

Non-Turbo low tone - high output

Non-Turbo square wave

Non-Turbo high tone (Default)

Wa

ve

form

sw

ith

ba

sic

fre

qu

en

cy

sa

me

as

reso

na

ntfr

eq

ue

ncy

ofp

iezo

Mo

du

late

dve

rsio

no

ftu

rbo

wa

ve

form

Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

for

sta

nd

alo

ne

syste

m

Programmable period

normally set at 10 seconds

can be configured up to 60 seconds

Programmable

Pre-speech silence

Attention tone Speech Message

Standard

or Complex

tone Message n

Programmable

Post-speech silence

It is possible to reprogram factory set speech messages

Auxiliary Relays

The two auxiliary relays in the control panel are defaulted tooperate on a sectored fire event aux relay 1 and Fault event auxrelay 2.

� the auxiliary relays can be configured fornormally-open or normally-closed operation.

� the relays may be configured to be operated with:

• a Fault

• a Warning

• any combination of Sectored Fire events

• or any of the above combination

� It is possible to delay the operation of each relay by up

to 10 minutes after the first FIRE event. The accuracyof the delay is 0 - 4 seconds.

� The relay will operate immediately for fault andwarning events.



Ap

pen

dix

C-

Gu

idelin

es

for

sta

nd

alo

ne

syste

m

Appendix D - Guidelines for Networked systemcommandsThese functions apply to networked systems. See also guidelines for standalone system.

�For information on Command build actions across a network, see Appendix C.When commissioning a network of control panels, ensure the software version is same across all the panels. This isalso applicable when an existing network is to be installed with additional panels.

Master Sectors

� There can be up to a maximum of 64 Master Sectors per panel

� a total of 255 master sectors per network system

� they are therefore a collection of:

• Sectors

• Delayblocks

• Master Alarms

• and Aux Relays from one or more Systems.

� they provide global alarm actions across a network of control panels



Ap

pen

dix

D-

Gu

idelin

es

for

Netw

ork

ed

syste

m

MASTER SECTOR FUNCTIONS

PANEL 1 NETWORK PANEL 2

SIGNAL2

ON

O F F

ON

O F F

ON O

FF

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL3

ALLSIGNALS

OFF

SIGNAL2

ON

O F F

ON

O F F

ON O

FF

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL3

ALLSIGNALS

OFF

SECTORthat hasjust goneinto fire

SECTORthat hasjust goneinto fire

COMMANDBUILD

MASTERSECTOR 1

255 PERNETWORK

64 PERPANEL

MASTERSECTOR 2 SECTOR

MASTERALARM

AUXRELAY

COMMANDBUILD

SECTOR

COMMANDBUILD

ASSIGN

ASSIGN

ASSIGN

ASSIGN

ASSIGN

TRIGGER

ASSIGN

ASSIGN

ACTION

DELAYBLOCK

ASSIGN

Guidelines

� Fire input sectors must only be assigned to one Master Sector.

� Output Sectors can be assigned to more than one Master Sector.

� Master Sectors can be actioned by a Sectored Fire Event.

� a triggered master sector can action (one or any combination of):

• Sector

• another Master Sector

• Command Build (not locally)

• Delay Blocks

• Master Alarms

• or Auxiliary Relays.

� If a Sector assigned to a Master Sector has a Fire Event, the Master Sector will not perform any local actions on thePanel in alarm.

� If a Command Build actions a Master Sector, the actions will be performed on other panels, but Command Buildswill not be triggered.

� A Master Sector must have something assigned to it before any Master Sector action links can be made to it.

� Master Sector Fire Event actions on other Panels can be stopped by global Silence Alarms .



Ap

pen

dix

D-

Gu

idelin

es

for

Netw

ork

ed

syste

m

Master Groups

� The verify control button that is applicable for EN panels only can operate globally, like the Sound alarm,Silence alarm and Reset buttons.

� There can be up to a maximum of 8 Master Groups per network.

� These are a collection of Groups used for:

• Selective fire and non fire event message routing within a Control Panel or around a Network of Panels

• and for routing Global Controls ‘Silence Alarms, Sound Alarms and/or Reset’ to designated Control Panels on aNetwork.

� Messages can be displayed or printed on Control Panels or Repeat Panels. Messages are routed on a Card by Cardbasis, ie:card 0 = Panel LCDcard 15 = Panel Printercards 1-8 = Repeats and Mimics (Loops 1-8)

• Each Card can be configured to display/print All Events (default) or just Fire Events. Repeat Panels on thesame loop will always give the same information.

� Once message passing has been setup for a global repeat or mimic indication, the local panel will also haveto have reset messages routed also any other groups than 0 will have to be routed.

� Groups within different Control Panels can be assigned to the same Master Group.

� Global controls can be configured to output/input or both.

� Messages and controls within a standalone system do not require any setting up.The Group 0 contains all panel events and fire resets and therefore must always be assigned to a Master Group.



Ap

pen

dix

D-

Gu

idelin

es

for

Netw

ork

ed

syste

m

MASTER GROUP FUNCTIONS

MASTER GROUP 1

MASTER GROUP 2

MASTER GROUP 3

MASTER GROUP 4

MASTER GROUP 5

MASTER GROUP 6

MASTER GROUP 7

MASTER GROUP 8

RESET

SILENCEALARMS

BOTH

LCCCARD 0

RESETINPUT

LINK

BOTH SILENCEALARMS

OUTPUT

Appendix E - CardsThis section contain copies of instructions leaflet supplied witheach card.



Ap

pen

dix

E-

Card

s

This page has been intentionally left blank.



Ap

pen

dix

E-

Card

s

This leaflet covers the Main Control(ler) Card(VIG-MCC-24) which is designed for installation inVIG1-24 and VIG1-72 Vigilon panels.

Technical data

Overall size 157mm height x 100mm width

Weight 96g (approximate)

Lithium Battery CR2032 3V cell.

Replace the battery only withthe same or equivalent type.Dispose of all used batteriesaccording to themanufacturer’s instructions.

Operatingtemperature

0�C to 45�C

Storagetemperature

-10�C to 55�C

Relative humidity(non condensing)

up to 90%

Battery connection

The MCC has a battery insulation sleeve or diskthat must be removed before the card is fitted in thebackplane.

� Once the battery insulation sleeve ordisk is removed from the MCC, the card MUSTNOT be placed on a metal surface as this mayresult in damage to the components on the card.

Backplane

The MCC card must be installed in the correctlocation in the backplane.

� An IO Card is not required for the connectionof DKC and Commissioning tool. The DKC ribboncables now connects to P2 and P4 on the MCC and theCommissioning tool connect to the USB port on MCC.

� When handling the card always useanti-static work procedures.

� Always ensure the panel is completelypowered down before removal or fitting of cardsinto the backplane. Power down the battery supplybefore the mains supply. The power up should bedone in a reverse order.

4188-906.01_12-06_new MCC 1

Data and Installation

Main Control Card(VIG-MCC-24)

by Honeywell

BATT1

Lithium battery + side up

Remove insulation sleeve ordisk before installing the card

SW1

USB portto acceptcommissioningtool connection

P2 socket to accept a20-way ribboncable from the DKC

P4 socket to accept a40-way ribboncable from the DKC

MCC card fits into the Backplaneslot marked P1 (MCC/LCC)

ResetSwitch

Chip2211-143V4.37

Master Controller Card (MCC)to be fitted to socketP1 CARD 0 on backplane

Secure the two ribboncables (at the fold) under the clamplocated on the backplane40 way ribbon

20 way ribbon

Card guides

Backplane

Main Controller Card or

Local Controller Card (SUPPLIED)

Network or IO Card (Optional)

Loop Processor Card (SUPPLIED)

or RS232


(Option)


(Option)


(Option)

Network or RS232 or

Loop Card#

Network or RS232 or

Loop Card#

# for VIG1-72 only

P1 CARD 0

P2 CARD15

P3 CARD 1

P4 CARD 2

P5 CARD 3

P6 CARD 4

P7 CARD 5

P8 CARD 6

Backplane

Use the USB port onthe MCC to connect tothe Commissioning tool.


Installation MCC

Gent by Honeywell reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and make changes to the content hereof withoutobligation to notify any person of such revisions of changes.

Hamilton Industrial Park, Waterside Road, Leicester LE5 1TN, UK Website: www.gent.co.uk

Telephone: +44 (0) 116 246 2000 Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

2 4188-906.01_12/06_new MCC

by Honeywell

At the end of their useful life, the packaging,product and batteries should be disposed ofvia a suitable recycling centre and inaccordance with national or local legislation.

Do not dispose of with your normal household waste.Do not burn.

WEEE Directive:At the end of their useful life, the packaging,product and batteries should bedisposed of via a suitable recycling centre.

This leaflet covers a range of Main Control(ler)Card (MCC) options for BS version 3/3+ controlpanels and terminal nodes. Each MCC is suppliedwith a number of chips having part numbers2211-xxx, see chart overleaf. The appropriate chipmust be fitted to the card before card installation.Card options:

� VIG-MCC-BS-NOD-UPG, 34K-MCC-UPGR,VIG-MCC-V3+, VIG-MCC-3400 andVIG-MCC-3500-NODE.

Chip 2211-xxx

� Fit the correct chip 2211-xxx in the MCC for thetype of panel or node, see chart overleaf.

Battery connection

The MCC has a battery sleeve that must beremoved before the MCC card is installed into thebackplane.

� Once the battery sleeve is removed fromthe MCC, the card MUST NOT be placed on a metalsurface as this may result in damage to thecomponents on the card.

Technical data

Overall size 157mm height x 100mmwidth



Replace the battery onlywith the same or equivalenttype. Dispose of all usedbatteries according to themanufacturer’s instructions.


0�C to 45�C

Storage temperature -10�C to 55�C


up to 90%

Backplane

The MCC card must be installed in the correctlocation on the appropriate backplane.

4188-860 issue 1_01/06_MCC BS 1

Data and Installation instructions

Main Control Cards(BS - version 3 / 3+ panels or nodes)

by Honeywell

BATT1


Remove sleeve beforeinstalling the card

SW1

USB port forfuture use

P2 for future useP4 to accept a40-way ribboncable from the DKC

MCC card socket fitsinto the Backplane slot for (LCC)

ResetSwitch

Part number2211-xxx

40 WAY

RIBBON

CABLE

20 WAY

RIBBON

CABLE

MAIN CONTROL CARD(Slot or Card 0)

INPUT OUTPUT CARD(Slot or Card 15)

RAM (Memory) CARD(Slot or Card 3)

LOOP PROCESSOR CARDloop 1(Slot or Card 1)

LOOP PROCESSORCARD Loop 2 optional(Slot or Card 2)

NETWORKCARD

(Slot or Card 13)

SPARE

SLOT

IO CARD(Slot orCard 15)

MAINCONTROL

CARD

(Slot or Card 0)

P4 P5 P6 P7AC

ACE

-

+

IO switchenabledongle Dongle

To DKC 40 way ribboncable

20 way ribboncable

Main Control card

Input/Output card

Loop Processor card

Space for 3 LoopProcessors

RAM Card (only fittedin 16 line display panel)Network card

P1

P4

LCC - P1

IOC- P2

LOOP 1 - P3

LOOP 2 - P4

LOOP 3 - P5

LOOP 4 - P6

P7

P8

NETWORKCard(Not usedfor 3300)

Loop (3300)

IOCARD

MAINCONTROL

CARD

P4 P5 P6 P7AC

ACE

-+

SPARESLOT

32K and Senator 2 Network Interfacebackplane

3300 Mk2, 32K and Senator 2Control panel backplane

3505 Terminal node backplane

Vigilon and 34K Control panel andNetwork node backplane

MAIN CONTROLCARD

3404 & 3300 Mk1 Control panel backplane

MAIN CONTROLCARD

3408 Control panel backplane

IOC

LOOP PROCESSOR CARDS

RAM NCIOCRAM NC

3300

3404LOOP PROCESSOR CARDS

NORMAL

HALT

Data and Installation instructions Main Control Cards (MCC)



Telephone: +44 (0) 116 246 2000 Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

2 4188-860 issue 1_01/06_MCC BS

by Honeywell

Fau

lt

Po

we

r

Co

mm

issio

nS

yste

mF

au

lt

Fir

e

Dis

ab

lem

en

t

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

Panelhealthy

12:0

0

Vig

ilon

Fire

Syst e

mG

EN

T1998

Vig

ilon

BS

34

KB

S

Co

ntr

olP

an

el

34

04

33

00

Mk

1

Co

ntr

olp

an

el

32

Ko

r

Se

na

tor

2

33

00

Mk

2

Co

ntr

olP

an

el

34

08

Co

ntr

olp

an

el

34

08

FIR

EA

LA

RM

CO

NT

RO

L

Pa

rtn

um

be

r2

211

-xx

x

Ma

inC

on

tro

lC

ard

(BS

ve

rsio

n3

/3+

)-

Co

mpa

tib

ility

Info

rma

tio

n

GE

NT

35

05

Term

inalN

od

e

32

K

Se

na

tor

2

Ne

two

rkIn

terf

ac

eF

ault

Po

we

r

Co

mm

issio

nS

yste

mF

au

lt

Fir

e

Dis

ab

lem

en

t

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

Panelhealthy

12:0

0

Vig

ilon

Fire

Syst e

mG

EN

T1998

Vig

ilon

BS

34

KB

S

Netw

ork

No

de

VIG

-MC

C-B

S-N

OD

-UP

G

34

K-M

CC

-UP

GR

VIG

-MC

C-V

3+

VIG

-MC

C-3

40

0

VIG

-MC

C-3

50

0-N

OD

E

Fau

lt

Po

we

r

Co

mm

issio

nS

yste

mF

au

lt

Fir

e

Dis

ab

lem

en

t

Pre

vi o

us

Ne

xt

Panelhealthy

12:0

0

Vig

ilon

Fire

Syst e

mG

EN

T1998

Vig

ilon

BS

34

KB

S

Netw

ork

No

de

Vigilon

Fire

System

GENT

2005

Panel

Healthy

15:45

Fau

lt

Syste

mF

au

lt

Test

Fir

e

Po

wer

Po

wer

Fau

ltV

eri

fy

CB

253

CB

254

Dis

ab

lem

en

tP

rev

iou

sN

ex

t

Vig

BS

34

KB

S

22

11

-15

3

22

11

-17

1

Vig

BS

34

KB

S

22

11

-16

8

22

11

-17

0

34

KB

S2

211

-16

9

Vig

BS

22

11

-15

0

33

00

Ma

rk2

To

be

ad

vis

ed

32

K/S

en

ato

r2

22

11

-16

6

34

08

22

11

-16

43

40

4/

33

00

Mk

12

211

-16

4

Cu

rren

tp

rod

ucts

Past

Pro

du

cts

Main

Co

ntr

ol

Ca

rd

Fau

lt

Po

we

r

Com

mis

sio

nS

yst e

mF

ault

Fir

e

Wa

rnin

g

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

Panelhealthy

12:0

0

Vig

ilon/3

4000

Fire

Syste

mG

EN

T1998

8lin

ed

isp

lay

16

line

dis

pla

y

7 8

91

0

11

12

3 4

5

87

9 10

11

6

Vig

BS

22

11

-14

4

1

34

KB

S2

211

-15

1

2

Vig

ilon

BS

34

KB

S

Co

ntr

olP

an

el

Fau

lt

Po

we

r

Co

mm

issio

nS

yste

mF

au

lt

Fir

e

Dis

ab

lem

en

t

Pre

vi o

us

Ne

xt

Panelhealthy

12:0

0

Vig

ilon

Fire

Syst e

mG

EN

T1998

Vigilon

Fire

System

GENT

2005

Panel

Healthy

15:45

Fau

lt

Syste

mF

au

lt

Co

mm

issio

n

Fir

e

Po

we

r

Po

we

rF

au

ltV

eri

fy

CB

253

CB

254

Warn

ing

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

Vigilon

Fire

System

GENT

2005

Panel

Healthy

15:45

Fa

ult

Sy

ste

mF

au

lt

Co

mm

iss

ion

Fir

e

Po

we

r

Po

we

rF

au

ltV

eri

fy

CB

25

3

CB

25

4

Wa

rnin

gP

rev

iou

sN

ex

t

1 2

3 45

14

13

15

16

17

6

14

32

K/S

en

ato

r2

22

11

-16

5

12

13

15

16

35

05

22

11

-16

5

17

Fau

lt

Po

we

r

Com

mis

sio

nS

yst e

mF

au

lt

Fir

e

Wa

rnin

g

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

Panelhealthy

12:0

0

Vig

ilon/3

4000

Fire

Syste

mG

EN

T1998

an

da

refu

ture

op

tio

ns.

11

91

0

With

ou

tZ

on

e,

De

lay

an

dS

ou

nd

er

LE

Ds

Vigilon

Fire

System

GENT

2005

Designed

to

EN54

Pt

2&

4

Panel

Healthy

15:45

Fa

ult

Sy

ste

mF

au

lt

Te

st

Fir

e

Po

we

r

Po

we

rF

au

ltV

eri

fy

CB

25

3

CB

25

4

Dis

ab

lem

en

tP

rev

iou

sN

ex

t

#A

RA

MC

ard

iso

nly

fitt

ed

inV

igilo

np

an

el

havin

g16

lin

ed

isp

lay

an

dw

here

the

backp

lan

eh

as

no

flash

.

With

ou

tZ

on

e,

De

lay

an

dS

ou

nd

er

LE

Ds



This leaflet covers a range of Main Control(ler) Card(MCC) options for EN version 4.xx control panelsand Network nodes. Each MCC is supplied with anumber of chips having part numbers 2211-xxx,see chart overleaf. The appropriate chip must befitted to the card before card installation. Cardoptions:

� VIG-MCC-UPGR

� VIG-MCC-EN-NOD-UPG.

Chip 2211-xxx

� Fit the correct chip 2211-xxx in the MCC for thetype of panel or node, see chart overleaf.

Battery connection

The MCC has a battery sleeve that must beremoved before the card is fitted in the backplane.

� Once the battery sleeve is removed fromthe MCC, the card MUST NOT be placed on a metalsurface as this may result in damage to thecomponents on the card.

Backplane

The MCC card must be installed in the correctlocation in the backplane.

Technical data




Replace the battery onlywith the same or equivalenttype. Dispose of all usedbatteries according to themanufacturer’s instructions.


0�C to 45�C



up to 90%

4188-861 issue 1_01/06_MCC EN 1

Data and Installation instructions

Main Control Cards(EN version 4.xx panels or nodes)

by Honeywell

BATT1


Remove sleeve beforeinstalling the card

SW1

USB port forfuture use

P2 for future useP4 to accept a40-way ribboncable from the DKC

MCC card socket fitsinto the Backplane slot for (LCC)

ResetSwitch

Part number2211-xxx


20 way ribboncable

Main Control card

Input/Output card

Loop Processor card


RAM Card #

Network card

P1

P4

LCC - P1

IOC- P2

LOOP 1 - P3

LOOP 2 - P4

LOOP 3 - P5

LOOP 4 - P6

P7

P8

Vigilon Control panel andNetwork node backplane

# A RAM Card is only fitted in Vigilon panelhaving 16 line display and where thebackplane has no flash.

Data and Installation instructions Main Control Cards (MCC)



Telephone: +44 (0) 116 246 2000 Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

2 4188-861 issue 1_01/06_MCC EN

by Honeywell

Fau

lt

Pow

er

Com

mis

si o

nS

yst e

mF

ault

Fir

e

Dis

able

ment

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

Pa

ne

lh

ea

lth

y1

2:0

0

Vig

ilon

Fire

Syste

mG

EN

T1

99

8

Vig

ilon

EN

Co

ntr

olP

an

el

Vig

ilon

EN

+Z

nL

ED

sP

ostF

eb

05

Co

ntr

olP

an

el

Pa

rtn

um

be

r2

211

-xx

x

Ma

inC

on

tro

lC

ard

(EN

)-

Co

mpa

tib

ility

Info

rma

tio

n

Fau

lt

Pow

er

Com

mis

si o

nS

yst e

mF

ault

Fir

e

Dis

able

ment

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

Pa

ne

lh

ea

lth

y1

2:0

0

Vig

ilon

Fire

Syste

mG

EN

T1

99

8

Vig

ilon

EN

Netw

ork

No

de

Fau

lt

Pow

er

Com

mis

sio

nS

yste

mF

ault

Fir

e

Dis

able

ment

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

Panelhealthy

12:0

0

Vig

ilon

Fire

Syst e

mG

EN

T1998

Fault

Fir

e

Syste

mfa

ult

Dis

ab

lem

en

t

So

un

der

Po

wer

Vig

ilon

Fire

Syste

mG

EN

TLim

ited

2003

Desig

ned

toE

N54

Pt2

&4

Panelhealthy

15:4

5

12

34

56

78

91

011

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

30

32

Zo

ne

s

Pre

vio

us

Next

Vig

ilon

EN

+Z

nL

ED

sP

reF

eb

05

Co

ntr

olP

an

el

Vigilon

Fire

System

GENT

2005

Designed

to

EN54

Pt

2&

4

Panel

Healthy

15:45

Fau

lt

Sy

ste

mF

au

lt

De

lay

Te

st

Fir

e

Po

we

r

Po

we

rF

au

ltV

eri

fy

CB

25

3

CB

25

4

Dis

ab

lem

en

t

So

un

de

r

12

34

56

78

910

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

30

32

Zo

nes

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

VIG

-MC

C-U

PG

R

VIG

-MC

C-E

N-N

OD

-UP

G

Fau

lt

Pow

er

Com

mis

sio

nS

yste

mF

ault

Fir

e

Dis

able

ment

Pre

vi o

us

Ne

xt

Panelhealthy

12:0

0

Vig

ilon

Fire

Syst e

mG

EN

T1998

Vig

ilon

EN

Netw

ork

No

de

Vigilon

Fire

System

GENT

2005

Panel

Healthy

15:45

Fau

lt

Sy

ste

mF

au

lt

De

lay

Te

st

Fir

e

Po

we

r

Po

we

rF

au

ltV

eri

fy

CB

25

3

CB

25

4

Dis

ab

lem

en

t

So

un

de

r

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

Vig

EN

22

11

-15

2

Vig

EN

-Zn

PostF

eb

05

22

11

-14

3

Vig

EN

-Zn

Pre

Feb

05

22

11

-14

7

Vig

EN

22

11

-15

5

Vig

EN

22

11

-17

6

Cu

rren

tp

rod

ucts

Past

Pro

du

cts

Main

Co

ntr

ol

Ca

rd

8lin

ed

isp

lay

16

line

dis

pla

y

Vigilon

Fire

System

GENT

2005

Designed

to

EN54

Pt

2&

4

Panel

Healthy

15:45

Fau

lt

Syste

mF

au

lt

Dela

y

Te

st

Fir

e

Po

wer

Po

wer

Fau

ltV

eri

fy

CB

25

3

CB

25

4

Dis

ab

lem

en

t

So

un

der

12

34

56

78

910

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

30

32

Zo

ne

s

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

Fau

lt

Po

we

r

So

un

de

rS

yste

mF

au

lt

Fir

e

Dis

ab

lem

en

t

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

Pa

ne

lh

ea

lth

y1

2:0

0

Vig

ilon

Fire

Syste

mG

EN

T1

99

8

12

34

56

78

910

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

30

32

Zo

nes

Panelhealthy

12:0

0

GE

NT

1998

Vig

ilon

Fire

Syst e

m

Po

wer

So

un

der

Syste

mF

au

lt

Dis

ab

lem

en

t

Fir

eF

au

lt

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

Fau

lt

Po

we

r

So

un

de

rS

yste

mF

au

lt

Fir

e

Dis

ab

lem

en

t

Pre

vio

us

Ne

xt

Pa

ne

lh

ea

lth

y1

2:0

0

Vig

ilon

Fire

Syste

mG

EN

T1

99

8Vigilon

Fire

System

GENT

2005

Panel

Healthy

15:45

Fau

lt

Syste

mF

au

lt

Dela

y

Test

Fir

e

Po

wer

Po

wer

Fau

ltV

eri

fy

CB

25

3

CB

254

Dis

ab

lem

en

t

So

un

der

Pre

vio

us

Next

With

ou

tZ

on

eL

ED

With

Zo

ne

LE

DW

ith

Zo

ne

LE

D



This copper network card is used to allow messages of statusand control data to pass between control panels and network(or terminal) nodes in a networked fire system. The card mustbe plugged into the backplane of each panel and node in adedicated slot. When it is plugged into the slot P8 on thebackplane the external cables must be connected to terminalblock P10, which is also located on the backplane.The dual-in-line switches on the card are set to program theaddress number and baud rate.

Connecting the Panels and Nodes

This network card can be installed in:

Vigilon or 34K Fire Panels

• VIG1-V3+ or 34K1-V3+

• VIG1-NET-V3+

• VIG2-V3+

• VIG2-NET-V3+

• VIG3-V3+

• VIG3-NET-V3+

• VIG4-V3+

• VIG4-NET -V3+

Vigilon or 34K Network (or Terminal) Node

• VIG-NODE-V3+ or 34K-NODE-V3+

Specification


Node address range 1 to 31

Baud 2400, 9600, 19.2K and 38.4K

Operating voltage ±5V (RS485)

Terminations Terminal block P10 assumingNetwork card is installed inbackplane slot P8

Cable Belden 9729 (example)



0�C to 45�C


Relative humidity(non condenscing)

up to 90%

Using the Copper Network card a maximum of up to 31 Controlpanels and Network (Terminal) nodes can be connected in asecure network loop, with up to 1.2Km cable distance betweenpanels/nodes dependent on cable type.

Copper Network Card (BS) 4188-789 issue 2_12/05 1

Installation instructions

Copper Network Card (BS)(VIG/34K-NC-V3+) for BS5839 Vigilon or 34K Network

by Honeywell

P10


BACKPLANE

Control Panelor Network Node

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 80V -ve +ve 0V I -ve +ve I

P10

BACKPLANE

Control PanelNetwork Node

Cable screen


To Nextpanelor node

Fromprevious

panelor node

Noconnection

Noconnection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 80V -ve +ve 0V I -ve +ve I

The 0V connectionis as shown.

Switch settings


Node address switch numbers and settingsBaud rate switchnumbers and settings

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1







Address Baud

- factory settings

Installation instructions Copper Network Card (BS)

Gent by Honeywellreserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and make changes to the content hereof withoutoblication to notify any person of such revisions of changes.


Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000 Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

2 Copper Network Card (BS) 4188-789 issue 2_12/05

by Honeywell

87

65

43

21

Copper Network Card

On

Off

SW1

To DKC

40 wayribboncable

20 wayribboncable

P1

P4

BackplaneLCC - Local Controller CardMCC - Main Control CardIOC - Input Output CardNC - Network CardLOOP n - Loop Processor Card

Network Card

backplane

MCC / LCC

IOC

LOOP 1

LOOP 2

LOOP 3

LOOP 4

IOC / NC

NC

P1

P2

P3

P4

P5

P6

P7

P8

CARD 0

CARD 15

CARD 1

CARD 2

CARD 3

CARD 4

CARD 5

CARD 6



This copper network card is used to allow data to passbetween control panels and network nodes installed in anetworked fire system. The card must be plugged into thebackplane of the panel or node in a dedicated slot. When it isplugged into the slot P8 on the backplane the external cablesmust be connected to terminal block P10, which is also on thebackplane.

The dual-in-line switches on the card are set to program theaddress number and baud rate.

� Where a copper network card is plugged intoa control panel or network node, ensure the panel/nodeLocal Controller software is at Version 4.00 or later.

Connecting the Panels and Nodes

This network card can be installed in:

Vigilon Fire Panels

• VIG1

• VIG1-NET

• VIG2

• VIG2-NET

• VIG3

• VIG3-NET

• VIG4

• VIG4-NET

Vigilon Network Node

• VIG-NODE.

Technical data



Baud 2400, 9600, 19.2K and 38.4K

Operating voltage �5V (RS485)

Terminations Terminal block P10 assumingNetwork card is installed inbackplane slot P8

Cable Belden 9729 (example)



0�C to 45�C



up to 90%

Using the Copper Network card a maximum of up to 31 Controlpanels and Network nodes can be connected in a securenetwork loop, with up to 1.2Km cable distance betweenpanels/nodes dependent on cable type.

Copper Network Card (EN54) 4188-832 issue 2_12/05 1

by Honeywell


Copper Network Card (EN)(VIG-NC) for EN54 Vigilon Network

P10


BACKPLANE

Control Panelor Network Node

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 80V -ve +ve 0V I -ve +ve I

P10

BACKPLANE

Control PanelNetwork Node

Cable screen


To Nextpanelor node

Fromprevious

panelor node

Noconnection

Noconnection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 80V -ve +ve 0V I -ve +ve I

The 0V connectionis as shown.

Switch settings


Node address switch numbers and settingsBaud rate switchnumbers and settings

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1







Address Baud

- factory settings

Installation instructions Copper Network Card (EN)

Gent by Honeywell reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and make changes to the content hereof withoutoblication to notify any person of such revisions of changes.


Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000 Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

2 Copper Network Card (EN54) 4188-832 issue 2_12/05

by Honeywell

87

65

43

21

Copper Network Card

On

Off

SW1

To DKC

40 wayribboncable

20 wayribboncable

P1

P4

BackplaneLCC - Local Controller CardMCC - Main Control CardIOC - Input Output CardNC - Network CardLOOP n - Loop Processor Card

Network Card

backplane

MCC / LCC

IOC

LOOP 1

LOOP 2

LOOP 3

LOOP 4

IOC / NC

NC

P1

P2

P3

P4

P5

P6

P7

P8

CARD 0

CARD 15

CARD 1

CARD 2

CARD 3

CARD 4

CARD 5

CARD 6



The fibre network card allows fast message passing to thenetwork. The card must be plugged into the backplane of thepanel or node in a dedicated slot. The fibre optic cablesconnect directly to sockets on the card. There are two types offibre network cards for secure EN54 Vigilon network.

� Where a fibre network card is plugged into acontrol panel or a network node ensure their LocalController software is at Version 4.00 or later whenusing VIG-NC-FO and version 4.16 or later when usingVIG-NC-DOM-FO.

� VIG-NC-FO Fibre Optic Network card

Using the Fibre Optic Network card VIG-NC-FO up to 31Control panels and Network Nodes can be connected in asecure loop. There can be up to 2Km Fibre Optic cabledistance between panel and node.

� VIG-NC-DOM-FO Fibre Optic Network card(for Domain bridge)

Using the Fibre Optic Network card VIG-NC-DOM-FO up to64 smaller networks can be connected to form a securedomain. The Fibre Optic cable distance between nodes of thesmaller networks can be up to 2Km. The entire system canhave up to 200 panels/nodes.

Specification


Node addressrange

1 to 64 (VIG-NC-DOM-FO)

1 to 32 (VIG-NC-FO)

Baud 19.2K, 38.4K, 115.2K and230.4K

Terminations /Fibre Optics

ST connection is by means of theST sockets on the Network card.

Cable: Multi mode 62.5 / 125µmFibre 820nm wavelength



0�C to 45�C

Storagetemperature

-10�C to 55�C


up to 90%

Connecting Panels and Nodes

� Ensure the patch leads are of the correctlength. The leads connect directly to the Fibre NetworkCard and patch panel.

new fibre Network Card (EN) 4188-790 issue 2_07/06 1


new fibre Network Card (EN)(VIG-NC-FO and VIG-NC-DOM-FO) for Vigilon Network

by Honeywell

C8

76

54

32

1

BACKPLANE

Control Panel or Network Node

End 1 End 2

P7Rx

P4Tx

P6Rx

P5Tx

P3P2

Links P2 and P3 are booster links.Normally the links are not fitted, however fordistance exceeding 750m the links must be fitted.P2 settings are for End 1P3 settings are for End 2

RxTx Rx

Tx

Backplane slot and switch location on aFibre Optics Network card

� The fibre optic network cards are factory setfor 38.4K baud with node address 4.

Switch settings

Node Address and switch settings Switch settings and Baud rate

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

64 off off off off off off off off 19.2K

1 on off off off off off on off 38.4K





- Factory settings

Installation instructions new fibre Network Card (EN)

Gent by Honeywell reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and make changes to the content hereof withoutoblication to notify any person of such revisions of changes.


Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000 Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

Registered office: Novar House: 24 Queens Road, Weybridge, Surrey KT13 9UX

2 new fibre Network Card (EN) 4188-790 issue 2_07/06

by Honeywell

Fibre Optics Network Card

C8

76

54

32

1

C8

76

54

32

1

BA

UD

AD

DR

ES

S

On Off


20 way ribboncable

Local Controller card

Input/Output card

Loop Processor card


Network card

P1

P4

LCC - P1

IOC- P2

LOOP 1 - P3

LOOP 2 - P4

LOOP 3 - P5

LOOP 4 - P6

P7

P8

Backplane

SW1

MCC/

The new Input Output (IO) cards part numbers VIG-IOC-V3+and 34K-IOC-V3+ have version 3+ software. They aredesigned for installation in fire panels to BS5839:Part 4, suchas the Vigilon, 34000, 32000, 3400 and 3300 analogueaddressable fire panels and Network (or Terminal) nodes.

new IO cards replaces existing IO cards

The new IO card combine the functions of all the existing IOcards and will replace the existing IO cards:

VIG-IOC-PRT-V3+ 34K-IOC-PRT-V3+

VIG-IOC-ASCOM-V3+ 34K-IOC-UFD-V3+

VIG-IOC-UFD-V3+ 34K-IOC-UNI-V3+

VIG-IOC-UNI-V3+ 34K-IOC-SLV-V3+

13432-03V3 32023-21

13332-13

The existing IO cards listed above are no longer available.

Specification



Baud

(When installed as anadditional IO card)

1200, 1800, 2400, 3600,4800, 7200, 9600 and 19200

RS232 (Port 0)

RS485 (Port 1)

10m cable distance

1.2Km cable distance


Operating temperature 0�C to 45�C



up to 90%

� There is no need to switch between theRS232 and RS485 ports as they are both available forsimultaneous use.

IO installation and associated terminalsThe diagram below shows the associated terminal for standardIO card when it is installed in the backplane of panel/node.

Control Panel or

Network Node

Backplaneplug inlocation

Associatedterminals onterminal card

RS232/RS485

Vigilon Control panel P2 P4

34000 Control panel P2 P4

Network node forVigilon and 34000

P2 P15

32000 Control panel IOC P2

Network node for32000

P6 P8-P9

3404 Control panel SK2 TB9/TB10

3408 Control panel SK2 TB6

3405 Network nodefor 3408/3404

P5 P6

new IO Card V3+ (BS) 4188-797 issue 2_7/05 1


new IO Card V3+ (BS)(VIG-IOC-V3+ / 34K-IOC-V3+)

by Honeywell

TxCTS RxRTS

RS232 (Port 0)

Terminal card

-ve 5V +ve 0V

RS485 (Port 1)

Checks

� Set the rotary switch SW2 to a required function.

� Ensure all DIP switches of SW1 are set to the Offposition before installing the IO card in the backplaneof Vigilon or 34000 system Control panel or Networknode.

� A 20 way ribbon cable connects between DKC

connector P4 and the IO card socket P2.

� One additional IO card can be fitted into the sparesocket on the backplane of the Vigilon/34000/3400control panels and up to four into the backplanesockets of the associated Network node.

When installing an additional IO card it is important to

set its DIP switches SW1 to the required baud rate and

node address and the rotary switch SW2 to therequired function before installing the card in a sparesocket of the backplane.

Setting switches SW1 and SW2

� IMPORTANT:The Vigilon and 34000 Control Panels make use of the DIPswitches on the DKC, located on the inner door. Theswitches are used to set address and baud rate. For thesepanels it is important that the DIP switches SW1 on the IOcard are ALL set in the UP or OFF position so that theyare ignored.

SW1 Switch settingsThe switch positions shown here are applicable for the new IOCard when installed as an additional IO card in the Vigilon or34000 panel or node.

� No dongle is required for the DIP switches towork, when used as a second or additional IO card.

Baud Rate Node Address

1 2 3 | 4 5| 6 7 8 |

Off Off Off 1200 baud Off Off Off Off Off

Off Off On 1800 baud Off Off Off Off On 1

Off On Off 2400 baud Off Off Off On Off 2

Off On On 3600 baud Off Off Off On On 3

On Off Off 4800 baud Off Off On Off Off 4

On Off On 7200 baud Off Off On Off On 5

On On Off 9600 baud Off Off On On Off 6

On On On 19200 baud Off Off On On On 7

|

On On On On On upto

31

SW2 Switch settings

RotaryswitchPos.

Standard connectionsPort 0 (RS232) Mode

Port 1(RS485mode)

0 or 8 3217 Half Duplex Switchposition from0 to 7 sets thisport forRepeat panelat 1200 baud.

Switchposition from8 to F setsthis port forotherapplications at9600 baud.

1 or 9 Slave I/O

2 or A Remote Printer (asVIG-IOC-PRT-V3+)

3 or B Universal Full-Duplex (asVIG-IOC-UFD-V3+)

4 or C Ascom Pager (asVIG-IOC-ASCOM-V3+)

5 or D Domain Bridge Full-Duplex

6 or E Universal Half-Duplex (asVIG-IOC-UNI-V3+)

7 or F -

Factory settings

Installation instructions new IO Card - version 3+ (BS)



Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000 Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

2 new IO Card V3+ (BS) 4188-797 issue 2_7/05

P3

1 2 3

On

Off 87

65

43

21

SW1

SW2

IC4

P2new IO Card

Vigilon,34000,

34003300 Mark 1

32000 &3300 Mark 2

P3

1 2 3

Factoryset to 0



This new Input Output (IO) card (part no. VIG-IOC-DOM) isdesigned for installation in EN54 Vigilon analogue addressablefire panels and Network node:

Vigilon Fire Panels

• VIG1

• VIG1-NET

• VIG2

• VIG2-NET

• VIG3

• VIG3-NET

• VIG4

• VIG4-NET

Vigilon Network (Terminal) Node

• VIG-NODE.

new IO card replaces existing IO cards

The new IO card combines the functions of and will replace theexisting IO cards:

• VIG-IOC-PRT

• VIG-IOC-ASCOM

• VIG-IOC-UFD

• VIG-IOC-UNI

The existing IO cards are no longer available.

Specification



Baud

(When installed as anadditional IO card)

1200, 1800, 2400, 3600,4800, 7200, 9600 and 19200

RS232 (Port 0)

RS485 (Port 1)

10m cable distance

1.2Km cable distance


Operating temperature 0�C to 45�C



up to 90%

� There is no need to switch between theRS232 and RS485 ports as they are both available forsimultaneous use.

IO card installation and associatedterminalsThe diagram below shows the associated terminals forstandard IO card when it is installed in the backplane ofpanel/node.

Checks

� Set the rotary switch SW2 to a required function.

� Ensure all DIP switches SW1 are set to the Off

position before installing the IO card in socket P2 ofthe backplane

� Connect the 20 way ribbon cable from DKC

connector P4 to the IO card socket P2.

� One additional IO card can be fitted into the

backplane spare socket P7 of the control panel andup to four into the backplane sockets of the Networknode.

When installing an additional IO card it is important

to set its DIP switches SW1 to the required baud rate

and node address and the rotary switch SW2 to therequired function before installing the card in a sparesocket of the backplane.

new IO Card (EN54) 4188-777 issue 3_11/05 1


new IO Card (EN54)(VIG-IOC-DOM)

by Honeywell

TxCTS RxRTS

RS232 (Port 0)

Terminal card

-ve 5V +ve 0V

RS485 (Port 1)

IO card location

One new IO card is normally fitted as Card 15 in socket P2 ofthe Control panel backplane.

Setting switches SW1 and SW2

� IMPORTANT:The Vigilon Control Panel make use of the DIP switcheson the DKC, located on the inner door. The switches areused to set address and baud rate. It is important that theDIP switches SW1 on the IO card are ALL set in the UP orOFF position so that they are ignored.

SW1 Switch settingsThe switch positions shown here are applicable for the new IOCard when installed as an additional IO card.

� No dongle is required for DIP switches towork when used as second or additional IO card.

Baud Rate Node Address

1 2 3 | 4 5| 6 7 8 |

Off Off Off 1200 baud Off Off Off Off Off

Off Off On 1800 baud Off Off Off Off On 1

Off On Off 2400 baud Off Off Off On Off 2

Off On On 3600 baud Off Off Off On On 3

On Off Off 4800 baud Off Off On Off Off 4

On Off On 7200 baud Off Off On Off On 5

On On Off 9600 baud Off Off On On Off 6

On On On 19200 baud Off Off On On On 7

|

On On On On On upto

31

Factory settings

SW2 Switch settings

RotarySwitchPos.

Standard connectionsPort 0 (RS232) Mode

Port 1(RS485 mode

0 3217 Half/Full-Duplex Switchposition from0 to 7 sets thisport forRepeat panelat 1200 baud.

Switchposition from8 to F setsthis port forotherapplicationsat 9600 baud.

1 Slave I/O

2 Remote Printer (asVIG-IOC-PRT)

3 Universal Full-Duplex (asVIG-IOC-UFD)

4 Ascom Pager (asVIG-IOC-ASCOM)

5 Domain Bridge Full-Duplex

6 Universal Half-Duplex (asVIG-IOC-UNI)

7 -

Factory setting

Installation instructions new IO Card EN54 (VIG-IOC-DOM)


Hamilton Industrial Park, Waterside Road, Leicester LE5 1TN, UK. Website: www.gent.co.uk

Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000 Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

2 new IO Card (EN54) 4188-777 issue 3_11/05

by Honeywell


20 way ribboncable

Local Controller card

Input/Output card

Loop Processor card


Network card

P1

P4

LCC - P1

IOC- P2

LOOP 1 - P3

LOOP 2 - P4

LOOP 3 - P5

LOOP 4 - P6

P7

P8

Backplane

P3

1 2 3

On

Off 87

65

43

21

SW1

SW2

IC4

P2new IO Card

Factoryset to 5



This kit may be required when installing a replacement PSU ina Vigilon panel.

� If upgrading to new earthing arrangementthe EMC cover part number 4094-290.01 will be requiredand is available free of charge upon request from GENTSales.

� Before working on the panel you mustfirst power down the mains and battery supply tothe panel.

Kit

This kit must be used to correctly wire the replacement PSU

No. Qty

�

Back box spade connector to mainsinput filter earth. Yellow/Green wire

1

�

Back box spade connector to PSUearth. Yellow/Green wire

1

�

Mains filter to PSU live (brown) andneutral (blue) wire loom

1

�Spade connector

1

� Cable tie 1

�

Primary earth label

1

�Nut

1

Shake proof washer

3

� The parts in the kits are used according tothe wiring arrangements.

Parts used

Parts used when converting the old earthing arrangement tothe new earthing arrangement:

Items required:��

Parts used when converting the new earthing arrangement tothe old earthing arrangement:

Items required:��

Wiring arrangements

Conversion kit 4188-823 issue 1_05/06 1


Conversion kit(2534-196) for PSU wiring in Vigilon panel

by Honeywell

E

L

N L

PSU Chassis

TE

PCB

LEN

N

L

N L

PSU Chassis

TE

PCB

LEN

N

PSU with oldearthing arrangement

PSU with newearthing arrangement

L

N L

PSU Chassis

TE - Transformer EarthPCE - PSU Chassis Earth

PCB

LEN

N

E

L

N L

PSU Chassis

TE

PCB

LEN

N

PSU with Newearthing arrangement

PSU with oldearthing arrangement

Wiring arrangementbefore replacing the PSU

Wiring arrangementafter replacing the PSU

MainsFilterMains

Filter

MainsFilter

MainsFilter

Converting from the old earthing arrangement

TE

PCEPCE

PCEPCE

Converting from the new earthing arrangementWiring arrangementbefore replacing the PSU

Wiring arrangementafter replacing the PSU

How to fit the kit when replacing the PSU

a. Power down the mains and battery supply to thepanel.

b. Disconnect the two ribbon cables fitted to thePSU PCB.

c. Remove, if fitted, the 0V black lead from theprinter to the PSU.

d. Remove, if fitted, the terminal cover over themains terminal on the PSU chassis.

e. Remove, if fitted, the EMC Cover. If upgrading tothe new wiring arrangement a new cover will berequired.

� The EMC cover will be available free of chargeupon request from GENT Sales.

f. Disconnect the battery loom from the terminalcard.

g. Remove the Fuse holder from the mains terminalmounted on the back box.

h. Remove, if fitted, the clear moulded mainsterminal cover and nylon fastener. These itemsshould be discarded, as they are no longerrequired.

i. Disconnect the transformer earth if fitted to theprimary earth.

j. Disconnect the BLUE and BROWN (and theGREEN/YELLOW wire if fitted) from theterminals on PSU chassis

k. Loosen the three knurled captive screws thatsecures the PSU to backbox and then unhookthe PSU assembly out of the backbox.

l. Fit the replacement PSU onto the backbox andsecure it to the backbox.

m. Wire the PSU mains cables according to thewiring arrangement. Ensure the primary earthpoint Tag (spade connector) and shakeproofwashers and nut provided are correctly fitted,see illustrations.

� ENSURE THAT THE NUT ON THE EARTHBONDING STRIP IS SECURELY TIGHTENED AS THISPROVIDES THE PRIMARY EARTH FOR THE CONTROLPANEL.

n. Use the cable tie to secure any loose cable.o. Fit the supplied Primary Earth Label next to the

earth bonding strip.

Assembly of primary earth point

Assemble the primary earth according to the required wiringarrangement.

To ease installation it is suggested that the Earth cable and theTag (Spade connector) are mounted at right angles to eachother.

Installation instructions Conversion kit



Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000 Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

2 Conversion kit 4188-823 issue 1_05/06

by Honeywell

Earth Bonding StripShake Proof Washer

Earth Wire (Green/Yellow) to filter

TAG for Transformer Earth

M4 NUTM4 STUD

M4 Nut

Earth Wire (Green/Yellow) to filterTAG for Transformer Earth

M4 Stud

LEN

Earth Bonding StripShake Proof Washer

M4 NUTM4 STUD

LEN

Appendix F - DevicecommissioningThe appendix has information on commissioning devices such asinterface units, Beam sensors and Mimic panels connected on aloop circuit.



Ap

pen

dix

F-

Devic

eco

mm

issio

nin

g




Ap

pen

dix

F-

Devic

eco

mm

issio

nin

g

Repeat indicator panelAlways press the RESET button after setting the switches.

Port 0 is a factory configured to RS485 for connecting Repeatindicator panel. It is factory set for RS485 at 1200 baud. Ifhowever the port settings were changed then it is possible toreconfigure Port 0.

� If there is only one repeat indicator panelconnected to the control panel then an external 24Vpower supply is NOT required. Connect the 24V wiredirectly to the control panel

� On the control panel, RS485 Port 2 may beused to connect repeat indicator panels. You will needto configure Port 2 for Repeat mode and required baud.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0

+

RE

L

- 24

V

ab

RS

48

5

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J6 J5 J7

Back cableentry point

Thinned sectionson sides of enclosure forcable entry 4 enclosure fixing points

Dual in line switch

Resetswitch

PANEL

MASTER CONTROLBOARD

Terminals P15 is PORT 0 ofMaster Control Board

(Card 0)

The factory defaultsetting of PORT 0 is set

forto allow repeat indicator

panel connection

Repeat mode

REPEAT RS485

24V B A0V

P15

REPEAT INDICATOR PANEL 1

a

bRS485

earth


a

bRS485

earth

UP TO 4 REPEATINDICATOR PANELSMAXIMUM

S24

RESETS24


RESET


ON

RESET


ON

RESET


ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S24

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S24

24VPOWERSUPPLY UNIT

J2 J3 J4

J6 J5 J7

J2 J3 J4

J6 J5 J7

J2 J3 J4

J6 J5 J7

J2 J3 J4

J6 J5 J7

END STATION LINK SETTING

NOTE: IF ONLY ONE REPEAT INDICATOR PANELIS CONNECTED TO THE CONTROL PANEL,THEN THE END STATION LINK CONFIGURATIONMUST BE SET IN THE MANNER SHOWN FORREPEAT INDICATOR PANEL 4 BELOW.

+ -

ON

S24

ON

ON

ON

9600 baud

4800 baud

2400 baud

1200 baud

1 2

-

+24V

-

+24V

24V

Maximum cable usage per circuit

� Cable usage per circuit of:�Zone circuit - 100 metres maximum.�Clean contact Input circuit - 300 metres maximum�LED output - 30 metres maximum�Relay output - unlimited.

End-of-line (EOL) devices

� An input circuit require in series with the contactsa 10K resistor plus a 10K EOL resistor (supplied).

� A zone input circuit is monitored with an EOLcapacitor unit (supplied).

Zone input functionality

A zone input can have conventional detectors andmanual call points (MCPs) connected. All MCPs musthave a 470 Ohms or 3V9 zener diode in series withnormally open contacts. The zone input can take amaximum load of up to 2mA at 24V nominal (withminimum operating voltage of 18V). The zone circuitmust be terminated with an EOL capacitor unit.

Confirmation Input / Output functionality

An input and an output of a module can be paired tooperate in a confirmation mode. External equipmentcan send an acknowledgement upon receiving asignal from the module, this is called 'confirmationinput'. External equipment can also receive anacknowledgement from the module upon sending it asignal, this is called 'confirmation output'.

S4 1-Input Interface

The single input interface module monitors a circuit ofeither normally open or closed contacts. The inputcan be programmed as a fire, fault, supervisory orconfirmation input. Optionally it is also possible toconfigure the input for a zone of conventionaldetectors and MCPs. In all input modes the interfacewill detect short and open circuit faults.

S4 4-Input /Output Interface

The quad input/output interface module can beconfigured to provide any combination of up to fourinputs or outputs. An output of either normally openor normally closed relay contacts can be used tocontrol a load of up to 1A @ 30Vdc/ac. Optionally anoutput can be configured to provide 1.5mA at 24V dcto drive an LED that can be normally On or normallyOff. An input can be programmed as a fire, fault,supervisory or confirmation input. Additionally it ispossible for channel 1 to be used as a Zone input,which allow connection of conventional detectors andMCPs to this module. Zone input can be configuredto have alarm validation feature and configurablereset time. The alarm validation feature can be used

to minimise false alarms by suppressing a fire inputfor a period of time defined during commissioning.

The zone reset period can be extended to allow fordifferent types of fire detectors.

� Ensure the links are configured on thePCB before the outer covers are closed, as it isdifficult to reopen the covers once assembled.

1) Remove the terminal blocks from the PCB.2) Remove the cardboard packing piece.3) Configure the links on the PCB to the required

mode.4) During commissioning fit the PCB inside the

covers, ensure the light pipe is correctlypositioned and close the covers.

5) Fit the terminal blocks to PCB.

S4 1-Output & 1-Input Interface

This interface module can be used to control aresistive load of up to 1A @ 30Vdc/ac via a set ofsingle pole change over contacts, see wiringdiagrams. In addition there is an input to allow themonitoring of the external equipment. In thisapplication the input must be configured as aconfirmation input. A confirmation input generates afault if a change of state is not seen within thepredefined period of a specific output.

Configuration

� Use the Commissioning ToolVersion 1.21 or greater to commission theseinterface modules.

Data and Installation Interfaces (Low voltage)

2 4188-873.02_Pt.1_11/06_S4 LV Interfaces

Ch

an

ne

l4

Ch

an

ne

l2

Ch

an

ne

l3

Ch

an

ne

l1

RelayOutputmode(factory setting)

P5 P4 P3 P2

Not all the componentsare shown on the PCBLight pipe

Confirmation inputZone inputSwitch inputLED Outputmodes

Cardboard

Removableterminal blocks

Outer CoverOuter Cover PCB

Light pipe

Wiring diagrams

� The loop cable screen must be continued through each interface module. The loop, switch input,zone input and LED output cable screens where used must connect to an earth terminal.

4188-873.02_Pt.1_11/06_S4 LV Interfaces 3

Interfaces (Low voltage) Data and Installation

S4 1-Output & 1-input moduleconnection details

Note 2 - Only channel 1 (terminals 5 & 6) can beconfigured as an zone input.

Note 3 - Contact rating 1A 30V ac/dc Resistive load.

Note 4 - Output is 1.5mA @ 24V dc.

Note 1 - When the input is configured as a Zone inputit is possible to attach conventional detectorsand MCPs (with 470 Ohms or 3V9 zenerdiode in series with normally open contacts),maximum load is 2mA @ 24V nominal(18V minimum) with End-of-line capacitor.

# Can be configured as LED output

The cable screens must be connected to anon the chassis or in the metal box.

If a module is mounted on a then theDIN rail must electrically connected tothe

*earth terminal

DIN rail

loop cable screen via the earth terminal.

EO

L1

0K

10

K

121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ConfirmationInput(Optional)

NC

CO

MN

O

Output - Relaycontact rating1A 30V ac/dcResistive load

Lo

op

L1

+L

oo

p0

VL

oo

pL

2+

Lo

op

0V

#

*

*

S4 4-Input/Output moduleconnection details

121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

NC

/N

O

CO

MR

ela

yO

utp

uts

se

eN

ote

3

EO

L1

0K

10

K

SwitchInput

Zone Inputsee Note 2

LE

DO

utp

ut

se

eN

ote

4

Ch

an

ne

l1

Ch

an

ne

l2

Ch

an

ne

l3

Ch

an

ne

l4

EOL

Lo

op

L1

+L

oo

p0

VL

oo

pL

2+

Lo

op

0V

* *

*

*

S4 1-Input moduleconnection details

121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

10K

10KEOL

Zone InputModeSee Note 1

EOLCapacitor unit

SwitchInputMode

Lo

op

L1

+L

oo

p0

VL

oo

pL

2+

Lo

op

0V

#

*

**

Chassis

Z+ Z-

Z+

Z-


Technical data

S4-34410S4 1- Input

S4-34450

S4 4-Input /Output

S4-34420S4 1-Output & 1-Input

Approval EN54-17:2005 and EN54-18:2005 (Approval pending)

Weight-dimen. modulemodule in plastic boxmodule in metal box

92g �1047g �782g�

100g �1055g �790g �

100g �1055g �790g �

Storage temperature -30ºC to 70ºC

Operating temperature -10ºC to 60ºC

Relative Humidity Up to 95% - Temperature 5ºC to 45°C (Non condensing)

Emission BS EN 61000-6-3:2001 Residential, Commercial & Light Industry Class B limits

Immunity BS EN50130-4: 1996: Part 4

LVD BS EN 60950-2002

Ingress Protection IP31 for plastic box S4-34490 & IP40 estimated for metal box S4-34492

Colour Module-white / Plastic box-dark grey (Lid-light grey) / Metal box-dark grey

Input mode Input channel-1 only can be configured as azone input to accept conventional devices, witha load of 2mA quiescent and 9mA alarmmaximum at 24V nominal (18V minimum). Withconfigurable 2s to 5s reset period and 5s to 40salarm validation delay.

Switch input can workwith or without a delay.

Input channel can be configured as a switch input of Fire*, Fault*, Supervisory*(non fire) or Confirmation# signal. * with input acceptance delay of up to 10seconds for a Fire input and up to 300s for Fault or Supervisory input. # A fault isgenerated if confirmation input is not seen within predefined period of the outputaction (Confirmation function is not a feature of the single input module).

Output mode - A relay output of either NO orNC set of contacts rated 1A -30Vac/dc resistive load.

A relay output of change overcontacts NC, COM and NO rated1A - 30Vac/dc resistive load.

LED output 1.5mA at 24Vdc (Normally On or Normally Off)

Load Factor 1-4 switch inputs = 1 (maximum 200 per loop)

1-4 relay outputs = 2 (maximum 200 per loop only 8 individually sectored)

Zone Input = 26 (maximum 30 per loop)

Every LED output = +5 (maximum 100 LED outputs per loop)

EN54-17 data Vmax Vnom Vmin VSO max VSO min IC max IS max IL max ZC max

42V 40V 24V 14V 10V 0.4A 1A 20µA 0.1O�

Panel compatibility Compatible with LPC = V3.92 / V4.33 & MCC = V3.90 / V4.31.

Data and Installation Interfaces (Low voltage)



Telephone: +44 (0) 116 246 2000 Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

4 4188-873.02_Pt.1_11/06_S4 LV Interfaces

by Honeywell



139mm

93

mm

24mm

22

7m

m

245mm

Depth 77mm

HealthyFaultFault

System faultgreen

amber

202mm

12

5m

m

Depth 50mm

Metal Box

Plastic Box

Connection diagram

� The loop cable screen must be continuedthrough each interface module.

If a module is mounted on a DIN rail, then the DINrail must be electrically connected to the loop cablescreen.

� The output contacts are rated at 13A 230V acresistive load. In order to meet the requirements ofEuropean Safety Standards, ensure that all cablescarrying voltages in excess of 48V (Live and Neutral) aresuitably fused.

Dimensions

Technical data

Approval EN54-17:2005 & EN54-18:2005(Pending Approval)

Dimensions See illustrations

Weight DIN mountable:138gPCB with cover in metal box:800g

Storagetemperature

-30ºC to 70ºC


-10ºC to 60ºC

RelativeHumidity

Up to 95% - Temperature5ºC to 45°C(Non condensing)

Emission BS EN 61000-6-3:2001Residential, Commercial & LightIndustry Class B limits

Immunity BS EN50130-4: 1996: Part 4

LVD BS EN 60950-2002

IngressProtection

Metal box - IP40 estimated

Colour -Metal Box

Dark Grey

Output Single pole change over contactsrated at 13A 230V ac Resistiveload.

Contact ratings

Type

Cycle

1hp @ 240V ac, 1/2hp @120V ac (UL508)

6x103

Terminals 2.5mm2

Load Factor 5(maximum 200 devices per loop)

EN54-17 data Vmax 42V

Vnom 40V

Vmin 24V

VSO max14V

VSO min 10V

IC max 0.4A

IS max 1A

IL max 20�A

ZC max 0.1�

Panelcompatibility

Compatible withLPC = V3.92 / V4.33 &

MCC = V3.90 / V4.31.

Data and Installation Interface (MV) - Output



Telephone: +44 (0) 116 246 2000 Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

2 4188-874.01_08/06_S4 MV O-P Interfaces

by Honeywell




125mm

75

mm

Depth 48mm

PCB on DIN railmountable module

202mm

12

5m

m

Depth 50mm

PCB in metal box

EarthLoop 0V

Loop L2+Earth

Loop 0VLoop L1+

NC

COM

NO

OUTPUT

2nd Fix Installation

Repeat panel 2nd fix part Quantity

� Outer door assembly 1

� Inner door assembly 1

� Master Repeat Card 1

� 20 Way ribbon cable 1

� 40 Way ribbon cable 1

� Spares pack (includes battery leads) 1

a Remove the protective temporary cover from thebackbox.

b Fit the inner door � to the repeat panelenclosure, remembering to connect the earthlead to door and then fit the outer moulded door�.

c Fit the Master Repeat Card into the backboxand:

• connect the transformer wires to terminalblock - P10.

• connect battery wires � supplied with thespares to terminal block P9 (note the red wire

connects to the + and black wire to the -terminal respectively).

• connect the ribbon cable from the terminalcard to connector - P14 on Master RepeatCard.

• connect the 40 way ribbon cable � fromMaster Repeat Card connector P7 to DisplayKey Card connector - P1.

• connect the 20 way ribbon cable � fromMaster Repeat Card connector P8 to DisplayKey Card connector - P6.

d Power-up the panel by connecting the mainssupply and then the battery supply, and note:

• the green and amber LEDs on the Masterrepeat card are lit

• all lights on the panel facia are lit for a shortduration

• a reset message appears on the display

• the local buzzer sounds for a short duration

• a battery disconnected message appears

• the display shows:MAIN PANEL OFF LINE

• the System Fault LED is lit on the panel facia

EN54 Repeat inst. 4188-839.03_11-06 3

Vigilon Repeat panel (EN) Data and installation instructions

Danger

MASTERREPEATCARD

BACK BOX

FS1

2.5AAuxiliarysupply fuse

2.5ABattery fuseFS2

12V 7Ah battery

D10Red LED(Loop communications)

D6Yellow LED(Watchdog)

D9Green LED(Power ON)

AC

AC

P10

P9

Transformer

MAINSTERMINALBLOCK

L

E

N

P14

P7

P8

P21

P20

CAUTIONHAZARDOUS VOLTAGES REMAINS

AFTER OPERATION OF FUSE.

ESD

BONDINGPOINT

RED

BLACK

+VE 0V

0V V

SW1 RESETSWITCH

TERMINALCARD

FILTER

MAINSFUSE

EARTHLEAD TOINNERDOOR

DKCSELECTIONLINKS

Configuring the linksand switches

Display selection

Contrast and emergency control

Data and installation instructions Vigilon Repeat panel (EN)






Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000 Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

4 EN54 Repeat inst. 4188-839.03_11-06

D6Section of theMasterRepeat Card(MRC)

Links shownin factory setpositions

P7

P8

P21

P20

P20 P20

Vigilon Fire SystemGENT2005

Panel healthy 15:45

P21 P21

8 line display 16 line display

To DKCTo DKCconnectorP6

To DKCconnectorP1

Where the repeat panel hasa 16 line display fitted, ensurethe Link P20 is NOT fitted onthe MRC. Fitting the link mayresult in damage to PCB.

�

�

Sound Alarms

Silence Alarms

Reset

Verify

Control buttons

OnOff

Dark unreadable(Maximum)

Normal factory setting(Mid setting)

Light unreadable(Minimum)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

X X X OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

| | | | | | | |X X X ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

| | | | | | | |X X X ON ON ON ON ON

CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT

Inner door

1 2 3 417 18 19 20

Zones

With Zoneindicators

Keyswitchapplication- NOT USEDLeave link fitted

87654321

Display and keyboard Card (DKC)

Without Zoneindicators

P6

P1

Buttonsenabled

Buttonsdisabled

Factory setting:Link fitted

micro DistributedAmplifier UnitThe Audio loop wiring is routed from the control panel withconnection to each micro DAU on the associated loop with returnconnection at the panel, that is Audio loop 1 is used with Deviceloop 1.


L1 & 01, L2 & 02

loop circuits 1 and 2

These terminals are use towire to the loop circuit, the loopin is at L1 & 01 terminals andloop out is at L2 & 01terminals.

A B

local audio

These terminals accept mostaudio source, such asbackground music forbroadcast to the local speakercircuits.

I/A & I/B

O/A & O/B

audio loop

These terminals accept theaudio loop circuit. Here the Oin O/A and O/B signify output,while the I in I/A and I/B signifyinput.

NO1, C1, NC1 and

NO2, C2 and NC2

auxiliary relaycontacts

These are auxiliary relaycontacts, rated at 1A 24Vdc.The relay can be configured tooperate with operation of:

� central emergency

� microphone, local message

� activation, central message

� activation, central PA

� activation, Background music,

� local auxiliary input(background music) or with

� local test microphone.

The relay can be configured tooperate with any of the aboveconditions, in any combination.

A+, A- and B+, B-

Speaker circuits

These terminals accept theconnection of two speakercircuits. Each speaker circuitcan have up to 5 x 64ohmsspeakers.

Vigilon Compact VA system

P4

L1 01 L2 02

AudioStatus

I/R SENSOR

P17

LOOP

P1

N01 C1 NC1 NO2 C2 NC2

AUX RELAY CONTACTS

WHGNREDBLK0V

MICROPHONE

I/A I/B O/A O/B

AUDIO LOOPP2

A+ A- B+B-

SPEAKERS

P4

L1 01 L2 02

LOOPP1

N01 C1 NC1 NO2 C2 NC2

AUX RELAY CONTACTS

P2

A+ A- B+B-

SPEAKERS

P3

I/A I/B O/A O/B

AUDIOLOOP

P3

B-CCT

P9

SW1

A-CCT

SW2

ENSURESPRINGFITTED

L3 L4

P2

P9

LD1

CAL

P5

P11

DISCHARGELED

P6

A B

LOCALAUDIO

P6

A B

LOCALAUDIO

P17

AudioStatus

B-CCT

I/R SENSOR

A-CCT

SW1

CAL

SW2

ENSURESPRINGFITTED

DISCHARGELED

MessageCard withAudio pack

Audio Pack 1The main panel and the micro Distributed amplifier unit each has an Audio pack 1 that contains the following messages and tones.

No. Type of message Voice Message

1 micro DAU Test Male The voice alarm volumes are being adjusted there is no need totake any action.

2 Alert

(default - Emergency 1)

Female Your attention please, the fire alarm has been activated in anotherarea, please remain where you are and await further instructions.

3 Evacuate


Male Attention please, attention please, this is an emergency, pleaseleave the building by the nearest available exit. Do not use the liftsor escalator.

4 Bomb


Female May I have your attention please, an incident has been reported inthe area, as a precaution please move away from the windows, Irepeat, please move away from all windows, further informationwill follow shortly.

5 Alert

(alternative)

Female May I have your attention please, may I have your attentionplease, an incident has been reported in the building, whilst thisreport is being investigated, please remain at your workplace.

6 Evacuate

(alternative)

Male Ladies and gentlemen, due to unforeseen circumstances we arerequired to evacuate the building, please leave the buildingimmediately by the nearest available exit.

7 Gas Carbon Monoxide Male May I have your attention please, may I have your attentionplease, excessive carbon monoxide levels have been detected,please leave the area immediately by the nearest available exit.

8 Gas FixedExtinguishant

Male May I have your attention please, may I have your attentionplease, extinguishant gas release imminent, please evacuate thearea immediately by the nearest available exit.

9 Fire alarm test

(default - Auxiliary 1)

Female Attention please, attention please, this is the test of the fire andvoice alarm system, there is no need to take any action.

10 Fire alarm test end

(default Auxiliary 2)

Female The test of the fire and voice alarm system has now beencompleted.

11 Coded message Female Would Mr Sands please report to reception.

12 Class change Female Class change

13 Gent Limitedadvertisement

Female Ladies and gentlemen this speech message is produced by GentLimited's Vigilon Compact Voice Alarm system. This productintegrates voice alarm functions into an analogue fire alarmsystem ideal for small to medium sized buildings.

14 Stand down

(default - Auxiliary 3)

Female May I have your attention please, the cause of the alarm has beeninvestigated and the system reset. There is no cause for concern.Thank you.

15 Navy radiological attack - Beep beep beep (950Hz 80ms beep every 420mS)

16 Navy bandit attack - Beep beep beep (950Hz 50ms beep every 80mS)

17 Nursery Rhyme 1 Boys & Girls

18 Nursery Rhyme 2 Twinkle Twinkle

19 Factory test - Frequency sweep (300Hz to 10KHz in 3s)

Attention tone

No Description of tone No Description of tone

1 Nee Naw x 8 6 Pulse

2 Two tone (Bing bong) 7 Continuous

3 Four Tones - ascending 8 Bong

4 Four Tones - descending 9 Chopin

5 Bell 10 Jingle

Commissioning instructions

Indications at the micro DAU


When using the remote control on amicro DAU the indications given bythese LEDs will be different, seeinstructions for the Remote control.

Audio Status

Circuit B fault

Circuit A fault

Audio circuit

Loop circuit (analogue loop)

Audio Status

Circuit B fault

Circuit A fault

Audio Status

Circuit B fault

Circuit A fault

greenLED

yellowLED

yellowLED

x2 - 2 flashes (single occurrence)

blink - 1 blink (quick flash) every 1s

- steady On

LED Keys

- Off

It may be possible to recoverfrom these faults by calibratingthe speaker circuits, see'How to calibrate speakercircuits'.

fast - 8 quick flashes (blinks) every 1s

slow - 1 slow flash(every 0.5s - On 0.5s Off) every 1s

Am

plif

iers

an

dS

pe

ake

rcircu

itsh

ea

lth

y

CAL micro DAU board

Press the CAL button on micro DAU board.

If the amplifier is still faulty then theindication will reappear.

It may be possible to recoverfrom an Amplifier fault

Fault on Speaker Circuit B slow

No Power to micro-DAU

Quiescent blink

micro DAU in Fall back mode fast

During Speaker calibration x2

Audio On

Fault on Speaker Circuit A slow

Wiring Short or open circuiton Speaker Circuit A

Wiring Short or open circuiton Speaker Circuit B

Amplifier A fault blink

Amplifier B fault blink

fast fast fastAudio and device loopsdisconnected. For examplewhen the micro DAU isdischarging the stored energy.

CAL/FaultReset

The panel MUST NOT be in 'Test Mode'when attempting an Amplifier fault recovery.

To calibrate the Speaker circuits using the remote

When the speaker circuits are wired to the micro DAU it is important to calibrate the circuits by pressing the CAL button.

To calibrate the speaker circuit at the micro DAU

To calibrate the speaker circuits using the Remote controlThe preferred method of calibrating the speaker circuits is by using the CAL button on the micro DAU PCB.


You can also calibrate the speakercircuits by using the remote control.

micro DAU board

Switch On the Test Mode at the Control panel.

Press the CAL button on micro DAU board tocalibrate the both speaker circuits.Start of calibration, single indication:

Wait for 2 minutes for end of calibration.No indication is given of end of calibration.

Ensure the panel Test Mode is switched Off

CAL/FaultReset

x2 Audio Status

x2 - 2 flashes (single occurrence)

Key

To calibrate the speaker circuits

Switch On the Test mode at the control panel, see #.

Press and hold the button and make a short presson the Power button and then release the button.This will start the calibration of both the speaker circuitsof the micro DAU.

ƒ

Switch Off the Test mode at the control panel, see #.

Wait for 2 minutes You may also hear a popping soundfrom the speakers during calibration.

Audio Status

Circuit B fault

Circuit A fault

3m

-m

axim

um

range

RemoteControl

Trouble shootingIf the remote control fails to operate in close proximity tothe indication aperture on micro DAU then a possiblecause may be the battery. Replace the battery in theremote control.

¦

+-

micro DAU

Audio Status

Circuit B fault

Circuit A fault

Indication atRemote Control

Indications atmicro DAU

#At the control panel press theMenu On/Off button,select [Test/Eng], [UserCode]and enter code if appropriate,select <etc>, [Test], [Zone], forOn select [On] or for offselect [Off], key in zonenumber and select [Enter].

To switch On/Off Test mode:

- steady On

Keys for Remote Control

- Off

x1 - 1 flash every 2s

- steady On

Keys for micro DAU

- Off

x3 - 3 quick flashesevery 2 seconds


ƒ

blink

x3

Make a short press on the button and release it topower off the remote control.

blink

blink - 1 blink (quick flash) every 1s

blink

blink

x2x3

x2 - 2 flashes single occurence

To adjust the volume level of PA, V A and background music using the remote

For certain types of applications, such as in an hospital, there may be a requirement to set the volume levels of a micro DAU usingthe remote control.

� To comply with the requirements of EN54:Part 3 the minimum volume of the S-Quad sounder for voicealarm application should be no less than 65dBA at 1m.


Audio Status

Circuit B fault

Circuit A fault

3m

-m

axim

um

range

RemoteControl

Trouble shootingIf the remote control fails to operate in close proximity to theindication aperture on micro DAU then a possible cause may bethe battery. Replace the battery in the remote control.

¦

+-

micro DAU

Audio Status

Circuit B fault

Circuit A fault

Normal indications

slow

Point the Remote Control at the micro DAU throughout makingadjustment to the volume levels.

Quick press and release the Power buttonon Remote control. You are now in 'BGM' backgroundmusic volume adjust mode.

ƒ

Indication atRemote Control

x1

Switch off the Test mode at the control panel, see #.

slowx1

slowx2

x1 slow

Press and hold the Power button to save the settingsand release the button after about 2 seconds.

If PA or VA then go to step 5.

Press the button to allow mode change.

Press or button to change from BGM to PA to VAvolume adjust mode.The micro DAU LED indicateswhich mode is about to be selected.

Press the button to accept the mode.This example assumes PA volume adjust modehas been selected.

+ -

volume adjust is not required

volume adjust

Press to increase the volume or to decrease the volumeand adjust volume to a required level.

+ -

ƒ

slowx2 slowslowThese LEDswill give a steadyOn indication whenthe volume reachesmaximum orminimum level.

x1 slow

Press to increase the volume or to decrease the volumeand adjust to a required level.

+ -

If PA or VA volume level is required to be adjusted thenswitch On the Test mode at the control panel, see #.

Indications atmicro DAU

#At the control panel press theMenu On/Off button,select [Test/Eng], [UserCode]and enter code if appropriate,select <etc>, [Test], [Zone], forOn select [On] or for offselect [Off], key in zonenumber and select [Enter].

To switch On/Off Test mode:

- steady On

Keys for Remote Control

- Off

x1 - 1 flash every 2s

- steady On

Keys for micro DAU

- Off

blink - 1 quick flash every second

Fast - 8 quick flashes every second


x2 - 2 flashes every 2s

This LED will blinkif there is no audio.

Ensure appropriate audio is Onto enable volume setting.

This LED will blinkif there is no audio.

To test the audio to speaker circuits

The audio to speaker circuits can be tested by making announcements via:

� Emergency microphone

� PA microphone

� activating the central emergency and auxiliary messages at the control panel

� and by switching on the Background music system.

How to enable or disable Background music or PA

The background music and PA can be enabled or disabled, to do this press the Menu On/Off button and then select [Control]followed by [Enable] / [Disable] and then momentarily press <etc> and select [Audio], now select either [PA] or [Music] followed by[Enter].


How to connect the Audio Loop

The audio loop may be commissioned once the analoguedetection loop has been satisfactorily powered up with addressesallocated to all the devices on loop circuits,

� Before connecting the audio loop at thepanel ensure the panel is powered down.

It is recommended that each audio loop circuit is wired up andtested independently.

Testing the Audio loops

The audio loop must also be tested for open circuit and shortcircuit faults.

Open circuit fault on Audio loopWhen the positive or negative line of the audio loop isdisconnected at any point on the loop, the panel will display afault message and will light the fault LED, plus the panel buzzerwill sound.

The message displayed will read:

ACC Loop n O/C

There will also be other information such as time and date of theevent.

Short circuit fault on Audio loopWhen the positive and negative lines of the audio loop are shortcircuited together at any point on the loop, it will cause a faultevent and the panel will display a fault message and will light thefault LED, plus the panel buzzer will sound.

The message displayed will read:

ACC Loop n S/C (1,4)

There will also be other information such as time and date of theevent.

The numbers in the brackets will help identify the location of theshort circuit. In this case the location of the fault is between microDAU device address 1 and 4.


L1

01

L2

02

++

+

+L1

L2

0V

++

+

+L1

L2

0V

L1

0Vmicro Distributed Amplifier unit

L2

0V

PANEL

2 - way device

2 - way device

Earth tometal box


P7

L1 0V L2 0V L1 0V L2 0V

ANALOGUE LOOP CIRCUIT 1

Note: The 0V terminalsin the device terminal plateare electricallyconnected together.

LOOP 2 LOOP 1

P14

P4

L1 01 L2 02

P13P12

O/A O/B I/A I/B

AUDIO LOOP 1

O/A O/B I/A I/B

AUDIO LOOP 2

Audio Control Card

P12

O/A O/BI/A I/B

AUDIO LOOP

mic

roD

istrib

ute

dA

mp

lifier

un

it

P4

L1

01

L2

02

P1

2

O/A

O/B

I/AI/B

AU

DIO

LO

OP

ANALOGUE LOOP

AN

AL

OG

UE

LO

OP

AUDIO LOOP CIRCUIT 1

Manual call point

O/A O/B I/A I/B

AUDIO LOOP

How to link out anaudio loop if it isnot being used

Background MusicThe background music system should be connected to the control panel as shown below. The setting the 0dBA pre-amplified outputif adjustable must not cause the pointer on the VU meter at the control panel to deflect above 0dBA, in the red range, see page 22.

Further adjustment of volume level of audio to the speaker circuits is made during the configuration stage, this is done using thecommissioning tool. Volume adjustment is also possible using a remote control, see the micro DAU section.

PA MicrophoneThe PA microphone should be connected to the control panel as shown below. When configuring the system it is possible to selectthe voice alarms zones to which PA announcements apply. An attention tone such as a bing bong tone can be configuration to soundeach time the press to talk button on the microphone is pressed.


Audio Control Card

PANEL

P15

R

BGM

L

Spot announcement machine

Multi play CD

Twin cassette deck

DigitalAM/FM Tuner

Amplifier

Pre-amplified output0dB maximumMono

Stereo

L R

There are many typesof entertainment systemsthat are commercially available.This example show onearrangement of howan entertainment system maybe connected to the panel.

DO NOT connect theSpeaker outputs ofthe Amplifier to theAudio Control Card.

Amplified volumecontrol adjuststhe pre-amplifiedoutput.

Audio Control Card

PANEL

AB PTT1 0VPA MIC 1

24V

P14

PAPA1

Pu

rple

9

Bla

ck

12

Gre

en

6

Gre

y1

0

Ora

ng

e3

Bro

wn

1

Junction box

15-way D-type connector

Recommended cable Belden No 9842Cable distance 100m maximum

Pin

k4

Interface and panel outstations

It is important to prepare the interface units, mimic and repeat panels on aloop circuit to be powered up. This is necessary in order to minimise thenumber of fault events being flagged up.

VIG-INT-MAINS - Mains powered interface

NOTE: Always power-up this interface unit before powering-up thecontrol panel.

Interface and panel outstations VIG-INT-MAINS - Mains powered interface

Vigilon Sys tem Com mis sioning

Figure 3-1 Interface board connectionscdn34

RatingsZone (input) 24V nominal 2mA

maximumLink Position Meaning

Sector(output)

24V nominal 500mAmaximum (500mAtotal for all sectors)

LK1 1 - 2 # Normal zone voltage

Auxiliarypower output

24V nominal 250mAmaximum

LK1 2 - 3 Low zone voltage ‘Reduces the zonevoltage by 4V for Thorn detectors’

LED1(green)

When lit it indicateslocal mains power ishealthy

LK3 1 - 2# Fail safe disable

LED2(yellow)

When lit it indicatescommunication withloop circuit has failed

LK3 2 - 3 Fail safe enable

# - factory setting

S5 - rotary switch 0 - GENT detectors #

S6 Reset push button (failsafe)

Fail safe mode In this mode if there is a loop communication failure lasting over 1 minute duration, then all the outputs of the unit are activated, switchedOn. The outputs deactivate on restoration of communication.

If there are three communication failures over 10 minutes duration thenthe outputs will be latched On, in this case the unit must be powered downand powered up again to unlatch and restore normal operation.

Dual-in-lineswitches

q Set the dual-in-line switches S1-S4 for input, output or not used (off)position.

End-of-line units q Connect the end-of-line EOL units to IO lines to allow fault free IOlines to be seen for the allocation of addresses.

Links q Set the links LK1 and LK3 plus the rotary switch on the interfaceboard, as necessary.

NOTE: The mains terminals are located behind a metal cover inside theinterface unit enclosure.

q Connect the mains supply and power-up the unit, notice that LED1(green) and LED2 (yellow) are lit.

q Connect the battery and fit the battery restraint bracket.

Rotary switch The rotary switch can be set to any one of its 16 positions, from 0 to F.

q Normally the rotary switch is factory set for conventional GENTdetectors connected to input lines. Other settings are available to allowdetectors from other manufacturers.

VIG-INT-MAINS - Mains powered interface Interface and panel outstations


NOTE: All input circuits must have a GENT End-of-line units fitted,irrespective of manufacture of detector.

Rotaryswitch(S5)setting

detectormanufacturer

detector rangecomment

link LK1oninterfaceboard

type ofdetectorstested

0 Gent XEN-DET-XXXrange 1-2 whole range

1 Hochiki orApollo

CD rangeSeries 20

1-2 optical andheat

2 Menvier Series 700 1-2 optical

3 Nittan NH-G Series 1-2 Heat

4 Notifier EC range Withoutresistor fittedto detectorbase

1-2 Heat

5 Thorn Series 300 2-3 Optical

6 Gent XEN-DET-XXX range 1-2 whole range




A Gent XEN-DET-XXX range 1-2 whole range

B Gent XEN-DET-XXX range 1-2 whole range

C Gent XEN-DET-XXX range 1-2 whole range

D Gent XEN-DET-XXX range 1-2 whole range

E Gent XEN-DET-XXX range 1-2 whole range

F Gent XEN-DET-XXX range 1-2 whole range

NOTE: On changing the rotary switch setting, the interface unit must becompletely powered-down, both mains and battery supply, and thenpowered-up again.Also the loop on which the unit resides must be reallocated.

Othermanufacturers

MCP

q Where an input circuit is required to have other manufacturers manual call points, then a 3.9V zener diode should be fitted in serieswith the contacts of the call point. There should be no othercomponents fitted to the call point contacts.

NOTE: Where NITTAN detectors and manual call point are installed oninput circuit, the Vigilon system will not be able to differentiate between a fire from a call point or detector.

IO Line tests q Test the IO line as per project specification. The tests should be basedon the type of equipment interfaced, for example the interface maycontrol air conditioning system, escalator, fire door release or sprinklersystem.

Interface and panel outstations VIG-INT-MAINS - Mains powered interface


VIG-INT-1CH Single channel interfaceq Open the front cover and make the cable connections to the loop circuit.

NOTE: The loop and input line cable screens must be earthed.

In ter face and panel out sta tions VIG-INT-1CH Single channel interface


Figure 3-6 Single channel interface boardcdm21

Power-up q Connect the mains supply and power-up the panel. Indications given on the master repeat card:

• green (power on) LED will be lit

• amber (watchdog) LED will be lit momentarily

• red (loop communication failed) LED will be lit

• the local buzzer will sound for a short duration, if enabled

• after a short duration a message will appear on the mimic panel:OFF LINE

q Connect the battery supply.

Fault messagesMessage Meaning Possible cause

Comms fault Communications failurebetween mimic display andmimic control units

There is a wiring fault between mimicdisplay unit and mimic control unit

Disp Ack Fault The mimic display fails toacknowledge communicationsfrom the mimic control unit

There is a communication failure betweendisplay board (display unit) and smallinterface board in the (control unit)

MRC I/F fault The A4 mimic interface card inthe control unit has detected afault with the master repeatcard

Bad ribbon cable connection or the master repeat card is faulty

System error #1 Mimic display unit ROM fault Faulty micro processor in the display unit

System error #2 Mimic display unit RAM fault

System error #3 Hardware fault

System error #4 Spurious interrupt These faults are normally transient andinfrequent. Regular occurrence of suchfaults should be reported.System error #5 Data corruption

System error #6 Task stalled

q Close the door on the unit and lock it.

VIG-MIM-A4 A4 Mimic panel In ter face and panel out sta tions


Rotary switch q Set the rotary switch SW1 (on the interface board) for the requiredinput.

RotarySwitch(SW1)position

Input circuit function. To monitor:

mode of input circuitoperation

normalstatus ofthe inputsignal

delay(seconds)beforesignal isaccepted

0 Off

1 Off

2 Multiple inputs Fire N/O 0s

3 Multiple inputs Fire N/O 30s

4 Single input Fire N/O 0s

5 Single input Fire N/O 30s

6 Single input Fire N/C 0s

7 Single input Fire N/C 30s

8 Single input Fault N/O 0s

9 Single input Fault N/O 30s

A Single input Fault N/C 0s

B Single input Fault N/C 30s

C Single input Supervisory N/O 0s

D Single input Supervisory N/O 30s

E Single input Supervisory N/C 0s

F Single input Supervisory N/C 30s

N/O = Normally open N/C = Normally closed

NOTE: An input circuit is monitored for both open or short circuit fault.

Configurations The single channel interface unit can be configured to operate:

q Single input

q or Multiple input

q with Output signal via relay change over contacts

Input/Outputline test

At an appropriate stage of commissioning the interface input and outputcircuits must be tested as per project specification. The tests are based onthe type of equipment interfaced.

Sin gle in put

NOTE: When the single channel interface unit is configured to acceptsingle input then a line module must be used.

Line moduleswitch

q The line module may be installed in a remote location up to 100m cable distance away. Its two position switch must be set to input.

VIG-INT-1CH Single channel interface In ter face and panel out sta tions


Mul ti ple in puts

NOTE: When the single channel interface unit is configured for multipleinputs then an end-of-line capacitor unit must be used.

NOTE: The multiple inputs may be from manual call points withan in line 470 ohms resistor connected.

Out put cir cuitThe single channel interface unit output operation is via a relay. The relaycontacts are voltage free and rated:

q 5A at 24Vdc

NOTE: The relay output of the interface will operate with a sector.Therefore the single channel interface outstation will need to be configured to a sector.

NOTE: A local switching facility to select the input/output mode ofoperation is not provided. The single channel interface unit operates bothinput and output circuits.

In ter face and panel out sta tions VIG-INT-1CH Single channel interface


VIG-INT-ZONE Loop powered zone moduleq Open the front cover.

q Make the cable connections to the loop circuit.

NOTE: The loop and input line cable screens must be earthed.

NOTE: An end-of-line capacitor unit must be connected to the end of the detection (zone) circuit.

NOTE: The Vigilon system is unable to distinguish between a fire inputfrom manual call points and detectors connected to the zone circuit ofthe loop powered zone module.

Zone circuit The zone circuit can accept up to 20 conventional devices, such as GENTXEN-DET-XXX range of conventional fire detectors and manual call points( the latter fitted with 3.9V zener or 470 R resistor in series with its contact).

VIG-INT-ZONE Loop powered zone module In ter face and panel out sta tions


Figure 3-7 Loop powered zone modulecdm40

VIG-INT-LOOP - Loop powered interface

q Ensure the cable connecting to the IO lines of the interface unit is EMC compliant.

Dual-in-lineswitches

q Set the dual-in-line switches S1 and S2 (on the interface board) for therequired input or output on each channel.

VIG-INT-LOOP - Loop powered interface Interface and panel outstations


Figure 3-2Mains interface

& line-moduleboards

cd8m083

NOTE: The supervisory mode is a non fire input used to trigger acommand build.

NOTE: On changing the setting of switches S1 and S2 the loop must be reallocated.

Keyswitchapplication

q Where keyswitches are being used, they must be connected toconnectors P1 (for channel 1), P2 (for channel 2), P3 (for channel 3)and P4 (for channel 4).

q Fit the keyswitch door to the interface unit. The door can accommodate4 off 2-way keyswitches or 2 off 3-way keyswitches, see keyswitchdoor option.

NOTE: A line module must not be used on a channel that has akeyswitch connected to connectors P1, P2, P3 and P4.

q For keyswitch input, the interface board dual-in-line switches S1/S2must be set to a normally open input.

Line module q If a line module is used, set its switch S1 to the same, input or output,setting as the interface channel to which it is connected.

q The line module may be installed in a remote location up to 100m cable distance away.

NOTE: A maximum of 1Km cable usage per loop is allowed for theconnection of line modules installed in remote locations and 19245-06power supply input output lines.

IO line test q Test the IO line as per project specification. The tests should be basedon the type of equipment interfaced, for example equipment such as airconditioning system, escalator, fire door release or sprinkler system.

Interface and panel outstations VIG-INT-LOOP - Loop powered interface


Keyswitch door option

Assuming a keyswitch door is to be fitted to a loop powered interface unitor the rack interface:

q Remove the appropriate blanking plate from the door.

q Fit onto the keyswitch door the keyswitch, lock nut, label holder anddress-nut.

q Replace the original interface door with a keyswitch door.

q Fit the wires from keyswitches to connectors P1 - P4 or CH1-CH4(Rack only) on the interface board.

Keyswitch door option Interface and panel outstations


Figure 3-4 Keyswitch interface doorscd8m084

<——— Switch S1—--><Switch S2->

Channel —>Switch No>

CH11 2 3

CH24 5 6

CH37 8 1

CH42 3 4 Mode

1 = On0 = Off

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Fire (normally open)

0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Fault (normally open)

0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 Supervisory (normally open)

0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 Not in use (channel not set up)

1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 Fire (normally closed)

1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 Fault (normally closed)

1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 Supervisory (normally closed)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Output

NOTE: The supervisory mode is a non fire input used to trigger acommand build.

Switch S2No—> 5 6 7 8 Channel No Delay

0 0 0 0 All No delay

0 0 0 1 CH1 10 seconds




q Partially slide each card into the respective socket. The rack unit canaccommodate up to 10 cards.

NOTE: The interface cards must be installed with ribbon header at thefront for connection to the front line terminal modules.

q Connect each interface card to either the respective line-terminalmodule or keyswitch. Then fully slide the interface card into the rackand ensure it is fully seated into its socket.

NOTE: A keyswitch door option can be fitted to this rack unit. The doorcan accommodate up to 28 off 2-way keyswitches or 20 off 3-waykeyswitches, limited by 40 inputs, see keyswitch door option.

VIG-RACK Interface rack unit Interface and panel outstations


Figure 3-6 DIL switchsettings for rackinterface board

cd8m086

VIG-MIM/ZONE Mimic or Zonal panelSee also Mimic configurer part of this manual.

q Unhook the front cover.

Zonal panel NOTE: The zonal panel is supplied with the pre-programmed EPROM and the zone designation plan fitted.

Mimic panel q A custom site plan must be fitted in-between the two translucent sheets of the panel front cover. Also a custom EPROM must be fitted on themaster repeat card, see Mimic configurer part of this manual.

NOTE: Ensure the custom site plan is fitted to the panel to coincide with the LED matrix.

q Open the hinged inner door.

q Connect the mains supply and power-up the panel.

• the green and amber LEDs on the master repeat card are lit

• the local buzzer sounds for a short duration

• after a short duration a message will appear on the mimic panel:OFF LINE

q Operate the keyswitch on the panel, this will:

• cancel the local buzzer

• and carry out lamp test.

q Connect the battery supply.

In ter face and panel out sta tions VIG-MIM/ZONE Mimic or Zonal panel


Figure 3-1 Mimic panel battery connection

cd8m087

VIG-MIM-A4 A4 Mimic panelSee also Mimic configurer part of this manual.

The A4 Mimic panel set consists of:

q A4 Mimic display unit - which requires:

• Site plan kit to make it into an A4 Mimic panel

• or Zonal kit to convert to an A4 Zonal panel

q A4 Mimic control unit

A4 Mimic dis play unitThis unit requires a custom site plan or a zonal plan to be fitted to the LED housing.

To fit the siteplan

a) Remove the protective cover fitted to the mimic display unit and openthe door.

b) Remove the 8-screws that secure the LED housing to the door frame.The LED housing may be hinged back into the backbox and allowedto rest on the foam block to ease installation of the A4 site plan.



Figure 3-2 A4 Mimic panel with the door opencdm18

c) Remove the backing from one side of an A5 adhesive sheet. Apply to the reverse side of the printed A4 site plan or zonal plan sheet, sothat when attached to the LED blocks it will be in the position shownby the dotted line, see Figure 3-3. Press the adhesive sheet downfirmly.

.

d) Remove the remaining backing from the adhesive sheet attached tothe plan sheet.

e) Align and fit the plan sheet to the LED blocks and smooth out anyair bubbles.

In ter face and panel out sta tions VIG-MIM-A4 A4 Mimic panel


Figure 3-3 A4 Mimic plan and buzzer configurationcdm20

NOTE: If slight repositioning is required, the low-tack adhesive sheetallows the plan sheet to be removed and replaced as required.

Local buzzerdisable

f) If required, insert a link to short pins P3 on the mimic display PCB todisable the local buzzer.

NOTE: With the buzzer disabled there will be no local buzzer indicationin the event of a fire or fault condition.

g) Refit the LED housing to the door frame using screws previouslyremoved.

h) Ensure the cable connections from the Mimic control unit are made atthe Mimic display unit.

NOTE: Ensure the cable screen is earthed to both the control unit anddisplay unit.

i) Close and lock the door.

A4 Mimic Con trol unitThis unit requires a custom EPROM to be fitted to the master repeat card,in the mimic control unit, see also the Mimic configurer part of this manual.

q Open the mimic control unit door.

q Make the cable connections between the A4 Mimic display unit and the mimic control unit. Connect also the loop and mains supply cables.

q Check all internal connections are secure.



Figure 3-4Mimic display to

Control unitconnections

cdm19

Local buzzerdisable

q If required, insert a link to short pins P1 on the master repeat card PCBto disable the local buzzer.

NOTE: Under mains fail condition, that is with only the green power and yellow fault LEDs On, the optional battery if installed will provide astandby supply to the unit for up to 72 hours plus 0.5 hour alarm load.

NOTE: If the local buzzer is enabled, then there is no means of locallycancelling the buzzer during local fault condition. The buzzer isautomatically cancelled when the main panel buzzer is cancelled.

In ter face and panel out sta tions VIG-MIM-A4 A4 Mimic panel


Figure 3-5 Components and battery connectioncdm21

VIG-BEAM Beam sensor

Preparation To commission the beam sensor pair check the following:

q The control panel Loop processor and Local controller cards havesoftware version 3.4x or later.

NOTE: The VIG-BEAM Beam sensor is a Type 3 sensor and it is SAFEcompatible.

q The beam transmitter and receiver heads are installed on the same loopcircuit.

q A two way radio is available for communication, while one personaligns the beam sensor head, another person operates the controls andread measurements given at the control panel.

The terms ‘head, device and outstation’ are used interchangeably.

These procedures assume the heads are mounted on the angle brackets.Similar procedures are applicable for the IP rated and parallel brackets.

Identification q The beam sensor heads each has a black plastic circular labelsurrounding the lens for identification.

q The 2-way base has is a black plastic cover fitted over the electronics.

VIG-BEAM Beam sensor Preparation


Figure 6-1Beam sensor

pair andbrackets

cdn473

Beam sensor alignment

NOTE: Before aligning the sensor heads check to ensure all bracket and base fixing screws are securely fitted. After alignment ensure the pivotpins and adjusters are secure.

Initial alignment a) Using the adjuster on the bracket, roughly align one head to face theother head. To do this:

• slacken the locknuts to unscrew the Y- adjusters

• to make a large adjustment remove the centre pin of the Y pivot

• align the head in the Y-axis to face the opposite head

• secure the centre pin into the appropriate Y-pivot, to enableadjustment

• turn the adjusters to meet the centre pin and lock the axis adjustedusing the lock nuts.

• repeat procedure for the X-adjusters

• repeat the whole procedure for the opposite head.

Initial alignment VIG-BEAM Beam sensor


Figure 6-2 Beam sensor with bracket assemblycdm44

Fine adjustment g) Unlock the lock nuts to allow Y axis adjustment and using theadjusters move the transmitter head in a Y direction, then:

• stop on reaching a time average reading 5 bits below the peakvalue

• while counting the number of turns, adjust in the opposite direction to reach 5 bits below the peak value

• finally turn the adjuster half the number of counted turns, towardsthe peak and then stop

• secure the axis adjusted using the lock nuts

h) Repeat g) for adjustment in the X direction.

i) Repeat g) and h) at the receiver head.

l) Carry out a final [Autogain]. Then recheck the time average readingis within 140 to 170 band.

m) Back up the appropriate loop processor card LPC (which holds thegain data) to the RAM using [Back Up] command in the [Set Up]menu.

Fine adjustment VIG-BEAM Beam sensor


b)Select Gain Select a gain from the table for the required path. Set the gain of thereceiver head, select [Test/Eng] -> [Gain] and enter gain value.

CAUTION: On changing the gain of the beam receiver, donot:❑ power-down the control panel❑ or reset the local controller card❑ or reallocate or reset the loop having beam sensorsuntil gain changed acknowledge followed by the gain numberis display. Otherwise a ‘Memory corrupt’ message will appearon the display.

Gain Distance

6-929-3356-60

2m10m100m

Courseadjustment

c) Use the [Align] function in the [Test/Eng] menu and enter the twosensor head addresses. Note the LEDs on the heads will flash onceevery 2 seconds:

• a 1.9 seconds LED flash will be seen for a large signal

• a 100mS LED flash will be seen for a small signal.

d) Adjust the transmitter head in X and Y directions to obtain a longLED flash signal, allow at least 3 seconds for the flash rate to change.Then lock the adjusters using the lock nuts.

e) Repeat d) for the receiver head, to obtain a maximum flash length.

Time averages f) Using the [Info] menu, read the time averages on channel 2 of thereceiver head, this should be between 140-170. After each adjustmentwait for 5 seconds for a change in the reading.

NOTE: For time average reading above 200 bits, carry out an [Autogain]using the [Test Eng] menu. This will minimise the fine adjustment.

CAUTION: Never [Autogain] a range of outstations.

VIG-BEAM Beam sensor Select Gain



4188-856_i2_12/06_Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.


Ap

pen

dix

F-

Devic

eco

mm

issio

nin

g




Telephone +44 (0) 116 246 2000 Fax (UK): +44 (0)116 246 2300

4188-856_i2_12/06 Generic Vigilon (Compact + VA) Comms.

by Honeywell



Generic Commissioning Instructions

Documents

Transcript of Generic Commissioning Instructions